2018 FIAT® 124 SPIDER ABARTH OWNER’S MANUAL VEHICLES SOLD IN CANADA This manual illustrates and describes the operation of With respect to any Vehicles Sold in Canada, the name features and equipment that are either standard or op- FCA US LLC shall be deemed to be deleted and the name tional on this vehicle. This manual may also include a FCA Canada Inc. used in substitution therefore. description of features and equipment that are no longer DRIVING AND ALCOHOL available or were not ordered on this vehicle. Please Drunken driving is one of the most frequent causes of disregard any features and equipment described in this accidents. manual that are not on this vehicle. Your driving ability can be seriously impaired with blood FCA US LLC reserves the right to make changes in design alcohol levels far below the legal minimum. If you are and specifications, and/or make additions to or improve- drinking, don’t drive. Ride with a designated non- ments to its products without imposing any obligation drinking driver, call a cab, a friend, or use public trans- upon itself to install them on products previously manu- portation. factured. WARNING!

Driving after drinking can lead to an accident. Your perceptions are less sharp, your reflexes are slower, and your judgment is impaired when you have been drinking. Never drink and then drive. Copyright © 2017 FCA US LLC DEAR CUSTOMER Dear Customer, We would like to congratulate and thank you for choosing a Fiat 124 Spider. We have written this Owner’s Manual to help you get to know all the features of your vehicle and use it in the best possible way. Here you will find information, advice and important warnings regarding use of your vehicle and how to achieve the best performance from the technical features of your vehicle. You are advised to take the time to read these publications carefully before taking to the road for the first time, to become familiar with the controls and above all with those concerning brakes, steering and transmission; at the same time, you can understand the vehicle behavior on different road surfaces. This document also provides a description of special features and tips, as well as essential information for the safe driving, care and maintenance of your vehicle over time. After reading it, you are advised to keep the Owner’s Manual inside the vehicle, for an easy reference and for making sure it remains in the vehicle should it be sold. In the attached Warranty Booklet you will also find a description of the Services that FCA offers to its customers, and the detail of the terms and conditions for maintaining its validity. We are sure that these will help you to get in touch with and appreciate your new vehicle and the service provided by the people at FCA. Enjoy reading. Happy motoring! Note: This Owner’s Manual describes all models of the vehicle; please consider only the information relevant to your vehicle’s trim level, engine and model. All data contained in this publication are purely indicative. FCA can modify the vehicle model described in this publication at any time, for technical or commercial purposes. For further information, contact your authorized dealer. Read This Carefully REFUELING Only refuel with unleaded gasoline with a recommended rating of 91 octane. A rating less than 87 octane is not acceptable. Do not use gasoline containing methanol or ethanol E85. Using these mixtures may cause misfiring and handling issues, as well as damage fundamental components of the fuel supply system.

STARTING THE ENGINE

If equipped with a manual transmission: Be sure that the parking brake is engaged; place the gear selector in NEUTRAL, fully depress the clutch pedal without pressing the accelerator, and then push the ignition button. The engine will start as soon as the ignition is pushed. If equipped with an automatic transmission: Be sure that the parking brake is engaged and that the gear selector is in PARK (P) or NEUTRAL (N), depress the brake pedal, and then push the ignition button. The engine will start as soon as the ignition is pushed.

PARKING ON FLAMMABLE MATERIAL

The catalytic converter develops high temperatures during operation. Do not park the vehicle on grass, dry leaves, pine needles or other flammable material: fire hazard.

RESPECTING THE ENVIRONMENT

The vehicle is equipped with a system that carries out a continuous diagnosis of the emission-related components in order to help protect the environment.

ELECTRICAL ACCESSORIES

Contact your authorized dealer if you decide to add electrical accessories (with the risk of gradually draining the battery) after buying the vehicle. They can calculate the overall electrical requirement and check that the vehicle's electric system can support the required load.

SCHEDULED SERVICING

Correct maintenance of the vehicle is essential for ensuring that it maintains its performance and its safety features, its environmental friendliness and low running costs are unchanged over time. How To Use This Manual ESSENTIAL INFORMATION Each time directions (left/right or forward/backwards) are listed, they are determined by facing forward from the rear of the vehicle or as from the point of view of being seated inside the car. Special cases not complying with this rule will be properly specified in the text. The figures in the Owner’s Manual are provided by way of example only: this might imply that some details of the image do not correspond to the actual arrangement of your vehicle. In addition, the Owner’s Manual has been conceived considering vehicles with steering wheel on the left side; it is therefore possible that on vehicles with steering wheel on the right side, the position of some controls or elements is not exactly mirror-like with respect to the figure. To identify the chapter with the information needed you can consult the index at the end of this Owner’s Manual. Chapters can be rapidly identified by graphic tabs, at the side of each odd page. A key showing the order of the chapter and the corresponding tab symbols appears on another page. SYMBOLS While reading this Owner’s Manual you will find a series of WARNINGS that must be carefully followed to prevent incorrect use of the components of the vehicle, which could cause accidents or injuries. There are also CAUTIONS that must be carefully followed prevent procedures that could damage your vehicle. Therefore, all WARNINGS and CAUTIONS must always be carefully followed. WARNINGS and CAUTIONS are recalled in the text with the following symbols: Personal Safety

Vehicle Safety Vehicle Modifications / Alterations

Warning!

Any change or alteration of the vehicle might seriously affect its safety and road holding, thus causing accidents, in which the occupants could be fatally injured.

ACCESSORIES PURCHASED BY THE OWNER If after buying the vehicle, you decide to install electrical accessories that require a permanent electrical supply (e.g. radio, satellite anti-theft system, etc.) or accessories that burden the electrical supply, contact your authorized dealer, whose personnel will check whether the vehicles's electrical system is able to withstand the load required , or whether it needs to be integrated with a more powerful battery. Note: Use only floor mats that leave the pedal area unobstructed and that are firmly secured so that they cannot slip out of position and interfere with the pedals or impair safe operation of your vehicle in other ways. INSTALLING ELECTRICAL / ELECTRONIC DEVICES The following regulatory statement applies to all radio frequency (RF) devices equipped in this vehicle: This device complies with part 15 of the FCC Rules and with Industry Canada license-exempt RSS standard(s). Operation is subject to the following two conditions: 1. This device may not cause harmful interference. 2. This device must accept any interference received, including interference that may cause undesired operation. Note: Changes or modifications not expressly approved by the party responsible for compliance could void the user’s authority to operate the equipment.

RADIO TRANSMITTERS AND MOBILE PHONES Radio transmitter equipment (vehicle mobile phones, CB radios, amateur radio etc.) cannot be used inside the vehicle unless a separate aerial is mounted externally. Transmission and reception of these devices may be affected by the shielding effect of the vehicle body. As far as the use of EC-approved mobile phones is concerned (GSM, GPRS, UMTS, LTE), follow the usage instructions provided by the mobile phone Manufacturer. The use of these devices inside the vehicle (without an external aerial) may cause the electrical systems to malfunction. This could compromise the vehicle safety in addition to constituting a potential hazard for passengers' health. If mobile phones/laptops/smartphones/tablets are inside the vehicle and/or close to the electronic key, a reduced performance of the Advanced Keyless Entry System may occur.

CELL PHONE WARNING Note: Please comply with the legal regulations concerning the use of communication equipment in vehicles in your country. Use of any electrical devices such as cell phones, computers, portable radios, vehicle navigation or other devices by the driver while the vehicle is moving is dangerous. Dialing a number on a cell phone while driving also ties-up the driver's hands. Use of these devices will cause the driver to be distracted and could lead to a serious accident. If a passenger is unable to use the device, pull off the right-of-way to a safe area before use. If use of a cell phone is necessary despite this warning, use a hands-free system to at least leave the hands free to drive the vehicle. Never use a cell phone or other electrical devices while the vehicle is moving and, instead, concentrate on the full-time job of driving.

GRAPHICAL TABLE OF CONTENTS

GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE GETTING TO KNOW YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL SAFETY

STARTING AND OPERATING

IN CASE OF EMERGENCY

SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE

TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS

CUSTOMER ASSISTANCE

INDEX

GRAPHICAL TABLE OF CONTENTS

FRONT VIEW

01020304-000-100AB Front View 1 — Wheels And Tires 3 — Headlights 5 — Convertible Top 2 — Windshield Wiper Blades 4 — Engine Compartment

9 REAR VIEW

01020304-001-100AB Rear View 1 — Decklid 3 — Exterior Mirror 2 — Taillight 4 — Wheels/Tires

10 INSTRUMENT PANEL

02010200-129-555AB Instrument Panel 1 — Turn Signal/High Beams Lever 4 — Hazard Warning Lights Button 7 — Driver Air Bag 2 — Instrument Cluster 5 — Passenger Air Bag 3 — Windshield Wiper And Washers 6 — Ignition Switch

11 INTERIOR OVERVIEW

01020304-002-100AB Interior Overview 1 — Instrument Cluster 4 — Climate Control System 7 — Seats 2 — Steering Wheel 5 — Transmission Gear Selector 8 — Radio Controls 3 — Radio Systems 6 — Parking Brake

12 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE

KEYS ...... 14 IGNITION SWITCH ...... 20 ADVANCED KEYLESS ENTRY SYSTEM — IF EQUIPPED ...... 21 VEHICLE SECURITY ALARM SYSTEM — IF EQUIPPED ...... 24 DOORS...... 26 SEATS...... 33 NON-ADJUSTABLE HEAD RESTRAINTS ...... 34 STEERING WHEEL ...... 35 MIRRORS ...... 36 EXTERIOR LIGHTS ...... 38 WINDSHIELD WIPERS / WASHER .43 CLIMATE CONTROL SYSTEM ....45 POWER WINDOWS ...... 56 HOMELINK — IF EQUIPPED .....58 INTERNAL EQUIPMENT ...... 61 TRUNKLID...... 66 TRUNK EMERGENCY RELEASE . . .68 HOOD ...... 69 CONVERTIBLE TOP (SOFT TOP) . .70 ELECTRIC POWER STEERING ....74 ENVIRONMENT PROTECTION SYSTEMS...... 74

13 KEYS To use the Emergency Key, push the Do not leave children or animals inside mechanical latch on the back side of Key Fob parked vehicles in hot weather. Interior heat the key fob and pull out the emergency build-up may cause serious injury or death. A code number is stamped on the plate key. and attached to the key fob. Detach Note: Key Fob Functions this plate and store it in a safe place (not in the vehicle) if you need to make Always keep a spare key fob if one With A Vehicle Security Alarm replace the Emergency Key. is lost. If a key fob is lost, see an System Also, write down the code number and authorized dealer as soon as possible. The hazard warning lights will flash keep it in a separate safe and The driver must carry the key fob to when the vehicle security alarm system convenient place. Do not keep it in the ensure the Keyless Entry System is armed or disarmed. vehicle. functions properly. With Advanced Keyless Function If your key fob is lost, contact an A beep will sound when the doors, authorized dealer. trunk lid, and fuel filler door are locked Note: Your key fob configuration may Warning! or unlocked using the key fob. The vary with equipped features. Please see beep volume can be adjusted or turned the example shown below: Before exiting a vehicle, always shift the off. automatic transmission into PARK or the Use the following procedure to change manual transmission into FIRST gear or the beep setting: REVERSE, apply the parking brake, then turn the engine OFF, remove the key fob 1. Place the ignition in the OFF position from the vehicle and lock your vehicle. and close the doors and the trunk lid. GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE Never leave children alone in a vehicle, 2. Open the driver's door. or with access to an unlocked vehicle. 3. Within 30 seconds of opening the Allowing children to be in a vehicle driver's door, push and hold the lock unattended is dangerous for a number of reasons. A child or others could be button on the key fob for five seconds. seriously or fatally injured. Children should Note: 04010100-361-002AB be warned not to touch the parking brake, Key Fob brake pedal or the gear selector. The doors, trunk lid, and fuel filler 1 — Emergency Key Do not leave the key fob in or near the door will lock, and the beep will 2 — Key Fob vehicle, or in a location accessible to activate at the current volume (if the 3 — Key Code Number Plate children. A child could operate power beep is currently set to not activate, it windows, other controls, or move the will not activate). vehicle.

14 The setting changes when the lock Unlock Button Pushing a request switch on the button on the key fob is pushed, and To unlock the doors and trunk lid, push exterior door handle. the beep will activate at the set volume the unlock button on the key fob, and Trunk Button (if the beep sound has been set to not the hazard warning lights will flash To open the trunk lid, push and hold the activate, it will not activate). twice. trunk button until the trunk lid opens. Complete changing the setting by doing The system can be set to unlock both Panic Button the following: doors. Use the following procedure to To turn the Panic Alarm on or off, push Placing the ignition in ACC or ON change the setting: and hold the Panic button on the key position. 1. Place the ignition in the OFF position fob and release. When the Panic Alarm Closing the driver's door. and close the doors and trunk lid. is on, the headlights will turn on, the park lights will flash, the horn will pulse Opening the trunk lid. 2. Open the driver's door. on and off, and the turn signal lights will Not operating the key fob for ten 3. Within 30 seconds of opening the flash. seconds. driver's door, push and hold the unlock Note: The panic button will work if the button on the key fob for five seconds. doors or trunk are opened or closed. Pushing any button, except the lock Turning On The Alarm button on the key fob. Note: The sound of the doors locking/unlocking can be heard. After Pushing the panic button for one Pushing a request switch on the second or more will trigger the alarm for exterior door handle. this, the system will change the setting when the unlock button is pushed (the about two minutes and thirty seconds, Note: Refer to “Lock/Unlock With sound of the doors locking/unlocking and the following will occur: Advanced Keyless Entry Function — If can be heard). The horn sounds intermittently. Equipped” in “Doors” for further The setting change can be completed The hazard warning lights flash. information. by doing any one of the following: The operation indicator light flashes Turning Off The Alarm Placing the ignition in the ACC or ON when the buttons are pushed. The alarm will stop by pushing any position. button on the key fob. Key Fob Buttons Closing the driver’s door. Operational Range Lock Button Opening the trunk lid. To lock the doors, trunk lid, and fuel The system operates only when the filler door, push the lock button on the Not operating the key fob for ten driver is in the vehicle or within key fob. The hazard warning lights will seconds. operational range, and the key fob is being carried. flash once and a beep will sound. Pushing any button except the unlock button on the key fob.

15 Starting The Engine Key Suspend Function Replacing The Key Fob Battery Starting the engine may be possible If a key fob is left in the vehicle, key fob Proceed as follows: even if the key fob is outside the vehicle functions are temporarily suspended to 1. Push the mechanical release button and close to a door or window. Always prevent unlawful use of the vehicle. start the engine from the driver's seat. and remove the emergency key. To restore the functions, push the If the vehicle is started, and the key fob unlock button on the functions- is not in the vehicle, the vehicle will not suspended key fob. restart after it is shut off. The ignition is placed in the OFF position. Key Fob Battery Key Fob Antenna Location Replacement If key fob does not work, and the indicator lights do not flash, the battery may be low or discharged. Replace with a new battery (CR2025 type) before the key fob becomes unusable. 07031301-361-002 Emergency Key Removed The following conditions indicate that the battery power is low: 1 — Key Fob Case With Mechanical Indicator light (green) flashes in Release Button the instrument cluster for about 2 — Emergency Key 04010202-12R-001 30 seconds after the engine is placed in GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE Key Fob Antenna Location the OFF position. 1 — Interior Antenna The system does not operate, and 2 — Operational Range the operation indicator light on the key fob does not flash when the buttons are Note: The engine may not start if the pushed. key fob is placed in or around the The system's operational range is following areas: reduced. Around The Instrument Panel Note: Replacing the battery at an authorized dealer is recommended to In The Storage Compartments prevent damage to the key fob. If replacing the battery by yourself, follow the instruction below.

16 2. Insert a coin, a flat blade screw 4. Separate the key fob case, then driver, or the tip of your emergency key remove the battery. into the now exposed slot and carefully pry in the direction of the arrows to open the cover (3) slightly.

07031301-367-001 6 — Install New Battery 07031301-364-003 Note: Be careful not to allow the Remove Back Cover For Battery rubber ring shown in call-out (6) to be Replacement scratched or damaged. If the rubber 07031301-362-002 ring comes out, reinstall it before 3 — Pry Case Left Side 3 — Key Fob Case inserting a new battery. 3. Insert a coin, a flat blade screw driver, 5 — Key Fob Battery Engine Start Function or the tip of your emergency key into the 5. Insert a new battery with the positive When Key Fob Battery Is side gap and carefully pry in the direction Discharged of the arrow to open the cover (4). pole facing up. Then, cover the battery with the battery cap. If a key fob has discharged or 6. Close the cover and reinsert the malfunctioned, start the engine by Emergency Key. holding the Key Fob over the keyless ignition START/STOP button. Be careful to not to allow the following. The signal from the key fob will not be received correctly, and the engine may not start: Contact with metal parts of other key fobs or metal objects.

07031301-363-002 4 — Pry Case Right Side

17 Contact from key fobs from other If the engine cannot be started due to a When touching the keyless ignition vehicle’s equipped with an immobilizer discharged key fob battery, the engine START/STOP button using the system. can be started using the following backside of the key fob, touch the procedure: keyless ignition START/STOP button Contact with devices for electronic with the key fob buttons facing up. purchases or security passage touch. 1. Continue to depress the brake pedal firmly until the engine has completely The engine cannot be started unless started. the clutch pedal is fully depressed (manual transmission) or the brake 2. Manual Transmission: Continue to pedal is fully depressed (automatic depress the clutch pedal firmly until the transmission). engine has completely started. If there is a malfunction with the keyless 3. Verify that the keyless ignition start ignition START/STOP button function, indication light (green) flashes. the keyless ignition start indicator light (amber) flashes. In this case, the engine 4. Touch the keyless ignition may start. However, contact an START/STOP button using the backside authorized dealer as soon as possible. 05010201-KY1-001AB of the key fob while the keyless ignition If the keyless ignition start indicator light No Keys Touching The Key Fob start indicator light (green) flashes. (green) does not illuminate, perform the 5. Verify that the keyless ignition start operation from the beginning. If it does indicator light (green) turns on. not illuminate, contact an authorized dealer. 6. Push the keyless ignition To change the ignition position without GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE START/STOP button to start the engine. starting the engine, perform the following operations after the keyless ignition start indicator light (green) turns on: 1. Release the clutch pedal (manual transmission) or brake pedal (automatic 05010201-KY2-001AB transmission). No Key Fob Touching The Key Fob 2. Push the keyless ignition START/STOP button to change the ignition position. The ignition cycles in the order of ACC, ON, and OFF each 05010201-L12-001AB Discharged Key Fob Battery Start time the keyless ignition START/STOP Procedure button is pushed. 18 Note: To change the ignition position The key fob is near electronic again, perform the operation from the devices such as personal computers. Caution! beginning. Non-FCA genuine electronic Emergency Operation For Starting equipment is installed in the vehicle. The Engine If your vehicle battery becomes low or If the key warning light (red) illuminates, dead, your key fob will become locked in There is equipment which discharges or the keyless ignition start indicator the ignition. radio waves near the vehicle. light (amber) flashes, this could indicate Do not attempt to remove the key fob The key fob may consume battery that the engine may not start using the while in this condition, damage could occur power excessively if it receives usual starting method. Contact an to the key fob or ignition module. Only high-intensity radio waves. Do not place authorized dealer as soon as possible. remove the emergency key for locking and the key fob near electronic devices If this occurs, the engine can be unlocking the doors. such as televisions or personal force-started. push and hold the Leave the key fob in the ignition and computers. keyless ignition START/STOP button either: To avoid damage to the key fob, DO until the engine starts. Jump Start the vehicle. NOT: Other procedures necessary for starting Charge the battery. Drop the key fob. the engine such as having the key fob in the vehicle, and depressing the Contact your authorized dealer for Get the key fob wet. clutch pedal (manual transmission) or assistance on how to remove the key fob using the manual override method. Disassemble the key fob unless the brake pedal (automatic replacing the battery. transmission) are required. Key Fob Cautions Expose the key fob to high temperatures such as direct sunlight. Because the key fob uses low-intensity radio waves, it may not function under Expose the key fob to any kind of the following conditions: magnetic field. The key fob is carried with a Place heavy objects on the key fob. communication device such as cellular Put the key fob in an ultrasonic phones. cleaner. The key fob contacts or is covered Put any magnetized objects close to by a metal object. the key fob.

19 General Information IGNITION SWITCH Note: The following regulatory statement Push Button Start The engine starts by pushing the applies to all Radio Frequency (RF) Positions keyless ignition START/STOP button devices equipped in this vehicle: while depressing the clutch pedal The system operates only when the key (manual transmission) or the brake This device complies with Part 15 of the fob is within operational range. FCC Rules and with Industry Canada pedal (automatic transmission). To license-exempt RSS standard(s). When the clutch pedal (manual change the ignition position, push the Operation is subject to the following transmission) or brake pedal (automatic keyless ignition START/STOP button two conditions: transmission) are not depressed and without depressing the clutch or brake the keyless ignition START/STOP pedal. 1. This device may not cause harmful button is pushed, the ignition cycles in interference. the order of OFF, ACC, and ON. Do not leave the ignition in the ON Pushing the START/STOP button again position while the engine is not 2. This device must accept any from ON position cycles the ignition to running. The battery could discharged. interference received, including the OFF position. If the ignition is left in ACC position (for interference that may cause undesired automatic transmission, the gear operation. selector is in the P position, and the Note: Changes or modifications not ignition is in ACC), the ignition cycles to expressly approved by the party the OFF position automatically after responsible for compliance could void about 25 minutes. the user’s authority to operate the OFF equipment. The power supply to electrical devices GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE turns off, and the keyless ignition start indicator light (amber) also turns off. In the OFF position, the steering wheel is locked. 05010101-L12-001AB Keyless START/STOP Ignition ACC (Accessory) Button Some electrical accessories will operate and the indicator light (amber) illuminates. In the ACC position, the steering wheel is unlocked. The Keyless Entry System does not function while the keyless ignition has been placed in the ACC position, and the doors will not lock/unlock even if they have been locked manually. 20 ON Never leave children alone in a vehicle, ADVANCED This is the normal running position after or with access to an unlocked vehicle. KEYLESS ENTRY the engine is started. Allowing children to be in a vehicle SYSTEM — IF Note: The indicator light (amber) turns unattended is dangerous for a number of EQUIPPED off (the indicator light amber illuminates reasons. A child or others could be seriously or fatally injured. Children should Advanced Keyless Entry when the ignition has been placed in be warned not to touch the parking brake, System the ON position and the engine is not brake pedal or the transmission gear running). selector. The Advanced Keyless Entry System is an enhancement that allows you to Some indicator lights/warning lights Do not leave the key fob in or near the should be inspected before the engine vehicle, (or in a location accessible to lock/unlock the doors, trunk lid, and is started. children), and do not leave the ignition in fuel filler door. When the keyless ignition has been the ACC or ON/RUN mode. A child could The Advanced Keyless Entry System placed in the ON position, the sound of operate power windows, other controls, or allows the driver to start the ignition the fuel pump motor operating near the move the vehicle. with the push of a button as long as the fuel tank can be heard. This does not Be sure the parking brake is fully key fob is in the passenger indicate a problem. disengaged before driving; failure to do so compartment. can lead to brake failure and a collision. If equipped, the vehicle security alarm Always fully apply the parking brake system may be armed/disarmed with Warning! when leaving your vehicle, or it may roll and the push of the lock/unlock button cause damage or injury. Also be certain to located on the key fob. leave the transmission in PARK. Failure to System Malfunctions/Warnings Never use the PARK position as a do so may allow the vehicle to roll and substitute for the parking brake. Always cause damage or injury. System malfunctions or warnings are apply the parking brake fully when exiting indicated by the following warning lights the vehicle to guard against vehicle Driving the vehicle with the parking brake or beeps (refer to “Getting To Know movement and possible injury or damage. engaged, or repeated use of the parking Your Instrument Panel” for further brake to slow the vehicle may cause When exiting the vehicle, always make serious damage to the brake system. information): sure the ignition is in the OFF mode, remove the key fob from the vehicle, and Warning Light (Red) lock your vehicle. Ignition Not Turned OFF Warning Beep Key Fob Removed From Vehicle Warning Beep Request Switch Inoperable Warning Beep 21 Key Fob Left-In-Trunk Warning Beep Battery life is about one year. deactivated, you will be unable to start Replace the battery with a new one if the engine by carrying the key fob. Key Fob Left-In-Vehicle Warning the Warning light (green) flashes in Contact an authorized dealer for Beep the instrument cluster. Replacing the details. If the Advanced Keyless Entry If you have a problem with the key fob, battery about once a year is System has been deactivated, you can or the key fob is lost or stolen, contact recommended because the start the engine by following the an authorized dealer as soon as Warning light may not illuminate or procedure indicated when the key fob possible for a replacement and to make flash if the battery is low or discharged. battery becomes discharged. the lost or stolen key fob inoperative. Additional key fobs may be Operational Range Note: Changes or modifications not obtained at an authorized dealer. Up to The system operates only when the approved by the party responsible for six key fobs may be used with the driver is in or around the vehicle while compliance could void the user's Advanced Keyless Entry System per the key fob is being carried. authority to operate the equipment. vehicle. Bring all key fobs to an The Advanced Keyless Entry authorized dealer when additional keys System operational range may vary are required. due to local weather conditions. The Advanced Keyless Entry function allows you to lock/unlock the door, The Advanced Keyless Entry trunk lid, and fuel filler door, or open the System is fully operational (door/trunk trunk lid while carrying the key fob. lid/fuel filler door lock/unlock) when the ignition is placed in the OFF position. The Advanced Keyless Entry System

GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE does not operate if the ignition is Warning! placed to any position other than the 04010202-12S-002 OFF position. Advanced Keyless Entry Sensors Radio waves from the key fob may affect If the key fob does not operate medical devices such as pacemakers: 1 — Interior Antenna when pushing a button, the operational before using the key fob near people who 2 — Operational Range range becomes too small, or the use medical devices, ask the medical warning light does not illuminate or device manufacturer or your physician if radio waves from the key fob will affect the Note: When the battery power is low, flash, the battery may be weak or device. or in places where there are discharged. To install a new battery, high-intensity radio waves or noise, the refer to “Key Fob Battery operational range may reduce, or the Note: The Advanced Keyless Entry Replacement.” system may not operate. System functions can be deactivated to prevent any possible adverse effect on a user wearing a pacemaker or other medical device. If the system is 22 Locking/Unlocking The Doors And Opening The Trunk Lid General Information The Trunk Lid The following regulatory statement applies to all Radio Frequency (RF) devices equipped in this vehicle: This device complies with Part 15 of the FCC Rules and with Industry Canada license-exempt RSS standard(s). Operation is subject to the following two conditions: 1. This device may not cause harmful interference. 04020202-12A-003 04020201-12A-003 Electronic Trunk Release 2. This device must accept any Request Switch Door Functions 1 — Exterior Antenna interference received, including 1 — Exterior Antenna 2 — Operational Range interference that may cause undesired 2 — Operational Range 3 — Distance (31 inches) operation. 3 — Distance (31 inches) Note: Changes or modifications not expressly approved by the party responsible for compliance could void Note: The system may not operate if the user’s authority to operate the you are too close to the windows or equipment. door handles.

23 VEHICLE SECURITY Note: signal, such as on the instrument panel. Move the key fob to a location within ALARM SYSTEM — IF Changes or modifications not the signal range, place the ignition in EQUIPPED expressly approved by the party the OFF position, and restart the responsible for compliance could void Modifications And engine. Add-On Equipment the user's authority to operate the equipment. Note: Signals from a TV, radio station, FCA cannot guarantee the immobilizer transceiver, or mobile telephone could and security alarm system operation if If the engine does not start with the correct key fob, and the warning interfere with your immobilizer system. If the system has been modified or if any you are using the proper key fob and add-on equipment has been installed. light keeps illuminating or flashing, the system may have a malfunction. the engine fails to start, check the Note: To avoid damage to the vehicle, Contact an authorized dealer. warning light. do not modify the system or install any Arming add-on equipment to the immobilizer, The key fobs carry a unique The system is armed when the ignition the security alarm system, or the electronic code. For this reason, and to is cycled from the ON to OFF position. vehicle. assure your safety, obtaining a The warning light in the instrument replacement key fob can only be done Immobilizer System cluster flashes every two seconds until through your authorized dealer, and will the system is disarmed. The immobilizer system allows the require some waiting time. engine to start only with a recognized Disarming Always keep a spare key fob in key fob. The system is disarmed when the case one is lost. If a key fob is lost, ignition is placed in the ON position with If someone attempts to start the engine contact an authorized dealer as soon with an unrecognized key fob, the the correct programmed key fob. The

GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE as possible. engine will not start, preventing unlawful warning light illuminates for about vehicle use. If you lose a key fob, an authorized three seconds and then turns off. If the engine does not start with the correct If you have a problem with the dealer will reset the electronic codes of key fob, and the warning light immobilizer system or the key fob, your remaining key fobs and remains illuminated or flashing, try the contact an authorized dealer. immobilizer system. Bring all the remaining key fobs to an authorized following: To avoid damage to the key fob, do not: dealer to reset. Starting the vehicle Make sure the key fob is within the Drop the key fob. with a key fob that has not been reset operational range for signal is not possible. Get the key fob wet. transmission. Operation Cycle the ignition off, and then restart Expose the key fob to any kind of The engine may not start and the engine. If the engine does not start magnetic field. warning light may illuminate or flash after three or more tries, contact an if the key fob is placed in an area Expose the key fob to high authorized dealer. temperatures such as direct sunlight. difficult for the system to detect the 24 Note: Forcing open a door, the engine With The Advanced Keyless Entry compartment, or the trunk lid. function: push a request switch. The If the warning light flashes warning light in the instrument continuously while you are driving, do Opening the hood by operating the panel flashes twice per second for not turn the engine OFF. Contact an hood release handle. 20 seconds. After 20 seconds the authorized dealer and have it checked. Placing the ignition in the ON position system is fully armed. If the engine is shut off while the without starting the engine. warning light is flashing, you will The vehicle security alarm system can not be able to restart it. With the intrusion sensor: the also be armed by activating the auto intrusion sensor detects a movement in re-lock function with all the doors, the Because the electronic codes are the vehicle. trunk lid and the engine compartment reset when the immobilizer system is closed. The system will be triggered again (up repaired, the keys are needed. Make The system will disarm if one of the sure to bring all the key fobs to an to ten times) if one of the above conditions remains. following operations takes place within authorized dealer so that they can be 20 seconds after pushing the lock The trunk lid will not open when the programmed. button: To rearm the system, perform vehicle security alarm system is the arming procedure again: Vehicle Security Alarm activated. System — If Equipped If the battery becomes drained while 1. Unlocking any door. If the security alarm system detects an the vehicle security alarm system is 2. Opening any door. inappropriate entry into the vehicle, or armed, the siren will activate, and the the intrusion sensor detects movement hazard warning lights will flash during 3. Opening the engine compartment. in the vehicle, which could result in the the battery charging or replacement vehicle or its contents being stolen, the process. 4. Placing the ignition in the ON position. alarm alerts the surrounding area by How To Arm The System sounding the siren/horn and flashing When the doors are locked by pushing the hazard warning lights. Close the windows and the the lock button on the key fob, or using The system will not function unless it is convertible top. the emergency key, the hazard warning properly armed. Follow the arming Place the ignition in the OFF position. lights will flash once to indicate that the procedure correctly. vehicle security alarm system is armed. Make sure the engine compartment, Siren/Horn Triggering Conditions convertible top, doors, and trunk lid are Note: The siren/horn sounds intermittently, closed. If any door or trunk lid remains and the hazard warning lights flash for closed for 30 seconds, the doors, and about 30 seconds when the system is Push the lock button on the key fob trunk lid automatically re-lock, and the triggered by any one of the following: or lock the driver's door from the outside with the emergency key. The vehicle security alarm system arms Unlocking a door with an inside hazard warning lights will flash once. even if a window opens or the door-lock knob. convertible top is left down. 25 To reactivate the intrusion sensor, To Stop The Alarm DOORS turn off the armed vehicle security A triggered alarm can be turned off alarm system and then rearm it. Lock/Unlock With using any one of the following methods: Emergency Key The intrusion sensor is operational Pushing the unlock button on the key The doors, trunk lid, and fuel door lock when the vehicle security alarm system fob. is armed. To cancel the intrusion automatically when the driver's door is sensor, push the intrusion sensor Starting the engine with the keyless locked using the emergency key. cancel button each time the vehicle ignition START/STOP button. Lock With Emergency Key — Insert security alarm system is armed. With The Advanced Keyless Entry key into driver’s door and turn to the left To Turn Off An Armed System function: pushing a request switch on (toward front of car). An armed system can be turned off the exterior door handles or the electric Unlock With Emergency Key — using any one of the following methods: trunk release while the key fob is being Insert key into driver’s door and turn to carried. Pushing the unlock button on the key the right (toward back of car). The hazard warning lights will flash fob. Both Doors unlock when the driver's twice. door is unlocked using the emergency Starting the engine with the keyless key. ignition START/STOP button. Turn the emergency key toward the With The Advanced Keyless Entry front to lock, toward the back to unlock. function: pushing a request switch on the exterior door handles. Note: When the doors are unlocked by Caution! GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE pushing the unlock button on the key fob, the hazard warning lights will flash An unlocked vehicle is an invitation for twice to indicate that the system is thieves. Always remove key fob from the turned off. vehicle and lock all doors when leaving the vehicle unattended.

26 Manual Lock/Unlock Note: When locking the door this way, Central Lock/Unlock Knob be careful not to leave the key fob The doors, trunk lid, and fuel door lock inside the vehicle. The driver's door Operation From Inside automatically when the lock rocker lock knob cannot be used while the switch is pushed with both doors To lock any door from the inside, push driver's door is open. the door-lock knob. To unlock, pull it closed. outward. This does not operate the Note: other door locks. Warning! The doors, trunk lid, and the fuel filler door cannot be locked while any other door is open. For personal security and safety in the event of a collision, lock the vehicle doors The key fob may not be able to be before you drive as well as when you park detected by the vehicle keyless-go and leave the vehicle. system if it is located next to a mobile When leaving the vehicle, always remove phone, laptop or other electronic the key fob from the vehicle and lock your device; these devices may block the vehicle. If equipped with Advanced Keyless key fob’s wireless signal and prevent Entry, always make sure the keyless ignition the keyless-go system from starting is in “OFF” position, remove the key fob from the vehicle. 04030107-L21-001AB the vehicle and lock the vehicle. Inside Door-Lock Knob Unsupervised use of vehicle equipment may cause severe personal injuries or death. 1 — Door Knob Lock Position (Red Indicator Not Seen When Locked) Never leave children alone in a vehicle, 2 — Door Knob Unlock Position (Red or with access to an unlocked vehicle. Indicator Seen When Unlocked) Allowing children to be in a vehicle unattended is dangerous for a number of reasons. A child or others could be Note: The red indication can be seen seriously or fatally injured. Children should when the door-lock knob is unlocked. be warned not to touch the parking brake, brake pedal or the gear selector. Operation From Outside Do not leave the key fob in or near the To lock the passenger door with the 04030105-12D-002 vehicle, or in a location accessible to Central/Power Door Lock Switch door-lock knob from the outside, push children, and do not leave the ignition of a the door-lock knob to the lock position vehicle equipped with Advanced Keyless Both unlock when the unlock rocker and close the door (holding the door Entry in the ACC or ON/RUN positions. A switch is pushed. handle in the open position is not child could operate power windows, other Note: The doors, trunk lid, and the fuel required). controls, or move the vehicle. filler door cannot be locked while any other door is open. 27 Double Locking System Lock/Unlock With — If Equipped Advanced Keyless Entry Function — If Equipped The double locking system is designed to prevent someone who has broken The doors, trunk lid, and fuel filler door into your vehicle from opening the door can be locked/unlocked by pushing the from the inside. If you have any request switch on the exterior door problems with the double locking handle while the key fob is being system, contact an authorized dealer. carried. System Activation Proceed as follows: 04030102-12A-001 1. Close both the windows and the Emergency Key Lock Procedure convertible top. The system can be activated by 2. Place the ignition in the OFF position pushing the lock button on the key fob and take the key fob with you. twice within three seconds. With The Advanced Keyless 3. Close both doors and trunk lid. Function: the system can be activated 4. Insert the emergency key in the by pushing the request switch on the driver's door, turn the emergency key to exterior door handle twice within three 04000098-121-555 the lock position (counter seconds. Request Switch On Exterior Door clockwise/left), and return it to the Note: The system cannot be activated Handle GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE center position. Then turn it to the lock when any door is open. To Lock position (counter clockwise/left) again System Deactivation within three seconds. To lock the doors, trunk lid, and fuel Unlock the driver's door or place the filler door, push the button on the 5. The indicator light illuminates for ignition in the ON position. If the power exterior door handle; the hazard about three seconds to indicate that the supply is interrupted (fuse blows or the warning lights will flash once. system has been activated. battery is disconnected), the system A beep will sound once. can only be deactivated by unlocking a door with the emergency key. To Unlock Driver's door button is located on the exterior door handle. To unlock the doors, trunk lid, and fuel filler door, push the button on the exterior door handle; the hazard warning lights will flash twice. 28 To unlock both doors and fuel filler door, A beep sound is heard for confirmation Not operating the key fob for ten push the button on the exterior door when the doors, and fuel filler door are seconds. handle twice within three seconds. Two locked/unlocked using the request Pushing any button except the lock more beeps will sound. switch on the exterior door handle. If button on the key fob. Front Passenger Door Request you prefer, the beep sound can be Switch: turned off. Pushing a request switch on the To unlock both doors and fuel filler door, The volume of the beep sound can also exterior door handle. push the buton on the exterior door be changed. Use the following With Vehicle Security Alarm System handle. A beep swill sound twice; the procedure to change the setting: The hazard warning lights flash when hazard warning lights will flash twice. 1. Place the ignition in the OFF position the security alarm system is armed or disarmed. Refer to “Vehicle Security Note: and close both of the doors and the trunk lid. Alarm System” found in “Getting To Confirm that both doors, and fuel Know Your Vehicle” for further filler door are securely locked. 2. Open the driver's door. information. For the trunk lid, move it without 3. Within 30 seconds of opening the The setting can be changed so that the pushing the electric trunk lid opener to driver's door, push and hold the lock doors and the fuel filler door are locked verify that the trunk lid has not been button on the key fob for five seconds automatically without pushing the left open. or longer. The doors, and fuel filler door button on the exterior door handle. will lock, an audible beep will activate at Refer to “Personalization Features” Both doors and the fuel filler door the currently set volume (if the beep section in “Getting To Know Your cannot be locked when any door is sound is currently set to not activate, it Instrument Panel” for further open. will not activate). The setting changes information. It may require a few seconds for the each time the lock button on the key Auto-Lock Function doors to unlock after the request fob is pushed and the beep will activate A beep is heard when both doors are switch on the exterior door handle is at the set volume (if the beep sound closed while the key is carried. Both pushed. has been set to not activate, it will not doors, the trunk lid, and fuel door are activate). locked automatically after about three The key fob may not be able to be seconds when the Advanced Keyless detected by the vehicle keyless-go 4. The setting change is completed by Entry key fob is out of the operational system if it is located next to a mobile doing any one of the following: range. phone, laptop or other electronic device; these devices may block the Place the ignition in the ACC or ON The hazard warning lights will flash key fob’s wireless signal and prevent position. once (even if the driver is in the the keyless-go system from starting Closing the driver's door. operational range, both doors, trunk lid, the vehicle. and fuel filler door are locked Opening the trunk lid. automatically after about 30 seconds). 29 If you are out of the operational range Locking/Unlocking With A Key Fob before the doors and trunk lid are The doors, trunk lid, and fuel filler door closed or another key fob is left in the can be locked/unlocked by operating vehicle, the auto-lock function will not the keyless entry system key fob. Refer work. to “Keyless Entry System” in “Keys” for Always make sure that both doors and further information. trunk lid are closed and locked before Locking/Unlocking With Door-Lock leaving the vehicle. The auto-lock Switch function does not close the power Both doors and the fuel filler door lock windows. automatically when the lock side is Auto Re-Lock Function pushed. They unlock when the unlock After unlocking with the button on the side is pushed. exterior door handle, the doors and fuel To lock the doors and fuel filler door filler door will automatically lock if any of from an open door, push the lock side the following operations are not of the door lock switch and then close performed within about 60 seconds. the door. If your vehicle has a security alarm Note: When locking the doors this system, the hazard warning lights will way, be careful not to leave the key fob flash for confirmation. inside the vehicle. The time required for the doors to lock automatically can be changed. Refer to

GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE “Personalization Features” in “Getting To Know Your Instrument Panel” for further information. Opening a door or the trunk lid. Placing the ignition in any position other than the OFF position.

30 Auto Lock/Unlock Function — If Equipped When the vehicle speed exceeds 12 MPH (20 km/h), the doors, and fuel filler door lock automatically. When the ignition is placed in the OFF position, the doors and fuel filler door unlock automatically. These functions can also be disabled so that they do not operate. Auto Lock/Unlock Function Setting Change Using Door-Lock Switch (With Door-Lock Switch) The doors and fuel filler door can be set to lock or unlock automatically by selecting any one of the functions from the following table and using the door-lock switch on the interior door panel. There are only a total of six auto lock/unlock settings available for automatic transmission vehicles, and three for manual transmission vehicles. Be sure to push the unlock side of the driver's door-lock switch the correct number of times according to the selected function number. If the switch is mistakenly pushed seven times on an automatic transmission vehicle or four times on a manual transmission, the procedure will be cancelled. If this occurs, start the procedure from the beginning.

Function Number Function (*) 1 The auto door-lock function is disabled. The doors and the fuel filler door lock automatically when the vehicle speed is about 12 MPH 2 (20 km/h) or more. The doors and the fuel filler door lock automatically when the vehicle speed is about 12 MPH 3 (20 km/h) or more. The doors, trunk lid, and fuel filler door unlock when the ignition is cycled from the ON to OFF position. Automatic Transmission Vehicles Only: when the ignition is placed in the ON position, and the 4 gear selector is shifted from park (P) to any other gear position, the doors,and fuel filler door lock automatically. Automatic Transmission Vehicles Only: when the ignition is placed in the ON position, and the gear selector is shifted from PARK (P) to any other gear position, the doors and the fuel filler door 5 lock automatically. When the dear selector is shifted to PARK (P) while the ignition is placed in the ON position, the doors and the fuel filler door unlock automatically. Automatic Transmission Vehicles Only: the doors and the fuel filler door lock automatically when the vehicle speed is about 12 MPH (20 km/h) or more. When the gear selector is shifted to 6 PARK (P) while the ignition is placed in the ON position, the doors and the fuel filler door unlock automatically. (*) For other settings for the auto door lock function contact an authorized dealer. Note: Function number three is the factory setting for your vehicle. 31 Settings Changing Automatic Transmission Vehicles vehicle receives an impact strong Settings can be changed using the The doors cannot be locked or enough to inflate the air bags, both the following procedure: unlocked while the setting function is doors, the trunk lid, and fuel filler door being performed. are automatically unlocked after about 1. Safely park the vehicle. Both doors six seconds have elapsed from the must remain closed. The procedure can be cancelled by pushing the lock side of the door-lock time of the accident. The doors, trunk 2. Place the ignition in the ON position. switch. lid, and the fuel filler door may not unlock depending on how an impact is 3. Push and hold the lock side of the Note: applied, the force of the impact, and driver's door-lock switch within other conditions of the accident. If The vehicle lock-out prevention 20 seconds of placing the ignition in the door-related systems or the battery is feature prevents you from locking ON position, and make sure a beep is malfunctioning, the doors, trunk lid, yourself out of the vehicle. Both doors, heard about eight seconds afterwards. and the fuel filler door will not unlock. trunk lid, and the fuel filler door will 4. Refer to the auto lock/unlock automatically unlock if they are locked When opening a door, the power function setting table. Determine the using the power door locks with any windows open a little automatically. function number for the desired setting. door open. If both the doors are closed When closing the door, the power Push the unlock side of the driver's even though the trunk lid is open, both windows close automatically. This is a door-lock switch the same number of the doors and the fuel filler door will function for improving the sealing of times as the selected function number lock. the window, and it does not mean there is a problem. If the vehicle battery (example: if you select function 2, push Door Unlock (Control) System is disconnected for vehicle the unlock side of the switch only two With Collision Detection — If times). maintenance or other reasons, the

GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE Equipped: this system automatically power windows will not open or close unlocks the doors, trunk lid, and the 5. Three seconds after the function automatically. If the power windows do fuel filler door in the event the vehicle is setting has been changed, a beep not open or close, the automatic involved in an accident to allow sound will beep in the amount of the open/close mechanism for the passengers to get out of the vehicle selected function number (example: windows must be reset. Function number 3 = three beep immediately and prevent being trapped sounds). inside. While the ignition is placed in the ON position and in the event the

32 SEATS Height Heated Seats Manual Adjustment To adjust the height for front edge of On some models, the front driver and the seat bottom, rotate the dial to the passenger seats may be equipped with Forward / Rearward desired position. heaters in both the seat cushions and To move the seat forward or rearward, Seat Recline seatbacks. The controls for the front pull the adjustment bar. Release the bar To recline the seatback, lift up the heated seats are located on the center once the desired position is reached. recline lever and lean back until the instrument panel below the climate Using body pressure, move forward desired position has been reached, controls. and rearward on the seat to be sure then release the lever. Make sure the The heated seats have three settings: that the seat adjusters have latched. lever returns to its original position and High, Medium, and Low. Push the the seatback is locked in place by switch once to turn the heated seats on attempting to push it forward and High, twice for Medium, and three times rearward. for Low. Pushing the switch a fourth time will turn the heated seat off. Warning! Note: If the ignition is cycled OFF while Adjusting a seat while driving may be the seat warmer is operating (High, dangerous. Moving a seat while driving Mid or Low), and then cycled ON could result in loss of control which could again, the seat warmer will cause a collision and serious injury or automatically operate at the 03010202-12A-003AB Manual Seat Adjustment death. temperature set before the ignition was Seats should be adjusted before cycled OFF. 1 — Adjustment Bar fastening the seat belts and while the 2 — Height Dial Use the seat warmer when the vehicle is parked. Serious injury or death engine is running. Leaving the seat 3 — Recline Lever could result from a poorly adjusted seat belt. warmer on for long periods with the engine not running could discharge the Do not ride with the seatback reclined battery. so that the shoulder belt is no longer resting against your chest. In a collision you could slide under the seat belt, which could result in serious injury or death.

33 The temperature of the seat warmer NON-ADJUSTABLE cannot be adjusted beyond High, Mid Warning! HEAD RESTRAINTS and Low. The non-adjustable head restraints are Once a heat setting is selected, form fitted into the upper structure of Persons who are unable to feel pain to heat will be felt within two to five the seatback, and are designed to minutes. the skin because of advanced age, chronic illness, diabetes, spinal cord injury, reduce the risk of injury by restricting medication, alcohol use, exhaustion or head movement in the event of a rear other physical condition must exercise care impact. The seatback should be when using the seat heater. It may cause properly adjusted to an upright position burns even at low temperatures, especially where the head restraint is positioned if used for long periods of time. as close as possible to the back of the Do not place anything on the seat or occupant’s head. seatback that insulates against heat, such as a blanket or cushion. This may cause the seat heater to overheat. Sitting in a seat Warning! that has been overheated could cause serious burns due to the increased surface 03010203-L12-002 temperature of the seat. Be certain that the seatback is locked Heated Seat Switches securely into position. Otherwise, the seat will not provide the proper stability for Caution! passengers. An improperly latched seatback could cause serious injury.

GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE Do not use organic solvents to clean the seat. It may damage the seat surface and the heater.

34 Driver And Passenger STEERING WHEEL Head Restraints Steering Wheel Warning! Your vehicle is equipped with Adjustment non-adjustable head restraints on the driver's and passenger's seatbacks. To change the angle of the steering Do not adjust the steering column while wheel: driving. Adjusting the steering column while The non-adjustable head restraints driving or driving with the steering column consist of a trimmed foam covering 1. With the gear selector in the PARK unlocked could cause the driver to lose over the upper structure of the position, pull the lock release lever, control of the vehicle. Be sure the steering seatbacks and are intended to help located under the steering column, column is locked before driving your protect occupants from neck injury. downward. vehicle. Failure to follow this warning may result in serious injury or death. Adjust the seatbacks to their upright, 2. Tilt the steering wheel to the desired on-road positions so that the head position. restraint is positioned as close as possible to the back of the occupant’s 3. Push the lock release lever upward head. to lock the steering column. 4. Attempt to push the steering wheel Warning! upward and downward to ensure it is locked before driving.

Be certain that the seatback is locked securely into position. Otherwise, the seat will not provide the proper stability for passengers. An improperly latched seatback could cause serious injury.

04050101-12A-001AB Manual Tilt Adjustment 1 — Lock Release Lever

35 MIRRORS Inside Day / Night Mirror Reducing Glare From Headlights

Outside Mirrors Rear View Mirror Adjustment 1. Push the lever forward for day driving (A position). Be sure that all inside and outside Before driving, adjust the rear view mirrors are adjusted to the desired mirror to center on the view through the 2. Pull the lever rearward to reduce position prior to driving the vehicle. rear window. glare of headlights from vehicles at the Mirror Types: rear (B position). Flat Type (Driver Side): flat surface mirror. Convex Type (Passenger Side): this mirror has a slight curve. Note: The passenger side convex outside mirror will give a much wider view toward the rear of the vehicle, and especially of the adjacent lane.

The outside mirrors may be equipped 04060102-ADJ-001 with a heated mirror system. Refer to Manual Mirror Adjustment 04060102-MAN-002AB “Climate Controls” for more information. Mirror Adjustment Lever Note: Before adjusting the manual The perceived distance of objects in the mirror, place the mirror in the “day 1 — Mirror Adjustment Lever outer and inner regions of the wide driving position” (see below). A — Day Driving Position

GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE angle mirror is different. B — Reduced Glare Position

Warning!

Vehicles and other objects seen in the passenger side convex mirror will look smaller and farther away than they really are. Relying too much on your passenger side mirror could cause you to collide with another vehicle or other object. Use your inside mirror when judging the size or distance of a vehicle seen in the passenger side mirror. 36 Automatic Dimming Push the off button ( O ) to cancel the Power Mirrors Mirror — If Equipped automatic dimming function. The The ignition must be in the ACC or ON indicator light will turn off. The automatic dimming mirror position to adjust the outside power automatically reduces glare of To reactivate the automatic dimming mirrors. function, push the on button ( I ). The headlights from vehicles at the rear Rotate the mirror switch to the left(L) indicator light will illuminate. when the ignition is cycled ON. orright(R)toselect which mirror to Push the off button ( O ) to cancel the adjust. automatic dimming function. The Push the mirror control switch in the indicator light will turn off. direction of the desired position.

04060102-121-666 Light/Rain Sensor 2 — Light Sensor

04060102-36E-666 04060101-L12-001 Automatic Dimming Mirror Buttons Power Mirror Switch Note: 1—Off 0 — Center Position 2—On Do not use glass cleaner or 1 — Left Position 3 — Light Sensor suspend objects on or around the light 2 — Right Position sensor. Otherwise, light sensor sensitivity will be affected and may not operate normally. After adjusting the mirror, lock the control by rotating the switch to the Caution! The automatic dimming function is center position to prevent accidental canceled when the ignition is cycled movements. ON and the gear selector is in To avoid damage to the mirror during REVERSE. cleaning, never spray any cleaning solution directly onto the mirror. Apply the solution onto a clean cloth and wipe the mirror clean. 37 Folding Mirrors EXTERIOR LIGHTS Manually fold the outside mirror Headlights rearward until it is flush with the vehicle. Rotate the headlight switch to activate/deactivate the headlights, other exterior lights and dashboard illumination. When the lights are turned on, the indicator in the instrument cluster illuminates.

04060101-12R-001AB Outside Folding Mirror Your vehicle may be equipped with a driver side automatic-dimming mirror. The automatic-dimming door mirror is linked with the automatic-dimming rearview mirror inside the vehicle to 05030101-132-001AB automatically reduce headlight glare

GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE Headlight Switch from vehicles at the rear. Refer to “Automatic Dimming Mirror” in this 1 — Headlight Switch section for further information. 2 — Fog Light Switch Note: The passenger door mirror does not have the automatic-dimming Note: To prevent discharge of the feature. battery, do not leave the lights on while the engine is OFF.

38 Headlight Operation Without Auto-Light Control

Switch Position OFF Daytime Running Lights High Beams

Ignition Position ON ACC Or OFF ON ACC Or OFF ON ACC Or OFF Headlights Off Off Off Off On Off Daytime Running Lights On Off Off Off Off Off Tail Lights / Position Lights / License Plate Lights / Off Off On On On On (*) Instrument Panel Illumination (*) If the driver's door is opened, or 30 seconds have elapsed with the lights turned on, the lights turn off. With Auto-Light Control

Daytime Running Switch Position OFF AUTO High Beams Lights

ACC Or ACC Or ACC Or ACC Or Ignition Position ON ON ON ON OFF OFF OFF OFF Headlights Off Off Auto (*) Off Off Off On Off Daytime Running Lights On Off Auto (*) Off Off Off Off Off Tail Lights / Position Lights / License Plate On (**) / Off Off Auto On On On On (****) Lights / Instrument Panel Illumination Off (***) (*) The headlights and other light settings adjust automatically depending on the surrounding brightness detected by the sensor. (**) While the lights are turned on, they will remain on even if the ignition is cycled to a position other than ON. If the driver’s door is opened, or 30 seconds have elapsed with the lights turned on, the lights turn off. (***) When the ignition is cycled to a position other than ON, the lights will not turn on even if the headlight switch is turned to AUTO. (****) If the driver’s door is opened, or 30 seconds have elapsed with the lights turned on, the lights turn off.

39 Daytime Running Lights Automatic Lighting damaged when the wipers activate (DRL) automatically. If you are going to clean When the headlight switch is in the the windshield, be sure the wipers are The daytime running lights turn on AUTO position and the ignition is cycled turned off completely when the engine automatically when the vehicle starts ON, the light sensor will detect the is running. moving. surrounding light levels and They turn off when the parking brake is automatically turns the headlights, other Note: engaged or the gear selector is shifted exterior lights and dashboard illumination on or off. The headlights, other exterior lights to the PARK position (if equipped with and dashboard lights may not turn off automatic transmission). Note: Do not shade the light sensor by immediately even if the surrounding Note: In some markets, the daytime placing a sticker or a label on the area becomes well-lit because the light running lights can be deactivated. Refer windshield. Otherwise the light sensor sensor determines that it is night time if to “Personalization Features” in “Getting will not operate correctly. the surrounding area is continuously To Know Your Instrument Panel” for dark for several minutes such as inside further information. long tunnels, traffic jams inside tunnels, High Beams or in indoor parking lots. In this case, the lights turn off if the light switch is The headlights can be switched turned to the OFF position. between high and low beams by pushing the headlight switch lever When the headlight switch is in the forward for high beams, and pulling the AUTO position and the ignition is lever rearward to return to low beams. cycled to ACC or OFF, the headlights, other exterior lights and dashboard

GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE When the headlight high beams are on, illumination will turn off. the high beam indicator is 05030101-12A-003 illuminated in the instrument cluster. Light Sensor The dashboard lights can be adjusted by rotating the knob in the Flash To Pass The light sensor also works as a rain instrument cluster. The day/night mode You can signal another vehicle with your sensor for the auto-wiper control. Keep can be changed by rotating the knob headlights by partially pulling the hands and scrapers clear of the until a beep sound is heard. headlight lever toward the steering windshield when the wiper lever is in The sensitivity of the automatic wheel. This will cause the high beam the AUTO position and the ignition is lights may be changed by your headlights to turn on until the lever is cycled ON, as fingers could be pinched authorized dealer. released. or the wipers and wiper blades The high beam indicator in the instrument cluster illuminates while the high beams are active. 40 Follow Me Home With Auto-Light Control The Follow Me Home Light System When the fog light switch is in the turns on the headlights (low beams) for position and the headlight switch is a period of time after the ignition is in AUTO position, the front fog lights will cycled OFF. stay on. System Activation Turn Signals With the ignition cycled to ACC or OFF, The ignition must be in the ON position pull the headlight control lever rearward to use the turn signals and lane change and the low beam headlights will turn assist. on. 05030101-132-001AB Move the signal lever down (for a left The headlights turn off after a period of Headlight Switch turn) or up (for a right turn). The signal time after all doors are closed. will self-cancel after the turn is The time until the headlights turn off 1 — Headlight Switch completed. 2 — Fog Light Switch after all of the doors are closed can be If the indicator light continues to flash changed through the Connect system. after a turn, manually return the lever to The headlights turn off if the lever is The fog light indicator in the its original position. pulled again while the headlights are on, instrument cluster illuminates while the The turn signal indicators (green) or after three minutes of no further front fog lights are on. in the instrument cluster flash action after the first pull of the lever. Deactivation according to the operation of the turn Front Fog Lights Perform one of the following operations signal lever to show which signal is to turn off the front fog lights: active. The front fog light can be activated Note: If an indicator light stays on when the ignition is in the ON position Rotate the fog light switch to the OFF without flashing or if it flashes and the headlights or parking lights are position. abnormally, one of the turn signal bulbs on. Turn the headlight switch to the OFF may be burned out. Activation position. Turn the headlight switch to the or Cycle the ignition to a position other position. than ON. Rotate the fog light switch to the The fog light indicator in the position. instrument cluster goes off when the front fog light is turned off.

41 Lane Change Assist Leaving Home Light Headlamp Leveling System System — If Equipped Move the lever halfway toward the direction of the lane change (until the The Leaving Home Light System turns On some models, the angle of the indicator flashes) and hold it there. It will the headlights on when the unlock headlights will be automatically adjusted return to the off position when released. button on the key fob is pushed while when turning on the headlights. away from the vehicle. Three-Flash Turn Signal Adjusting The Headlight After releasing the turn signal lever, the Activation When Abroad turn signal indicator flashes three times. With the ignition cycled to OFF, and the Dipped headlights are adjusted for The operation can be cancelled by headlight switch is in the or position, the headlights will driving in the country where the vehicle moving the lever in the direction was originally purchased. opposite to which it was operated. illuminate when the unlock button on When travelling in countries with The three-flash turn signal function can the key fob is pushed, and the vehicle receives the signal. opposite driving direction, to avoid be turned on or off using the flashing the drivers on the other side of personalization function in the radio. The headlights turn off after 30 seconds. the road, you need to cover areas of Adaptive Front Lighting the headlight. For this operation contact The following lights turn on when the System (AFS) — If your authorized dealer. Leaving Home Light System is Equipped operated: low beams/parking lights/tail This system directs the main headlight lights/license plate lights. beams and adapts it to the driving Operation of the Leaving Home Light conditions around bends and turns, System can be turned on or off through GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE continuously and automatically. the Connect system. The system directs the headlight beam to illuminate the road in the best way, When the lock button on the key fob taking into account the speed of the is pushed, and the vehicle receives the vehicle, the bend or corner angle and signal, the headlights turn off. the speed of steering. When the headlight switch is in a The Adaptive Front Lighting System is position other than or ,the automatically activated when the headlights turn off. vehicle is started.

42 WINDSHIELD OFF: stop the wipers may move automatically in the following cases: WIPERS / WASHER AUTO: auto control operation If the windshield above the rain Windshield Wipers And — or LO: low speed operation Washer sensor is touched or wiped with a cloth. = or HI: high speed operation The windshield wiper/washer lever is If the windshield is struck with a hand Adjusting Rain Sensor Sensitivity located on the right side of the steering or other object from either outside or wheel. The ignition must be cycled to The sensitivity of the rain sensor can be inside the vehicle. ON before using these features. adjusted by rotating the switch on the wiper lever. Windshield Wipers From the center position (normal), Warning! Activate the windshield wipers by rotate the switch downward for higher pushing the wiper lever up or down. sensitivity (+) (faster response) or rotate Keep hands and scrapers clear of the With Intermittent Wiper it upward for less sensitivity (-) (slower windshield when the wiper lever is in the response). Set the lever to the intermittent position AUTO position and the ignition is cycled and choose the interval timing by ON, as fingers could be pinched or the wipers and wiper blades damaged when rotating the center switch. the wipers activate automatically. Switch positions: or MIST: operation while If you are going to clean the windshield, pushing the lever upward be sure the wipers are turned off. This OFF: stop is important when clearing ice and snow. --- or INT: intermittent operation Turning the auto-wiper lever from the — or LO: low speed operation OFF to the AUTO position while driving activates the windshield wipers once, = or HI: high speed operation 05030101-122-001 Windshield Wiper Lever after which they operate according to With Auto-Wiper Control the rainfall amount. 1 — Rain Sensor Adjustment When the wiper lever is in the AUTO The auto-wiper control may not operate position, the rain sensor will sense the when the rain sensor temperature is amount of rainfall on the windshield and Note: Do not shade the rain sensor by about 14 °F (–10 °C) or lower, or about turns the wipers on or off automatically placing a sticker or a label on the 185 °F (85 °C) or higher. (off/intermittent/low speed/high speed). windshield. Otherwise the rain sensor Switch positions: will not operate correctly. or MIST: operation while When the wiper lever is in the AUTO pulling up lever position and the ignition is cycled ON, 43 If the windshield is coated with water Because heavy ice and snow can jam repellent, the rain sensor may not be the wiper blades, the wiper motor is Warning! able to sense the amount of rainfall protected from motor breakdown, correctly and auto-wiper control may overheating and possible fire by a not operate properly. circuit breaker. This mechanism will Sudden loss of visibility through the If dirt or debris (such as ice or debris automatically stop operation of the windshield could lead to a collision. You containing salt water) adheres to the blades, but only for about five minutes. might not see other vehicles or other windshield above the rain sensor or if If this happens, turn off the wiper switch obstacles. To avoid sudden icing of the the windshield is iced, it could cause and park off the road and remove the windshield during freezing weather, warm snow and ice. After five minutes, turn the windshield with defroster before and the wipers to move automatically. during windshield washer use. However, if the wipers cannot remove on the switch and the blades should this ice, dirt or debris, the auto-wiper operate normally. If they do not resume control will stop operation. In this case, functioning, contact your authorized If the fluid level is normal and the set the wiper lever to the low speed dealer as soon as possible. Pull off to washer does not work, contact your position or high speed position for the side of the road to a safe location. authorized dealer. manual operation, or remove the ice, Wait until the weather clears before dirt or debris by hand to restore the trying to drive with the wipers auto-wiper operation. inoperative. If the auto-wiper lever is left in the Windshield Washer AUTO position, the wipers could Pull the wiper/washer lever rearward operate automatically from the effect of and hold it to spray washer fluid onto strong light sources, electromagnetic

GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE the windshield. waves, or infrared light because the rain sensor uses an optical sensor. With the wiper lever in the OFF, intermittent, or AUTO position, the It is recommended that the auto-wiper wipers will operate continuously until lever be turned to the OFF position the lever is released. 04110109-115-001AB other than when driving the vehicle Windshield Washer Nozzles under rainy conditions. With Headlight Washers The auto-wiper control functions can be When the headlights are on, the turned off. headlight washers operate automatically once every fifth time the windshield washer operates.

44 CLIMATE CONTROL Have the air conditioner checked before the weather gets hot. A lack of SYSTEM Caution! refrigerant may make the air conditioner Operating Tips less efficient. The refrigerant The air conditioning system will only specifications are indicated on a label (A The system uses a coolant that is operate with the engine running. or B depending on the market) compatible with the laws in force in the To prevent the battery from being attached to the inside of the engine countries where the vehicle is sold, R134a or R1234yf (indicated on a specific plate in discharged while the engine is off, do compartment. Check the label before refilling the refrigerant. If the wrong type the engine compartment). The use of other not leave the Blower Control Knob on coolants affects the efficiency and condition for extended periods of time. of refrigerant is used, it could result in a serious malfunction of the air of the system. Also the compressor To improve system efficiency, clear all coolants used must be compatible with the conditioner. For details, contact your indicated coolant. obstructions (leaves, snow and ice) authorized dealer. from the hood and the air inlet in the grille. Use the air conditioning system to defog the windows and dehumidify the air. Recirculation mode should be used when driving through tunnels, while in a traffic jam, or when you would like to quickly cool the interior. Use the outside air position for ventilation or windshield defrosting. 06010100121001 If the vehicle has been parked in direct Label Location sunlight during hot weather, open the windows to let warm air escape, and then run the air conditioning system. To keep the internal parts lubricated and the system running smoothly, run the air conditioner about ten minutes at least once a month.

45 Vent Operation Adjusting The Vents To adjust the direction of air flow, move the vent adjustment knob. Note: When using the air conditioner in humid conditions, fog may blow from the vents. This is a result of humid air being suddenly cooled and does not indicate a system malfunction.

Center Vents (Driver) and Side 06010201-033-666 06010201-121-001AB Vents Operating the Side Air Vents Central Air Vent Center and side vents are located on 1 — Air Vent Knob the dashboard. A — Open Position Air vent open/close: the air vents can B — Closed Position be fully opened and closed by using knob1(A=open/B=close). Center Vents (Front Passenger) Air flow direction adjustment:use Center vents are located on the knob 1 to adjust the center vents to the dashboard. desired position. Air vent open/close: use the Center

GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE Vent tab 1 to open/close the center vents(A=open/B=close).

Air flow direction adjustment: use the 06010201-121-777AB Center Vent tab 1 to adjust the center Operating The Central Air Vent vents to the desired position. 1 — Center Vent Tab A — Open Position B — Closed Position

06010201-033-001 Side Air Vents

46 Airflow Mode

06010202-121-002 Airflow Locations 1 — Fixed Upper Air Diffuser 2 — Adjustable Side Air Vents 3 — Adjustable Center Air Vent 4 — Floor Vents

47 Manual Climate Control System With MAX A/C function GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE

06010300-122-002 Manual Climate Controls With MAX A/C 1 — Temperature Control Knob 4 — Rear Window Defrost Button 2 — Blower Control Knob 5 — Air Recirculation Button 3 — Mode Selector Knob 6 — A/C Button

48 Controls 4 – Rear Window Defrost Button Note: 1 – Temperature Control Knob The Rear Window Defrost Button clears Before opening the convertible top, This dial controls the interior fog and frost from the rear window. The make sure the Rear Window Defrost temperature of the vehicle. ignition must be on to use the defroster. Button is turned off. Otherwise, the Turn it clockwise for hotter temperatures Push the button to turn on the Rear heat generated from the defroster and counterclockwise for colder Window Defroster. The Rear Window could damage the convertible top and temperatures. Defroster operates for about the internal material. 15 minutes and then turns off MAX A/C – If Equipped: When the automatically. The button LED will This defroster is not designed for Mode Selector Knob is set to or , illuminate when the defroster is melting snow. If there is an the Blower Control Knob is in a position operating. accumulation of snow on the rear other than 0, and the temperature window, remove it before using the control knob is in the maximum cold To turn off the Rear Window Defroster defroster. position, the Recirculation Button will before the end of 15 minutes, push the activate and the A/C will turn on button again. automatically. If A/C is not desired, Mirror Defroster — If Equipped:To press the A/C Button to turn it off. turn on the mirror defroster, turn the ignition ON and push the Rear Window Caution! 2 – Blower Control Knob Defroster Button. The blower has seven speeds. Turn the 5 – Air Recirculation Button knob clockwise to increase blower Failure to follow these cautions can cause speed or counterclockwise to decrease damage to the heating elements: Push the Air Recirculation Button to blower speed. Use care when washing the inside of the select between outside air and recirculated air positions. 3 – Mode Selector Knob rear window. Do not use abrasive window cleaners on the interior surface of the Recirculated Air Position: (LED on) Turn the Mode Selector Knob to select window. Use a soft cloth and a mild Outside air is shut off when this position the air flow mode. washing solution, wiping parallel to the has been activated. Use this position The mode selector dial can be set at heating elements. Labels can be peeled off when going through tunnels, driving in the intermediate positions (●) between after soaking with warm water. congested traffic (high engine exhaust each mode. Do not use scrapers, sharp instruments, areas), or when quick cooling of the Set the knob to an intermediate or abrasive window cleaners on the interior vehicle is desired. position if you want to split the air flow surface of the window. Outside Air Position: (LED off) between the two modes. Keep all objects a safe distance from the Outside air is allowed to enter the For example, when the Mode Selector window. cabin. Use this mode for ventilation or Knob is at the intermediate position (●) windshield defrosting. between the and positions, air flow from the floor vents is less than that of the position. 49 Note: Do not use the Outside Air If the windshield fogs up easily, set the Note: Position in cold or rainy weather is Mode Selector Knob to the position. If the air conditioner is used while dangerous as it will cause the windows If cooler air is desired at face level, set driving up large hills or in heavy traffic, to fog up. Your vision will be hampered, the Mode Selector Knob to the monitor the Engine Coolant which could lead to a serious accident. position and adjust the Temperature Temperature Warning Light to see if it 6 – A/C Button Control Knob to maintain comfort. is illuminated or flashing. The air Push the A/C Button to turn on the air The floor vents will blow warmer air conditioner may cause engine conditioner. while the side air vents will blow cooler overheating in these situations. If the air (except when the temperature The LED on the switch will illuminate warning light is illuminated or flashing, control dial is set at the maximum hot when the Blower Control Knob is in any turn the air conditioning off or cold position). position except the OFF position. immediately. Push the button again to turn off the air Cooling (With Air When maximum cooling is desired, conditioner. Conditioner) set the Temperature Control Knob to Note: The air conditioner may not Proceed as follows: the extreme cold position, push the Air function when the outside temperature Recirculation Button to activate the approaches 32 °F (0 °C). 1. Set the Mode Selector Knob to the recirculated air position, and then turn position. the fan control dial fully clockwise. Heating 2. Set the Temperature Control Knob If warmer air is desired at floor level, Proceed as follows: to the cold position. set the Mode Selector Knob to the 1. Set the Mode Selector Knob to the position, and adjust the 3. Set the Blower Control Knob to the Temperature Control Knob to maintain

GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE position. desired speed. comfort. 2. Set the Air Recirculation Button to 4. Turn on the air conditioner by The floor vents will blow warmer air the outside air position. pushing the A/C Button. while the side air vents will blow cooler 3. Set the Temperature Control Dial to 5. After cooling begins, adjust the air (except when the temperature the hot position. Blower Control Knob and Temperature control dial is set at the maximum hot or cold position). 4. Set the Blower Control Knob to the Control Knob as needed to maintain desired speed. comfort. 5. If dehumidified heating is desired, turn on the air conditioner.

50 Ventilation Dehumidifying (With Air Conditioner) Proceed as follows: Warning! Operate the air conditioner in cool or 1. Set the Mode Selector Knob to the cold weather to help defog the position. Set the temperature control to the hot or windshield and side windows. warm position when defogging (Front 2. Set the Air Recirculation Button to Defrost position). Using the Front Defrost Proceed as follows: the outside air position. position with the temperature control set to 1. Set the Mode Selector Knob to the the cold position is dangerous as it will 3. Set the Temperature Control Knob cause the outside of the windshield to fog desired position. to the desired position. up. Your vision will be hampered, which 2. Set the Air Recirculation Knob to the 4. Set the Blower Control Knob to the could lead to a serious accident. outside air position. desired speed. Note: 3. Set the Temperature Control Knob Windshield Defrosting For maximum defrosting, turn on to the desired position. And Defogging the air conditioner, set the Temperature 4. Set the Blower Control Knob to the Proceed as follows: Control Knob to the extreme hot desired speed. 1. Set the Mode Selector Knob to the position, and turn the Blower Control Front Defrost position. Knob fully clockwise. 5. Turn on the air conditioner by pressing the A/C Button. 2. Set the Temperature Control Knob to If warm air is desired from the floor Note: One of the functions of the air the desired position. vents, set the Mode Selector Knob to conditioner is dehumidifying the air. To the position. 3. Set the Blower Control Knob to the use this function, the temperature does desired speed. If equipped with MAX A/C, the not have to be set to cold. Set the 4. If dehumidified heating is desired, Recirculation Button can be set to the Temperature Control Knob to the turn on the air conditioner. Recirculated Air position, when the desired position (hot or cold), and turn Blower Control Knob is ON, and the on the air conditioner to dehumidify the Mode Selector Knob is set to the Front cabin air. Defrost position.

51 Automatic Climate Control System

GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE 06010900-122-999 Automatic Climate Controls — Type A 1 — Temperature Control Knob 4 — Rear Window Defrost Button 2 — Blower Control Knob 5 — Air Recirculation Button 3 — Mode Selector Knob 6 — A/C Button

52 06010900122 Automatic Climate Controls — Type B 1 — Temperature Control Knob 4 — Rear Window Defrost Button 2 — Blower Control Knob 5 — Air Recirculation Button 3 — Mode Selector Knob 6 — A/C Button

53 Controls Note: 1 – Temperature Control Knob With the air flow mode set to the Caution! This knob controls internal temperature position, and the Temperature of the vehicle. Turn it clockwise for Control Knob is set to a medium temperature, the floor vents will blow Failure to follow these cautions can cause hotter temperatures and damage to the heating elements: counterclockwise for colder warmer air, and the center and side air vents will blow cooler air. Before opening the convertible top, temperatures. make sure the Rear Window Defrost Button 2 – Blower Control Knob When the Blower Control Knob is is turned OFF. Otherwise, the heat generated from the defroster could The fan has seven speeds. Turn the on, and the Mode Selector Knob is in the position, the air conditioner is damage the convertible top and the internal clockwise to increase blower speed or material. counterclockwise to decrease blower automatically turned on, and the Air speed/enter Auto mode. Recirculation Button is automatically Use care when washing the inside of the set to the outside air position for rear window. Do not use abrasive window AUTO Position: The blower speed is windshield defrosting. cleaners on the interior surface of the automatically controlled by the system window. Use a soft cloth and a mild based upon the set temperature. 4 – Rear Window Defrost Button washing solution, wiping parallel to the 0 Position: To turn off the system, set The Rear Window Defroster clears fog heating elements. Labels can be peeled off the dial to 0 position. and frost from the rear window. The after soaking with warm water. ignition must be switched ON to use 3 – Mode Selector Knob Do not use scrapers, sharp instruments, the defroster. or abrasive window cleaners on the interior Turn the Mode Selector Knob to select Push the button to turn on the Rear surface of the window. the air flow mode.

GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE Window Defroster. AUTO Position: The air flow Keep all objects a safe distance from the The Rear Window Defroster operates window. automatically adjusts based upon the for about 15 minutes, and then turns off selected temperature. automatically. Note: This defroster is not designed for The button LED will illuminate when the melting snow. If there is an defroster is operating. accumulation of snow on the rear To turn off the Rear Window Defroster window, remove it before using the before the end of 15 minutes, push the defroster. switch again.

54 Mirror Defroster — If Equipped:To Note: The air conditioner may not For an optimal cabin temperature, set turn on the mirror defroster, switch the function when the outside temperature the temperature close to 77º. Adjust to ignition on and push the Rear Window approaches 32 °F(0°C). the desired temperature if necessary. Defroster Button. Operation Of Automatic Windshield Defrosting 5 – Air Recirculation Button Air Conditioning And Defogging Press the Air Recirculation Button to Proceed as follows: Set the mode selector knob to the select between outside air and position and turn the blower control recirculated air positions. 1. Set the mode selector knob to the knob to the desired speed. AUTO position. Recirculated Air Position: (LED On) In this position, the outside air position Outside air is shut off when this position 2. Set the Air Recirculation Button to is automatically selected, and when the has been activated. Use this position the outside air position (indicator light blower control knob is on, the air when going through tunnels, driving in turned off). conditioner automatically turns on. The congested traffic (high engine exhaust air conditioner will directly dehumidify areas), or when quick cooling of the Note: If the recirculated air position is the air to the front windshield and side vehicle is desired. used for long periods in cold weather or windows. Air flow amount will be Outside Air Position: (LED Off) high humidity, the windshield may fog increased. up more easily. Outside air is allowed to enter the Use the temperature control knob to cabin. Use this mode for ventilation or 3. Set the Blower Control Knob to the increase the air flow temperature and windshield defrosting. AUTO position. defog the windshield more quickly. Note: Do not use the Recirculated Air Position in cold or rainy weather. Using 4. Push the A/C button to operate the the Recirculated Air Position in cold or air conditioning (indicator light on). Warning! rainy weather is dangerous as it will 5. Set the Temperature Control Knob cause the windows to fog up. Your to the desired position. vision will be hampered, which could Set the temperature control to the hot or 6. To turn off the system, set the warm position when defogging (Front lead to a serious accident. Defrost position). Using the Front Defrost blower control knob to the 0 position. 6 – A/C Button position with the temperature control set to Setting the temperature to maximum the cold position is dangerous as it will Push the A/C Button to turn on the air hot or cold will not provide the desired cause the outside of the windshield to fog conditioner. temperature at a faster rate. up. Your vision will be hampered, which The LED on the switch will illuminate When selecting heat, the system will could lead to a serious accident. when the Blower Control Knob is in any restrict air flow until it has warmed to position except the off position. prevent cold air from blowing out of the Push the button again to turn off the air vents. conditioner. 55 Sunlight/Temperature POWER WINDOWS Sensor Power Window Controls The air conditioning system measures inside and outside temperatures, and The ignition must be placed in the ON sunlight. position for the power windows to operate. It then sets temperatures inside the cabin accordingly. A power window may no longer open/close if you continue to push the switch after opening/closing the power window.

06010904-121-002AB If the power window does not Interior Sensor open/close, wait a moment and then operate the switch again. 2 — Interior Temperature Sensor Note: To prevent burning out the fuse and damaging the power window Note: Do not obstruct either sensor. system, do not open or close both Otherwise, the air-conditioning system windows at once. will not operate properly. The passenger window can be 06010904333003 operated with each door switch when Exterior Sensor the power window lock switch on the 1 — Sunlight Sensor driver's door is in the unlocked position. GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE

56 Passenger Control Switches Auto-Opening Power Windows 5. Pull up the switch to fully close the The passenger window can also be To fully open the window automatically window and continue holding the operated using the master control push the switch completely down. To switch for about two seconds after the switches on the driver's door. stop the window partway pull or push window fully closed. the switch in the opposite direction and 6. Repeat steps four and five for the then release it. The power window passenger power window while seated cannot be fully closed while the door is in the passenger seat. open. Power Window System Initialization 7. Make sure that the power windows Procedure operate correctly using the door If the battery was disconnected during switches. vehicle maintenance, or for other After the system has been re-initialized, reasons (such as a switch continues to passenger window can be fully opened be operated after the window is automatically using the master control switches. If the automatic power 04070103-LN2-002 open/closed), the window will not fully Power Window Switches open automatically. window operation does not operate Resetting of the automatic function can normally while the doors or convertible 1 — Driver's Window top are opened/closed, reset it using 2 — Passenger's Window be performed using the master control switches or each passenger door the above procedures. switch. Engine-Off Power Window The power window auto function reset Operation procedure can be done on both door The power window can be operated for switches. The power window auto about 40 seconds after the ignition has function will only resume on the power been cycled from ON to the OFF window that has been reset: position with both doors closed. If any door is opened, the power window will 1. Close the doors and the convertible stop operating. top. For engine-off operation of the power 2. Place the ignition in the ON position. window, the switch must be held up firmly throughout window closure 04070103-L12-001 3. Make sure that the power window because the auto-closing function will Power Window Switch Function lock switch located on the driver's door be inoperable. is not depressed. 1 — Closing-Lightly Pull The Switch Up 2 — Opening-Lightly Hold The Switch 4. Push the switch and fully open the Down window. 57 HOMELINK — IF Warning! EQUIPPED General Information Never leave children unattended in a The HomeLink system replaces up to vehicle, and do not let children play with three hand-held transmitters with a power windows. Do not leave the key fob single built-in component in the in or near the vehicle, or in a location auto-dimming mirror. Pushing the accessible to children, and do not leave the HomeLink button on the auto-dimming ignition of a vehicle equipped with the Keyless Entry System in the ACC or mirror activates garage doors, gates ON/RUN mode. Occupants, particularly 04070104-L12-001 and other devices surrounding your unattended children, can become Power Window Lockout Switch home. entrapped by the windows while operating Note: HomeLink and HomeLink house the power window switches. Such 1 — Locked Position 2 — Unlocked Position icon are registered trademarks of entrapment may result in serious injury or Gentex Corporation. death. FCC Rules and with Industry Canada Note: When the power window lock license-exempt RSS standard(s). switch is in the locked position, the light Power Window Lock Operation is subject to the following on the passenger power window switch Switch two conditions: turns off. The light may be difficult to This feature prevents the passengers see depending on the surrounding 1. This device may not cause harmful power window from operating. Keep brightness. interference, and

GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE this switch in the locked position while children are in the vehicle. 2. This device must accept any interference received, including 1. Locked Position (Button interference that may cause undesired Pushed): only the driver's power operation. window can be operated. Note: Changes or modifications not 2. Unlocked Position (Button Not expressly approved by the party Pushed): both power windows on responsible for compliance could void each door can be operated. the user’s authority to operate the equipment.

58 Proceed as follows: Warning! 1. Verify that there is a remote control transmitter available for the device you would like to program. Vehicle exhaust contains carbon 2. Disconnect the power to the device. monoxide, a dangerous gas. Do not run your vehicle in the garage while Programming The programming the transceiver. Exhaust gas System can cause serious injury or death. Note: When programming a garage Your motorized door or gate will open and door opener or a gate, disconnect the close while you are programming the power to these devices before universal transceiver. Do not program the 04060102-121-999 programming. Continuous operation of HomeLink Buttons transceiver if people, pets or other objects the devices could damage the motor. are in the path of the door or gate. Only use 1 — First HomeLink Button this transceiver with a garage door opener The HomeLink system provides three 2 — Second HomeLink Button that has a “stop and reverse” feature as buttons which can be individually 3 — Third HomeLink Button required by Federal safety standards. This selected and programmed using the includes most garage door opener models transmitters for current, on-market manufactured after 1982. Do not use a devices as follows: 4. After the HomeLink indicator light garage door opener without these safety changes from a slow to a rapidly features. Call toll-free 1-800-355-3515 or, on 1. Disconnect power to the device being programmed. blinking light, release both the the Internet at HomeLink.com for safety HomeLink and hand-held transmitter information or assistance. 2. Position the end of your handheld buttons. transmitter one to three inches (2.5 - 7.5 cm) away from the HomeLink 5. Connect power to the device being Pre-Programming The programmed. System button you wish to program while keeping the indicator light in view. 6. Firmly press and hold the Note: It is recommended that a new 3. Simultaneously press and hold both programmed HomeLink button for five battery be placed in the hand-held seconds, and then release it. Perform transmitter of the device being the chosen HomeLink and hand-held transmitter buttons. Do not release this operation two times to activate the programmed to HomeLink for quicker door or gate. If the door or gate does not training and accurate transmission of the buttons until step four has been completed. activate, press and hold the just-trained the radio-frequency signal. HomeLink button and observe the indicator light. If the indicator light stays on constantly, programming is complete and your device should activate when the HomeLink button is pressed and released. 59 Note: To program the remaining two For questions or comments, please Operating The System HomeLink buttons, begin with step contact HomeLink at Push the programmed HomeLink one. www.homelink.com or button to operate a programmed 1-800-355-3515. 7. If the indicator light blinks rapidly for device. two seconds and then turns to a Gate Operator/Canadian The code will continue being constant light, continue with Programming transmitted for a maximum of “Programming” steps (see below) to 20 seconds. complete the programming of a rolling Canadian radio-frequency laws require code equipped device (most commonly transmitter signals to “time-out” (or quit) Reprogramming The a garage door opener). after several seconds of transmission - System which may not be long enough for 8. At the garage door opener receiver To program a device to HomeLink using (motor-head unit) in the garage, locate HomeLink to pick up the signal during programming. a HomeLink button previously trained, the “learn” or “smart” button. This can follow these steps: usually be found where the hanging Similar to this Canadian law, some U.S. 1. Push and hold the desired HomeLink antenna wire is attached to the gate operators are designed to button. DO NOT release the button; motorhead unit. “time-out” in the same manner. 2. The indicator light will begin to flash 9. Press and release the “learn” or If you live in Canada or you are having after 20 seconds. Without releasing the “smart” button (the name and color of difficulties programming a gate operator HomeLink button, proceed with the button may vary by manufacturer). by using the “Programming” “Programming The System” step one. Note: Complete the programming procedures (regardless of where you within 30 seconds. live), replace “Programming The Erasing Programmed System” step three with the following: HomeLink Buttons

GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE 10. Return to the vehicle and firmly Note: If programming a garage door press, hold for two seconds and To erase the existing programming from opener or gate operator, it is advised to release the programmed HomeLink all three operating channels, push and unplug the device during the “cycling” button. Repeat the “ press/hold/ hold the two outside buttons 1 and process to prevent possible release” sequence a second time, and, 3 on the auto-dimming mirror until the overheating. depending on the brand of the garage HomeLink indicator light begins to flash door opener (or other rolling code 1. Continue to press and hold the after approximately ten seconds. HomeLink button while you press and equipped device), repeat this sequence Verify that the programming has been release - every two seconds (“cycle”) a third time to complete the erased when you resell the vehicle. programming process. HomeLink your hand-held transmitter until the should now activate your rolling code frequency signal has successfully been equipped device. accepted by HomeLink (the indicator Note: To program the remaining two light will flash slowly and then rapidly). HomeLink buttons, begin with step 2. Proceed with the “Programming” one. steps to complete. 60 INTERNAL Insert the emergency key in the lock EQUIPMENT and turn it clockwise to lock, counter clockwise to unlock. Storage Compartments Note: When using the rear console Center Console cup holders, remove any cups before The center console is located between opening the seat side compartment. If the driver’s and passenger’s seats. the seat side compartment is opened with a cup present, the lid will hit the cups and may cause the contents to spill. Warning! 06040706-12A-001AB Back Trim Storage Compartment Center Console Lid Small items can be stored in the back Keep storage compartments closed when trim storage compartment which is driving. Driving with the storage Seat Side Compartment compartments open is dangerous. To The seat side compartment is located located behind the seats. reduce the possibility of injury in an between the seats above the accident or a sudden stop, keep the cupholders. storage compartments closed when driving.

Caution!

Do not leave lighters or eyeglasses in the storage compartments while parked under the sun. A lighter could explode or the plastic material in eyeglasses could deform and crack from high temperature. 06040717-121-001AB Seat Side Compartment 1 — Release Handle 2 — Key Hole

To open, push the release handle down to open the seat side compartment. 06040718-12A-002AB Back Trim Storage Compartment 61 To use the back trim storage Interior Lights compartment, slide the seat all the way Overhead Light forward and fold the seat back forward, then open the compartment. The interior light is located in the headliner in between the sun visors. When finished, close the compartment The interior light can be set to three and return the seat to its original different positions. position and secure it. After returning the seat to its original position, make sure the seat is secured by attempting to lightly move it forward and rearward.

Caution!

Do not forcefully push objects into the rear

storage compartment. Otherwise, the box 06040200-12A-002AB could be damaged. Overhead Light Switch 1—On Sun Visors 06040100-L12-001AB 2 — Door Sun Visor 3—Off GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE The sun visors are located at the sides of the interior rear view mirror. They can Vanity Mirrors be adjusted forward toward the To access the vanity mirror, fold the sun Light switch positions: windshield, and sideways toward the visor down and lift the cover toward the side windows, to block sunlight. seats. On : Light is on at all times. Door : Light is on when any door is open. Light is on or off when the illuminated entry system is on. Off : Light is off at all times.

62 Trunk Light when a door is opened from the outside In addition, if the following operations The trunk light comes on when the lid is with a key fob being carried and then are performed after turning the interior open and turns off when closed. the door is closed. lights off, they will turn on again if: The overhead light turns on for about The ignition is cycled to a position 15 seconds when the ignition is cycled other than OFF. OFF with the overhead light switch in the door position. A door is opened. The overhead light turns off immediately A door is unlocked. in the following cases: The operation of the illuminated entry The ignition is cycled ON and both system can be changed through the doors are closed. Connect system. The driver's door is locked. Accessory Socket

06040200-T12-003 Battery Saver The accessory socket is located deep Trunk Light Location If any door is left open with the in the back of the footwell on the passenger side. 1 — Trunk Light Switch overhead light switch in the door position or the trunk lid is left open, the overhead light or trunk light turns off Note: To prevent the battery from after about 30 minutes to prevent being discharged, do not leave the discharge of the battery. trunk open for a long period when the To prevent discharge of the battery, if engine is not running. the interior lights remain on (the interior Illuminated Entry System light switch is in the on position), they The overhead light turns on when any will turn off automatically under the of the following operations occurs with following conditions: the overhead light switch in the door No operations are done for about position and the ignition is OFF: 30 minutes after the ignition is cycled 06040400-L12-002AB Accessory Socket Turns on for about 30 seconds when OFF. the driver's door is unlocked. The button on the key fob is Only use genuine FCA accessories or pushed, or the request switch located the equivalent requiring no greater than Turns on for about 15 seconds when 12V (120 W, 10A). a door is opened while a key fob is left on the exterior door handle is pushed to lock the doors (vehicles with the The ignition must be placed in ACC or in the vehicle and then the door is ON. closed. advanced keyless function) after the ignition is cycled OFF. Turns on for about five seconds 63 To prevent accessory socket damage Note: To prevent discharging of the or electrical failure, pay attention to the battery, do not use the socket for long following: periods with the engine off or idling. Do not use accessories that require more than 12V (120 W, 10A). Warning! Do not use accessories that are not genuine FCA accessories or the equivalent. To avoid serious injury or death: Only devices designed for use in this Close the cover when the accessory type of outlet should be inserted into any socket is not in use to prevent foreign 12 Volt outlet. 06040500L21002 objects and liquids from getting into the Cupholders accessory socket. Do not touch with wet hands. 1 — Front Cup Holder Correctly insert the plug into the Close the lid when not in use and while 2 — Rear Cup Holder (If Equipped) driving the vehicle. accessory socket. If this outlet is mishandled, it may cause Do not insert the cigarette lighter into an electric shock and failure. the accessory socket. Warning! Noise may occur on the audio Cupholders — If playback depending on the device Equipped connected to the accessory socket. Never use a cup holder to hold hot liquids Cupholders are available and can be while the vehicle is moving. Using a cup GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE Depending on the device connected inserted in the center console on the holder to hold hot liquids while the vehicle to the accessory socket, the vehicle's passenger side and the rear area of the is moving is dangerous. If the contents spill, you could be burned. electrical system may be affected, center console. which could cause the warning light to illuminate. Disconnect the connected device and make sure that the problem is resolved. If the problem is resolved, disconnect the device from the socket and switch the ignition off. If the problem is not resolved, contact an authorized dealer.

64 Installing Cupholders Caution! When installing a cupholder, insert it firmly into the installation hole and make sure that it is secured in place. Do not place plastic bottles without caps in the cup holders. Otherwise, the contents may spill while the vehicle is being driven. Do not place excessive weight on the cup holders such as by resting your hands or elbows on them. Otherwise, the cup 06040500-L25-002 holders could be damaged. Correct Cupholder Placement If a passenger is present, install the front The rear cupholder is designed for use cup holder to the rear console. Otherwise, on the rear console and cannot be a knee might hit it and cause the contents to spill. installed to the front side.

Removing Cup Holders Use both hands when removing the cup holder.

06040500-J12AEC2-001 Installing Cupholders 06040500-L26-001 The front cupholder can be removed Incorrect Cupholder Placement and installed to the rear console.

06040500-J12AEC1-001 Removing Cupholders

65 Windblocker TRUNK LID Using The Remote Release Button — If Equipped This windblocker reduces rear wind Opening coming into the cabin when driving with the convertible top down. Warning!

Before opening the trunk lid, remove any snow and ice accumulation on it. Otherwise, the trunk lid could close under the weight of the snow and ice resulting in injury. Be careful when opening/closing the trunk lid during strong winds. If a strong 04030201-R12-001 gust blows against the trunk lid, it could Interior Trunk Lid Release Button close suddenly resulting in injury. The remote release button function can Fully open the trunk lid and make sure be disabled by locking the doors using that it stays open. If the trunk lid is only the key fob, emergency key, or a opened partially, it could slam shut by request switch on the exterior door vibration or wind gusts resulting in injury. handle to prevent an intruder in the When loading or unloading luggage in vehicle from opening the trunk lid. the trunk, turn off the engine. Otherwise, To enable the remote release button GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE you could get burned by the heat of the operation, unlock the doors by using exhaust gas. the key fob, emergency key, request switch on the exterior door handle, or 06041000-12A-003AB place the ignition in the ON position. Windblocker Note: The remote release button cannot be disabled by locking the doors using the door-lock switch/door-lock knob.

66 Using The Electric Trunk Lid The trunk lid can be closed when the Opener doors are locked with the key fob left in With the remote release button, the the vehicle. However, to prevent locking trunk lid can also be opened while the the key fob in the vehicle, the trunk lid key fob is being carried. can be opened by pushing the electric Push the electric trunk lid button and trunk lid opener. If the trunk lid cannot raise the trunk lid when the latch be opened despite doing this releases. procedure, push the electric trunk lid opener to fully open the trunk lid after pushing the trunk lid completely closed. If the vehicle battery is discharged or 08080100-125-002 there is a malfunction in the electrical Remove Windblocker system and the trunk lid cannot be unlocked, the trunk lid can be opened 2. Remove the fasteners on the right by performing the emergency side of the vehicle. procedure. When Trunk Lid Cannot Be Opened

04030201-12A-001 If the battery is discharged, the trunk lid Electric Trunk Release Button cannot be unlocked and opened. Without the remote release button, If the trunk lid cannot be unlocked even unlock the doors and trunk lid, then if the discharged battery situation has push the electric trunk lid opener and been resolved, the electrical system raise it when the latch releases. may have a malfunction.

With The Advanced Keyless Entry Proceed as follows: 08080100-121-004 Function 1. Close the convertible top and Remove Fasteners A locked trunk lid can also be opened remove the windblocker. 3. Partially peel back the cover on the while the key fob is being carried. When right side of the vehicle. opening the trunk lid with the doors locked, it may require a few seconds for the trunk lid latch to release after the electric trunk lid opener is pushed.

67 TRUNK EMERGENCY Trunk Safety Warning RELEASE As a security measure, a emergency Warning! release lever is built into the rear tail panel of the trunk. In the event of an adult or child being locked inside the Do not allow children to have access to the trunk, the trunk can be simply opened trunk, either by climbing into the trunk from by pulling down the lever and open the outside, or through the inside of the vehicle. Always close the trunk lid when trunk lid. After performing this your vehicle is unattended. Once in the emergency measure, contact an trunk, young children may not be able to 08080100-122-001 authorized dealer as soon as possible. escape, even if they entered through the Cover Removal rear seat. If trapped in the trunk, children 4. Turn and loosen the cap screws until can die from suffocation or heat stroke. the screws start to spin free. Note: Do not pull the screw when pulling the cap. Otherwise, the screw may fall off and become lost. Refer to “Trunk Emergency Release” located in “Getting To Know Your Vehicle” for further information.

GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE Closing 08080100-123-004 1. Use both hands to push the trunk lid Trunk Emergency Release down until the lock snaps shut. Do not slam it. 2. Pull up on the trunk lid to check if it is secure.

68 HOOD Opening The Hood To open the hood, proceed as follows: 1. With the vehicle in PARK, pull the release handle located to the left of the steering wheel, below the instrument panel.

07030201-122-001AB 07030201-123-002 Sliding The Latch Lever To The Inserting Support Rod Into Hole Right 4 — Support Rod Hole 2 — Latch Lever Closing The Hood 3. Pull up the support rod from the clip, To close the hood, proceed as follows: and insert it into the support rod hole indicated by the arrow to hold the hood 1. Check under the hood area to make 07030201-L12-001 open. certain all filler caps are in place and all Releasing The Hood Latch loose items (e.g. tools, oil containers, 1 — Hood Release Handle etc.) have been removed. 2. Lift the hood with one hand, and 2. Move to the outside of the vehicle with the other hand grasp the padded and insert your hand into the hood area on the support rod. opening, then slide the latch lever to the 3. Secure the support rod into the rod right, and lift up the hood. clip. 4. Verify that the support rod is secured in the clip before closing the 07030201-130-888 hood. Support Rod Location 5. Lower the hood slowly to a height of 3 — Support Rod about 8 inches (20 cm) above its closed position and then let it drop. 69 CONVERTIBLE TOP Warning! (SOFT TOP) Lowering The Convertible Top Be sure the hood is fully latched before driving your vehicle. If the hood is not fully latched, it could open when the vehicle is in motion and block your vision. Failure to Warning! follow this warning could result in serious injury or death. Do not sit on the folded convertible top, otherwise the convertible top could be 04110102-L36-006 Caution! damaged or you may fall off and be injured. Lock Release Latch 1 — Release Latch Closed To prevent possible damage, do not slam To lower the convertible top, proceed 2 — Release Latch Open the hood to close it. Lower hood to as follows: approximately 8 inches (20 cm) and drop the hood to close. Make sure hood is fully 1. Make sure the parking brake is 4. With the lock release latch pushed closed for both latches. Never drive vehicle applied and the engine is OFF. forward (red indicator visible), pull the unless hood is fully closed, with both top latch handle rearward to unlock it. latches engaged. 2. Make sure there are no objects which have been placed in the area where the convertible top is to be

GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE retracted. 3. Push forward on the release latch. There is a red indicator showing that the latch is open.

04110102-L21-001 Pulling The Top Latch Handle Rearward 3 — Latch Release Handle

70 5. Remove the striker from the anchor. 6. Standing outside of the vehicle, hold the convertible top along the front edge and pull it toward the rear of the vehicle. To lower the convertible top from inside the vehicle, use the convertible top handles.

04110102-123-002AB Convertible Top Handles 6 — Handles

04110102-126-001AB

04110102-L22-002 7. Move the convertible top rearward Retracted Convertible Top Removing Striker From Anchor while pushing the rear glass lightly with your hand. 4 — Striker Warning! 5 — Anchor 8. With the back end of the convertible top pushed down, push the front end until a latching sound is heard. Lightly Always keep your hands and fingers Note: The power windows will go away from the fastening mechanisms when down automatically when the rock the retracted convertible top to make sure it is securely locked. moving the convertible top: it is dangerous convertible top is opened. If the power to place your hands or fingers near the windows do not go down automatically, fastening mechanisms. Your hands or fully open the windows using the power fingers could be caught and injured by the window switch located on the doors. mechanism.

71 Sit in the seat with the seat belt correctly 3. Standing outside of the vehicle, hold fastened when the vehicle is moving: the convertible top along the front edge standing in the vehicle, or sitting on the and pull it towards the vehicle front. To convertible top storage area or center raise the convertible top from inside the console when the vehicle is moving is a vehicle, use the convertible top dangerous way to ride. During a sudden handles. maneuver or collision you could be seriously injured or even killed.

Raising The Convertible Top To raise the convertible top, proceed as follows: 1. Make sure the parking brake is applied and the engine is OFF.

2. Pull the unlock lever upward to 04110103-L23-002 disengage the lock. Convertible Handle Location 2 — Convertible Top Handles

04110103-L24-003 4. While sitting in a seat, grasp the Convertible Top Components GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE convertible top handles, and push the 4 — Closing Release Latch convertible top against the windshield. 5 — Striker Make sure the striker engages with the 6 — Anchor anchor, move the top latch slowly, and then push the top latch upward until a latching sound is heard. 5. If the red indicator is visible on the lock release button, the convertible top 04110103-121-004 is not locked. After locking the Unlock Lever Location convertible top, verify that the red indicator is not visible. 1 — Unlock Lever

72 The convertible top may be To help prevent theft or vandalism constricted if it is left retracted for a and to ensure that the passenger long period. Therefore, if the top has compartment stays dry, close the become constricted, it may be difficult convertible top securely and lock both to hook the top latch striker to the doors when leaving the vehicle. anchor. The soft top is made of high quality Make sure the convertible top is material and if it is not maintained securely locked by pushing up on it. If correctly, the material could harden, it still sounds loose (rattles) after being becomes stained, or have an uneven locked by the top latch, contact your gloss. 04110103-124-001 authorized dealer. Lowering the convertible top while Lock Release Button it's wet can also cause water to drip 6 — Red Indicator Convertible Top into the cabin. 7 — Release Latch Locked Precautions 8 — Release Latch Unlocked The power windows go down Remove leaves or other debris that automatically in conjunction with the may accumulate on and around the convertible top opening/closing. convertible top. If leaves or other debris However, this is a function for improving Caution! block the drain filter, water may enter the operability, and it does not mean the vehicle. Clean the drain filter at least there is a problem. If the vehicle battery once a year. is disconnected for vehicle maintenance Driving with the convertible top not fully or other reasons, the power windows Before lowering or raising the locked could damage the convertible top. will not go down automatically. If the convertible top, stop in a safe place off power windows do not go down, the Note: of the road and park on a level surface. automatic open/close mechanism for Do not spray water directly near the When lowering the convertible top, the windows must be reset. seam of the window and convertible make sure objects inside the vehicle are The windblocker reduces the amount top when flushing away dirt on the soft not blown away by the wind. of wind coming into the cabin from top with water. Otherwise, water may Secure all loose objects inside before behind when driving with the enter the vehicle (refer to “Convertible driving with the convertible top down. convertible top opened. Top Maintenance” in “Servicing And Maintenance”). Before starting the vehicle make sure the convertible top is correctly locked.

73 ELECTRIC POWER ENVIRONMENT Caution! STEERING PROTECTION Power Steering SYSTEMS Emission Control System Before opening the convertible top, Electric power steering is only operable make sure the rear window defroster when the engine is running. This vehicle is equipped with an switch is turned off. Otherwise the heat If the engine is off or if the power emission control system (the catalytic generated from the window defroster could steering system is inoperable, you can converter is part of this system) that damage the convertible top and the internal enables the vehicle to comply with material. still steer, but it requires more physical effort. existing exhaust emissions requirements. Make sure nothing is on the convertible If the steering feels stiffer than usual top or near the back window when raising during normal driving or the steering Ignoring the following precautions could or lowering the convertible top. Even small vibrates, contact your authorized dealer. cause lead to accumulate on the objects may interfere and cause damage. catalyst inside the converter or cause The warning light notifies the driver the converter to get very hot. Either Do not drive through an automatic car of system abnormalities and operation wash; it may damage the convertible top. condition will damage the converter and conditions. cause poor performance: Do not raise or lower the convertible top Note: Never hold the steering wheel to when the temperature is below 41 °F (5 the extreme left or right for more than USE ONLY UNLEADED FUEL. °C); this will damage the convertible top five seconds with the engine running. material. Do not drive your vehicle with any This could damage the power steering sign of engine malfunction. Do not lower the convertible top when system. Do not coast with the ignition OFF.

GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE it's wet. If the convertible top dries while folded, it will deteriorate and mold. Do not descend steep grades in gear Do not raise or lower the convertible top with the ignition OFF. in a strong wind as it could damage the Do not operate the engine at high convertible top or cause an unexpected accident. idle for more than two minutes. Do not tamper with the emission control system. All inspections and adjustments must be made by your authorized dealer. Do not push-start or pull-start your vehicle.

74 Under U.S. federal law, any modification to the original-equipment emission control system before the first sale and registration of a vehicle is subject to penalties. In some states, such modification made on a used vehicle is also subject to penalties. While the engine is off, the sound of a valve opening and closing can be heard at the rear of the vehicle, however this does not indicate an abnormality. The vehicle has a self-checking device and it operates while the engine is off.

Warning!

A hot exhaust system can start a fire if you park over materials that can burn. Such materials might be grass or leaves coming into contact with your exhaust system. Do not park or operate your vehicle in areas where your exhaust system can contact anything that can burn.

75 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL

CONTROL PANEL AND INSTRUMENTS...... 77 MAINTENANCE MONITOR — IF EQUIPPED ...... 83 FUEL ECONOMY MONITOR — IF EQUIPPED ...... 86 WARNING LIGHTS AND MESSAGES ...... 87 PERSONALIZATION FEATURES . .107 ONBOARD DIAGNOSTIC SYSTEM — OBDII...... 111 EMISSIONS INSPECTION AND MAINTENANCE PROGRAMS . . . .112 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL

76 CONTROL PANEL AND INSTRUMENTS Instrument Cluster

05020103-121-001AB-MPG Instrument Cluster

1 — Odometer/Trip Computer And Trip Computer Button/Dashboard Illumination 2 — Tachometer 3 — Speedometer 4 — Automatic Transmission Info Display 5 — Odometer/Trip Computer Info/Engine Coolant Temperature Gauge/Fuel Gauge/Outside Temperature/Cruise Control/Info Switch Display

77 Odometer/Trip Computer When the ignition is placed in the ACC The trip computer records the total or OFF position, the odometer or trip distance the vehicle is driven until the will not display. Pushing the selector meter is again reset. Return it to “0.0” The display mode can be changed from can switch the trip or reset function for by depressing and holding the selector odometer to “Trip computer A” to “Trip a ten-minute period in the following for one second or more. computer B” and then back to cases: odometer by pushing the selector. Use this meter to measure trip distances and to compute fuel The selected mode will be displayed. After the ignition is cycled to OFF from ON. consumption. Note: Only the trip records tenths of After the driver's door is opened. miles (kilometers). Odometer Trip Computer Reset The odometer records the total The trip computer will be erased when: distance the vehicle has been driven. Trip Computer The power supply is interrupted (blown fuse or the battery is The trip computer can record the total disconnected). distance of two trips. One is recorded in “Trip A”, and the other is recorded in The vehicle is driven over “Trip B”. 9999.9 miles. 05020102-121-001AB Odometer/Trip Reset Button For instance, “Trip A” can record the distance from the point of origin, and 1 — Odometer/Trip Reset Button “Trip B” can record the distance from where the fuel tank is filled. When “Trip A” is selected, pushing the selector again within one second will change to “Trip B” mode. When “Trip A” is selected, TRIP A will be displayed. When “Trip B” is selected, TRIP B will be displayed. GETTING TO KNOW YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL

78 Speedometer Trip Computer And Info Switch The speedometer indicates the speed of the vehicle. The following information can be selected by pushing the INFO switch Instrument Panel with the ignition in the ON position: Illumination Distance-to-empty (approximate When the position lights are turned on distance you can travel on the available with the ignition switched ON, the fuel). brightness of the instrument panel illumination is dimmed. When the Average fuel economy. position lights are turned on, the 05020102-121-001AB Current fuel economy. warning light in the instrument Dimmer Knob Average vehicle speed. cluster illuminates (see “Headlights” in 1 — Instrument Cluster Illumination “Getting To Know Your Vehicle” Dimmer Knob If you have any problems with your trip chapter). computer, contact an authorized dealer. Brightness Adjustment Canceling Illumination Dimmer The brightness of the instrument panel With the ignition ON, rotate the knob to and dashboard illuminations can be the right until a beep sounds while the adjusted by rotating the knob: instrument cluster is dimmed. If the The brightness decreases by rotating instrument cluster's visibility is reduced the knob to the left. A beep will be due to glare from surrounding heard when the knob has been rotated brightness, cancel the illumination to the maximum dim position. dimmer. The brightness increases by rotating When the illumination dimmer is canceled, the instrument cluster cannot the knob to the right. 0620500-122-001 be dimmed even if the position lights Instrument Cluster Display Controls are turned on. When the illumination dimmer is canceled, the screen in the center display switches to constant display of the daytime screen.

79 Distance-To-Empty Mode The distance-to-empty is the Current Fuel Economy Mode This mode displays the approximate approximate remaining distance the This mode displays the current fuel distance you can travel on the vehicle can be driven until all the economy by calculating the amount of remaining fuel based on the fuel graduation marks in the fuel gauge fuel consumption and the distance economy. (indicating the remaining fuel supply) traveled. Current fuel economy will be The distance-to-empty will be disappear. calculated and displayed every two calculated and displayed every second. If there is no past fuel economy seconds. information such as after first When you've slowed to about 3 MPH purchasing your vehicle or the (5km/h),“---mpg”(“---L/100km”) information is deleted when the battery will be displayed. cables are disconnected, the actual distance-to empty/range may differ from the amount indicated. Average Fuel Economy Mode This mode displays the average fuel economy by calculating the total fuel consumption and the total traveled 0502011019A019 distance since purchasing the vehicle, Distance To Empty Display Screen reconnecting the battery after Note: disconnection, or resetting the data. The average fuel economy is calculated 05020110199019 Even though the distance-to-empty and displayed every minute. To clear Current Fuel Economy Display display may indicate a sufficient the data being displayed, push the Screen amount of remaining driving distance INFO switch for more than 1.5 seconds. before refueling is required, refuel as soon as possible if the fuel level is very After pushing the INFO switch, “- - - low or the low fuel warning light mpg” (“---L/100km”)willbe illuminates. displayed for about 1 minute before the fuel economy is recalculated and The display may not change unless displayed. GETTING TO KNOW YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL you add more than approximately 2.3 gallons (9 liters) of fuel.

80 Average Vehicle Speed Mode Tachometer Engine Coolant Temperature Gauge And This mode displays the average vehicle The tachometer shows engine speed in Fuel Gauge speed by calculating the distance and thousands of revolutions per minute the time traveled since connecting the (rpm). Engine Coolant Temperature Gauge battery or resetting the data. The range varies depending on the type Average vehicle speed will be of gauge. calculated and displayed every 10 seconds. To clear the data being displayed, push the INFO switch for more than 1.5 seconds.

05020103-12A-002AB Tachometer 1 — Tachometer Display 0502011020110C Average Vehicle Speed Display Screen After pushing the INFO switch, “- - - MPH” (“---km/h”)willbedisplayed for 0502010417A007 about 1 minute before the vehicle Fuel/Temperature Gauge speed is recalculated and displayed. 1 — Engine Coolant Temperature 2 — Fuel Gauge

Note: If the high engine coolant temperature warning light (red) turns on, there is a possibility of overheating. Park the vehicle in a safe place immediately and take appropriate measures. If the vehicle continues to be driven, it could cause damage to the engine. 81 Fuel Gauge Outside Temperature Changing The Temperature Unit Of The fuel gauge shows approximately Display The Outside Temperature Display how much fuel is remaining in the tank When the ignition is in the ON position, The outside temperature unit can be when the ignition is in the ON position. the outside temperature is displayed. switched between Fahrenheit and We recommend keeping the tank over Celsius using the following procedure. 1/4 full. Settings can be changed through the E = Empty Connect 7.0 radio screen. Refer to “Personalization Features” in this F = Full chapter. If the low fuel warning light illuminates Note: When the temperature unit or the fuel level is very low, refuel as indicated in the outside temperature soon as possible. display is changed, the temperature Note: unit indicated in the engine coolant gauge display changes in conjunction After refueling, it may require some with it. time for the indicator to stabilize. In 05020107345034 addition, the indicator may deviate Outside Temperature Screen Cruise Control Set while driving on a slope or curve since Display Vehicle Speed Display the fuel moves in the tank. Under the following conditions, the The vehicle speed preset using the The display indicating a quarter or outside temperature display may differ cruise control is displayed. less remaining fuel has more segments from the actual outside temperature to show the remaining fuel level in depending on the surroundings and greater detail. vehicle conditions: The direction of the arrow on the Significantly cold or hot fuel gauge indicates that the fuel door temperatures. lid is on the left side of the vehicle. Sudden changes in outside temperature. The vehicle is parked. GETTING TO KNOW YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL The vehicle is driven at low speeds. 0502010819A019 Cruise Control Display Screen

82 MAINTENANCE MONITOR — IF EQUIPPED Oil Life Reset Proceed as follows: 1. Select the icon on the home screen to display the “Applications” screen. 2. Select “Maintenance” to display the maintenance list screen. 3. Switch the tab and select the setting item you want to change: “Scheduled,” “Tire Rotation,” or “Oil Change.”

83 Oil Life Monitor You can customize settings in the setup display as follows:

Tab Item Explanation Setting Notification can be turned on/off. Displays the time or distance until Time (months) maintenance is due. Select this item to set the maintenance period. “Scheduled Due!” is displayed in red, and the indicator light will illuminate in the instrument cluster when the Scheduled remaining distance is less than 300 mi Distance (mile or km) (500 km) or the remaining number of days is less than 15 (whichever comes first). Resets the time and distance to the initial Reset values. Once the system turns on, it needs to be reset whenever carrying out maintenance. Setting Notification can be switched on/off. Displays the distance until tire rotation is due. Select this item to set the tire rotation distance. “Tire Rotation Due!” is displayed in Distance (mile or km) red and the wrench indicator light will Tire Rotation illuminate in the instrument cluster when the remaining distance is less than 300 mi (500 km). Resets the remaining distance to the initial Reset value. Once the system turns on, it needs to be reset whenever rotating the tires. GETTING TO KNOW YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL

84 Tab Item Explanation Setting Notification can be switched on/off. Displays the distance until an oil change is due. Select this item to set the oil change distance. “Oil Change Due!” is displayed in Distance (mile or km) red, and the indicator light will illuminate in the instrument cluster when the remaining distance is less than 300 mi (500 km). Resets the remaining distance to the initial Reset value. Once the system turns on, it needs to be reset whenever replacing the engine oil. Oil Change Displays the engine oil life until an oil change is due. “Oil Change Due!” is displayed in red and the indicator light will illuminate in the Oil life (%) instrument cluster when remaining oil life distance is less than 300 mi (500 km), or remaining days are less than 15 (whichever comes first). Resets the remaining oil life to 100%. The Reset system must be reset whenever replacing the engine oil. (*) The engine oil flexible maintenance setting is available (only some models). Consult an authorized dealer for details. When the engine oil flexible maintenance setting is selected, you will see the following items in the display. The vehicle calculates the remaining oil life based on the engine operating conditions and lets you know when an oil change is due by illuminating the indicator light in the instrument cluster.

85 FUEL ECONOMY Note: When the menu is displayed by Fuel Consumption MONITOR — IF touching the screen, the display is Display hidden automatically after 6 seconds. EQUIPPED Information regarding fuel economy is Select the icon in the menu and displayed: Description perform the operation. Each icon The “Fuel Consumption” information is operates as follows: 1. Displays the fuel economy for the displayed by operating each icon in the past 60 minutes: 1. Hides the menu display. display. Displays the fuel economy every In addition, after completing a trip, the 2. Displays the application screen. minute for the past 1 to 10 minutes. total energy efficiency to date is 3. Resets the fuel economy data. displayed in the ending display when Displays the fuel economy every 10 minutes for the past 10 to the ending display is turned on. 4. Displays the following setting 60 minutes. Proceed as follows: screen: ending display on/off switching - On/off switching for function which 2. Displays the average fuel economy 1. Select the icon on the home synchronizes reset fuel economy data over the past five resets and after the screen to display the applications to trip meter (Trip A). current reset. screen. 3. Calculates the average fuel 2. Select the “Fuel Economy Monitor”. economy every minute after vehicle 3. Operate the Multimedia Control travel begins, and displays it. Knob or touch the screen and display the menu.

05240100-36A-003 Fuel Economy Display Screen GETTING TO KNOW YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL

05240101-36A-004 Average Fuel Economy Display Screen

86 Note: The fuel economy data can be WARNING LIGHTS The warning contents can be verified reset by doing the following operation: AND MESSAGES on the audio system. Proceed as follows: Push the reset switch from the Warning Lights And menu screen. Messages 1. If the warning light is turned on, select icon on the home screen to When the function, which Note: synchronizes the fuel economy monitor display the application screen. The warning light in the instrument and the trip meter, is on, reset Trip A of 2. Select “ Warning Guidance”to the trip meter. panel appears together with a dedicated message and/or acoustic display the current warnings. Delete the average fuel economy signal when applicable. These 3. Select the applicable warning to information displayed in the trip indications are indicative and view the warning details. computer. precautionary and as such must not be For the following warning/indicator After resetting the fuel economy data, considered as exhaustive and/or lights: “-- -” is displayed while the average fuel alternative to the information contained economy is calculated. in the Owner’s Manual, which you are Master Warning Light Ending Screen Display advised to read carefully in all cases. Brake System Warning Light Always refer to the information in this If the ending display on the fuel chapter in the event of a failure ABS Warning Light economy monitor is on when the indication. Charging System Warning Light ignition is cycled from ON position to the OFF position, the information Failure indications displayed are Engine Oil Warning Light regarding the fuel economy is divided into two categories: serious Electric Throttle Warning Light displayed. and less serious failures. Serious failures are indicated by a repeated Cold Start Warning Light and prolonged warning "cycle". Less serious failures are indicated by a Check Engine Warning Light warning "cycle" with a shorter duration. Coolant Temperature Warning Light The display cycle of both categories can be interrupted. The instrument Automatic Transmission Warning panel warning light will stay on until the Light cause of the failure is eliminated. Power Steering Malfunction Indicator Light

87 Air Bag/Seat Belt Pretensioner Indicator Light System Warning Light Passenger Air Bag Deactivation Check Fuel Cap Warning Light Warning Light Low Fuel Warning Light The light turns on when the ignition is switched on for an operation check, Seat Belt Warning Light and turns off a few seconds later or Door Ajar Warning Light when the engine is started. If the light does not turn on or remains turned on, Low Washer Fluid Level Warning have the vehicle inspected at an Light authorized dealer. Tire Pressure Monitoring System Note: Only for “Brake System Warning Warning Light Light:” the light turns on continuously when the parking brake is applied. KEY Warning Light LED Headlight KEY Warning Light BSM (Blind Spot Monitoring) OFF Indicator Light TCS/DSC Indicator Light DSC OFF Indicator Light Security Indicator Light GETTING TO KNOW YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL

88 Red Warning Lights

Warning Light What It Means Parking Brake Warning - Warning Light Inspection/Low Brake Fluid Level Warning Parking Brake Warning / Warning Light Inspection The light illuminates when the parking brake is applied with the ignition switched to START or ON. It turns off when the parking brake is fully released. Low Brake Fluid Level Warning If the brake warning light remains illuminated even though the parking brake is released, the brake fluid may be low or there could be a problem with the brake system. Park the vehicle in a safe place immediately and contact an authorized dealer. Note: Do not drive with the brake system warning light illuminated. Contact an authorized dealer to have the brakes inspected as soon as possible. Driving with the brake system warning light illuminated is dangerous. It indicates that your brakes may not work at all or that they could completely fail at any time. If this light remains illuminated, after checking that the parking brake is fully released, have the brakes inspected immediately. The effectiveness of the braking may diminish so you may need to push the brake pedal more strongly than normal to stop the vehicle. Stop the vehicle in a safe place immediately and contact an authorized dealer. EBD (Electronic Brake-Force Distribution) System Warning If the EBD (Electronic Brake-force Distribution) control unit determines that some components are operating incorrectly, the control unit may illuminate the brake system warning light and the ABS warning light simultaneously. The problem is likely to be the electronic brake force distribution system. Stop the vehicle in a safe place immediately and contact an authorized dealer. Note: Do not drive with both the ABS warning light and brake warning light illuminated. Contact an authorized dealer to have the brakes inspected as soon as possible. Driving when the brake system warning light and ABS warning light are illuminated simultaneously is dangerous. When both lights are illuminated, the rear wheels could lock more quickly in an emergency stop than under normal circumstances.

89 Warning Light What It Means Alternator Failure If the warning light illuminates while driving, it indicates a malfunction of the alternator or of the charging system. Drive to the side of the road and park off the right-of-way. Stop the vehicle in a safe place immediately and contact an authorized dealer. Note: Do not continue driving when the charging system warning light is illuminated because the engine could stop unexpectedly. Low Engine Oil Pressure This warning light indicates low engine oil pressure. Note: Do not run the engine if the oil pressure is low. Otherwise, it could result in extensive engine damage. If the light illuminates or the warning indication is displayed while driving: Drive to the side of the road and park off the right-of-way on level ground. Turn off the engine and wait five minutes for the oil to drain back into the sump. Inspect the engine oil level. If it's low, add the appropriate amount of engine oil while being careful not to overfill. Start the engine and check the warning light. Note: Do not run the engine if the oil level is low. Otherwise, it could result in extensive engine damage. If the light remains illuminated even though the oil level is normal or after adding oil, stop the engine immediately and contact an authorized dealer.

Door-Open Warning Light The light turns on if any door is not closed securely. Close the door securely. GETTING TO KNOW YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL

Warning!

Driving a vehicle with the red brake light on is dangerous. Part of the brake system may have failed. It will take longer to stop the vehicle. You could have a collision. Have the vehicle checked immediately. 90 Red Warning Lights

Warning Light What It Means High Engine Coolant Temperature Warning Light The light flashes when the engine coolant temperature is extremely high, and illuminates when the engine coolant temperature increases further. Handling Procedure Flashing Light: drive slowly to reduce engine load until you can find a safe place to stop the vehicle and wait for the engine to cool down. Illuminated Light: this indicates the possibility of overheating. Park the vehicle in a safe place immediately and stop the engine. Refer to “Overheating” in “In Case Of Emergency” for further information. Note: Do not drive the vehicle with the high engine coolant temperature warning light illuminated. Otherwise, it could result in damage to the engine.

Air Bag/Seat Belt Pretensioner System Warning A system malfunction is indicated if the warning light constantly flashes, constantly illuminates or does not illuminate at all when the ignition is placed in the ON position. If any of these occur, contact an authorized dealer as soon as possible. The system may not operate in an accident.

91 Red Warning Lights

Warning Light What It Means Key Warning Light — Illuminated If any malfunction occurs in the keyless entry system, it illuminates continuously. Note: If the key warning indicator light illuminates or the push button start indicator light (amber) flashes, the engine may not start. Contact an authorized dealer as soon as possible. Key Warning Light — Flashing Advanced Key Fob Malfunction Take the appropriate action and verify that the warning light turns off. The advanced key fob battery is discharged: replace the key fob battery. The advanced key fob is not within the operation range/is placed in areas inside the cabin where it is difficult for the key to be detected: bring the advanced key fob into the operation range. A key fob from another manufacturer similar to the advanced key fob is in the operation range: take the key fob from another manufacturer similar to the advanced key out of the operation range. Without the ignition switched OFF, the advanced key is taken out of the vehicle, and then all the doors are closed: bring the advanced key fob back into the vehicle.

Vehicle Security Alarm System The warning light switches on to report a failure of the vehicle security alarm system. Contact an authorized dealer as soon as possible. GETTING TO KNOW YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL

92 Amber Warning Lights

Warning Light What It Means ABS Warning Light If the ABS warning light stays on while you're driving, when the ABS control unit has detected a system malfunction. If this occurs, your brakes will function normally as if the vehicle had no ABS. Should this happen contact an authorized dealer as soon as possible. Note: When the engine is jump-started to charge the battery, uneven RPM occurs and the ABS warning light may illuminate. If this occurs, it is the result of the weak battery and does not indicate an ABS malfunction. Recharge the battery. The brake assist system does not operate while the ABS warning light is illuminated. Malfunction Indicator Light If this light illuminates while driving, the vehicle may have a problem. It is important to note the driving conditions when the light illuminated and contact an authorized dealer. The malfunction indicator light may illuminate in the following cases: The engine's electrical system has a problem. The emission control system has a problem. The fuel tank level is very low or approaching empty. The fuel-filler cap is missing or not tightened securely. If the malfunction indicator light remains on, or it flashes continuously, do not drive at high speeds and contact an authorized dealer as soon as possible.

93 Warning!

A malfunctioning catalytic converter, as referenced above, can reach higher temperatures than in normal operating conditions. This can cause a fire if you drive slowly or park over flammable substances such as dry plants, wood, cardboard, etc. This could result in death or serious injury to the driver, occupants or others.

Caution!

Prolonged driving with the Malfunction Indicator Light (MIL) on could cause damage to the engine control system. It also could affect fuel economy and driveability. If the MIL is flashing, severe catalytic converter damage and power loss will soon occur. Immediate service is required. GETTING TO KNOW YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL

94 Amber Warning Lights

Warning Light What It Means TPMS (Tire Pressure Monitoring System) Warning Light — If Equipped The warning light switches on and a message is displayed to indicate that the tire pressure is lower than the recommended value and/or that slow pressure loss is occurring. In these cases, optimal tire duration and fuel consumption may not be guaranteed. Should one or more tires be in the condition mentioned above, the display will show the indications corresponding to each tire in sequence. Note: Do not continue driving with one or more flat tires as handling may be compromised. Stop the vehicle, avoiding sharp braking and steering. Repair immediately using the dedicated tire repair kit and contact your authorized dealer as soon as possible. Each tire, including the spare (if provided), should be checked monthly when cold and inflated to the inflation pressure recommended by the vehicle manufacturer on the vehicle placard or tire inflation pressure label. (If your vehicle has tires of a different size than the size indicated on the vehicle placard or tire inflation pressure label, you should determine the proper tire inflation pressure for those tires.) As an added safety feature, your vehicle has been equipped with a tire pressure monitoring system (TPMS) that illuminates a low tire pressure telltale when one or more of your tires is significantly under-inflated. Accordingly, when the low tire pressure telltale illuminates, you should stop and check your tires as soon as possible, and inflate them to the proper pressure. Driving on a significantly under-inflated tire causes the tire to overheat and can lead to tire failure. Under-inflation also reduces fuel efficiency and tire tread life, and may affect the vehicle’s handling and stopping ability. Please note that the TPMS is not a substitute for proper tire maintenance, and it is the driver’s responsibility to maintain correct tire pressure, even if under-inflation has not reached the level to trigger illumination of the TPMS low tire pressure telltale. The TPMS malfunction indicator is combined with the low tire pressure telltale. When the system detects a malfunction, the telltale will flash for approximately one minute and then remain continuously illuminated. This sequence will continue upon subsequent vehicle start-ups as long as the malfunction exists. When the malfunction indicator is illuminated, the system may not be able to detect or signal low tire pressure as intended. TPMS malfunctions may occur for a variety of reasons, including the installation of replacement or alternate tires or wheels on the vehicle that prevent the TPMS from functioning properly. Always check the TPMS malfunction telltale after replacing one or more tires or wheels on your vehicle to ensure that the replacement or alternate tires and wheels allow the TPMS to continue to function properly.

95 Caution!

The TPMS has been optimized for the original equipment tires and wheels. TPMS pressures and warning have been established for the tire size equipped on your vehicle. Undesirable system operation or sensor damage may result when using replacement equipment that is not of the same size, type, and/or style. Aftermarket wheels can cause sensor damage. Using aftermarket tire sealants may cause the Tire Pressure Monitoring System (TPMS) sensor to become inoperable. After using an aftermarket tire sealant it is recommended that you take your vehicle to your authorized dealer to have your sensor function checked. GETTING TO KNOW YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL

96 Amber Warning Lights

Warning Light What It Means Power Steering Malfunction Indicator Light The light illuminates if the electric power steering has a malfunction. If the light illuminates, stop the vehicle in a safe place and do not operate the steering wheel. There is no problem if the light turns off after a while. Contact an authorized dealer if the light illuminates continuously. Note: If the indicator light illuminates, the power steering will not operate normally. If this happens, the steering wheel can still be operated, however, the operation may feel heavy compared to normal, or the steering wheel could vibrate when turning. Repeatedly jerking the steering wheel left and right while the vehicle is stopped or moving extremely slowly will cause the power steering system to go into protective mode which will make the steering feel heavy, but this does not indicate a problem. If this occurs, park the vehicle safely and wait several minutes for the system to return to normal.

97 Amber Warning Lights

Warning Light What It Means Automatic Transmission Warning Light — If Equipped The light illuminates when the transmission has a problem. Note: If the automatic transmission warning light illuminates, the transmission has an electrical problem. Continuing to drive your vehicle in this condition could cause damage to your transmission. Contact an authorized dealer as soon as possible.

Master Warning Light The warning light turns on when the system has a malfunction. Operate the center display and verify the content.

Cold Start Disable Indicator Light When the ambient temperature is extremely low, the engine may not crank even when the engine starting procedure is performed. At this time, the Cold Start Disable Indicator light in the instrument cluster flashes. However, this does not indicate a problem. Note: Place your vehicle in a warm garage until the temperature has risen to a sufficient level to enable engine starting. Electric Throttle Control Warning Light This light informs you of a problem with the Electronic Throttle Control (ETC) system. If a problem is detected while the engine is running, the light will either stay on or flash depending on the nature of the problem. Cycle the ignition key when the vehicle is safely and completely stopped and the transmission is placed in the PARK position. The light should turn off. If the light remains on with the engine running, your vehicle will usually be drivable; however, see an authorized dealer for service as soon as possible. If the light continues to flash when the engine is running, immediate service is required and you GETTING TO KNOW YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL may experience reduced performance, an elevated/rough idle, or engine stall and your vehicle may require towing. The light will come on when the ignition is first turned to ON/RUN and remain on briefly as a bulb check. If the light does not come on during starting, have the system checked by an authorized dealer.

98 Amber Warning Lights

Warning Lights What It Means

Led Headlight Warning Light This light illuminates if there is a malfunction in the LED headlight. Contact an authorized dealer as soon as possible.

BSM (Blind Spot Monitoring) Off Indicator Light — If Equipped A problem in the system may be indicated under the following conditions: The light does not turn on when the ignition is placed in the ON position. The light remains turned on even if the Blind Spot Monitoring (BSM) switch is operated. It turns on while driving the vehicle. Contact an authorized dealer as soon as possible. If the vehicle is driven on a road with less traffic and few vehicles that the radar sensors can detect, the system may pause (the warning light illuminates). However, it does not indicate a malfunction.

Low Fuel Warning Light The light turns on when the remaining fuel is about 2.3 gallons (9.0 liters). The light illumination timing may vary because fuel inside the fuel tank moves around according to the driving conditions and the vehicle posture. Add fuel.

Low Washer Fluid Level Warning Light — If Equipped This warning light indicates that little washer fluid remains. Add washer fluid.

Cruise Control Activation — If Equipped The warning light illuminates when the cruise control system is activated.

99 Amber Warning Lights

Warning Light What It Means

TCS / DSC System Indicator Light The warning light turns on when the in case of intervention of TCS/DSC systems. This means that the vehicle is in critical stability and grip conditions.

DSC Off Indicator Light The warning light turns on when the DSC system is deactivated.

Loose Fuel Filler Cap Indicator Light If the check fuel filler cap warning light illuminates while driving, the fuel filler cap may not be installed properly. Stop the engine and reinstall the fuel filler cap. GETTING TO KNOW YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL

100 Green Warning Lights

Warning Light What It Means

Left Direction Indicator The warning light turns on when the direction indicator control lever is moved downwards or, together with the right direction indicator, when the hazard warning light button is pushed.

Right Direction Indicator The warning light turns on when the direction indicator control lever is moved upwards or, together with the left direction indicator, when the hazard warning light button is pushed.

Parking Lights And Normal Beam Headlights The warning light turns on when parking lights or normal beam headlights are turned on.

Cruise Control — If Equipped The warning light turns on when a cruising speed has been set.

Key Indicator Light The warning light turns on when the engine is ready to start. Warning Light Flashing When the keyless START/STOP button is pushed from ON to ACC or OFF position, the warning light may flash for approximately 30 seconds indicating that the remaining battery power of the key is low. Replace with a new battery before the key becomes unusable.

101 Blue Warning Light

Warning Light What It Means

High Beam Headlights The warning light switches on when the high beam headlights are turned on.

Low Engine Coolant Temperature Indicator Light The light illuminates continuously when the engine coolant temperature is low and turns off after the engine is warm. If the low engine coolant temperature indicator light remains illuminated after the engine has been sufficiently warmed up, the temperature sensor could have a malfunction. Contact an authorized dealer. GETTING TO KNOW YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL

102 Warning Light (Red Color) On Dashboard Trim

Warning Light What It Means Seat Belt Warning Light The seat belt warning light turns on if the driver or passengers seat is occupied and the seat belt is not fastened with the ignition placed in the ON position. If the driver or passengers seat belt is unfastened (only when the passenger seat is occupied) and the vehicle is driven at a speed faster than about 12 MPH (20 km/h), the warning light flashes. After a short time, the LED stops flashing, but remains illuminated. If a seat belt remains unfastened, the LED flashes again for a given period of time. If the driver or passengers seat belt is unfastened after the LED turns on, and the vehicle speed exceeds 12 MPH (20 km/h), the LED flashes again. With Passenger Occupant Classification System: to allow the passenger occupant classification sensor to function properly, do not place and sit on an additional seat cushion on the passengers seat. The sensor may not function properly because the additional seat cushion could cause sensor interference. Without Passenger Occupant Classification System: placing heavy items on the passengers seat may cause the passengers seat belt warning function to operate depending on the weight of the item. To allow the passengers seat weight sensor to function properly, do not place and sit on an additional seat cushion on the passengers seat. The sensor may not function properly because the additional seat cushion could cause sensor interference. If a small child is seated on the passengers seat, the warning light may not operate. Fasten the seat belts.

Warning Light (Amber Color) On Instrument Cluster Trim

Warning Light What It Means

Passenger Air Bag Deactivation Indicator Light The light turns on when the ignition is switched on for an operation check, and turns off a few seconds later or when the engine is started. If the light does not turn on or remains turned on, contact an authorized dealer.

103 Message Indicated On Warning Sound Is Display Activated Caution! If a message is displayed in the center Lights-On Reminder display, take appropriate action (in a If lights are on and the ignition is placed Do not drive the vehicle with the air calm manner) according to the in the ACC position, or the ignition is displayed message. bag/seat belt pretensioner system warning placed in the OFF position, a beep sounding. Driving the vehicle with the If the following messages are displayed continuous beep sound will be heard air bag/seat belt pretensioner system in the center display, a vehicle system when the driver's door is opened. warning beep sounding is dangerous. In a may be malfunctioning: collision, the air bags and the seat belt Note: pretensioner system will not deploy and this Engine Coolant Temperature could result in death or serious injury. High: displays if the engine coolant When the ignition is placed in the ACC position, the “Ignition Not Cycled Contact an authorized dealer as soon as temperature has increased excessively. possible. Off Warning Beep” overrides the Charging System Malfunction: lights-on reminder. displays if the charging system has a Seat Belt Warning Beep malfunction. A personalized function is available to change the sound volume for the Except Mexico Temperature Warning:the lights-on reminder. If the driver's seat belt is not fastened following message is displayed when Air Bag/Seat Belt Pretensioner when the ignition is in the ON position, the temperature around the center System Warning Beep a beep sound will be heard for about display is high. Lowering the six seconds. If there is a problem with the air temperature of the inside of the vehicle bag/seat belt pretensioner systems and If the driver or the passengers seat belt or the temperature around the center the warning light illumination, a warning is not fastened and the vehicle is driven display by avoiding direct sunlight is beep sound will be heard for about at a speed faster than about 12 MPH recommended. 5 seconds every minute. (20 km/h), a beep sound will be heard Stop the vehicle in a safe place and again for a specified period of time. The air bag and seat belt pretensioner contact an authorized dealer. system warning beep sound will continue to be heard for approximately 35 minutes. Contact an authorized

GETTING TO KNOW YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL dealer as soon as possible.

104 Until a seat belt is fastened or a given Key Removed From Vehicle period of time has elapsed, the beep Warning Beep Warning! sound will not stop even if the vehicle A beep sound will be heard six times speed falls below 12 MPH (20 km/h). and the warning light (red) will flash continuously if the ignition has not been Note: Placing heavy items on the front passenger seat may cause the front placed in the OFF position, all the doors To allow the passenger occupant passenger seat belt warning function to are closed, and the key fob is removed classification sensor to function operate depending on the weight of the from the vehicle. properly, do not place and sit on an item. This is to notify the driver that the key additional seat cushion on the fob has been removed from the vehicle passengers seat. The sensor may not To allow the front passenger seat weight sensor to function properly, do not place and the ignition has not been placed in function properly because the and sit on an additional seat cushion on the the OFF position. additional seat cushion could cause front passenger seat. The sensor may not sensor interference. function properly because the additional Note: Because the key fob uses low-intensity radio waves, the If a small child is seated on the seat cushion could cause sensor interference. warning may activate if the key fob passengers seat, the warning beep is carried together with a metal object When a small child sits on the front may not operate. or it is placed in a poor signal reception Mexico passenger seat, it is possible that the warning beep will not operate. area. If the vehicle speed exceeds about Request Switch Inoperable Warning 12 MPH (20 km/h) with the driver or Beep — If Equipped With Advanced Ignition Not Switched OFF passengers seat belt unfastened, a Keyless Function If the driver's door is opened while the warning beep sounds continuously. If If the request switch on the exterior ignition is placed in the ACC position, a the seat belt remains unfastened, the door handle is pushed with a door continuous beep sound will be heard to beep sound stops once and then open, or the ignition has not been notify the driver that the ignition has not continues for about 90 seconds. The placed in the OFF position, a beep will been placed in the OFF position. beep stops after the driver or be heard for about two seconds to passengers seat belt is fastened. Left in this condition, the keyless entry indicate that the doors, and trunk lid Until a seat belt is fastened or a given system will not operate, the car cannot cannot be locked. period of time has elapsed, the beep be locked, and the battery power will sound will not stop even if the vehicle be depleted. speed falls below 12 MPH (20 km/h).

105 Key Left-In-Trunk Compartment Vehicle Speed Alarm — If Equipped Note: A personalized function is Warning Beep — If Equipped With The vehicle speed alarm function is available to change the Blind Spot Advanced Keyless Function designed to alarm the driver via a single Monitoring (BSM) warning beep sound If the key fob is left in the trunk with all beep sound and a warning indication in volume. doors locked and the trunk lid closed, a the instrument cluster that the Reversing: if a moving object such as beep sound is heard for about ten previously set vehicle speed has been a vehicle or two-wheeled vehicle seconds to remind the driver the key exceeded. approaches on the left or right from fob has been left in the trunk. You can change the vehicle speed behind your vehicle, the Blind Spot If this happens, open the trunk lid by setting at which the warning is triggered Monitoring (BSM) warning sound is pushing the electric trunk lid opener (see paragraph “Trip Computer” in activated. and remove the key fob. “Getting To Know Your Vehicle” Electronic Steering Lock Warning A key fob removed from the trunk may chapter). Beep not function because its functions may Tire Inflation Pressure Warning The warning beep operates if the have been temporarily suspended. To Beep — If Equipped steering wheel is not unlocked after the restore the key fob function, perform Vehicle With Conventional Tires:the keyless ignition START/STOP button is the applicable procedure (see warning beep sound will be heard for pushed. paragraph “Keys” in “Getting to know about three seconds when there is any Speed Limiter Warning Beep — If your vehicle” chapter). abnormality in tire inflation pressures Equipped Key Left-In-Vehicle Warning Beep (see “TMPS” in “Safety” chapter). If the vehicle speed exceeds the set (with the advanced keyless function) Vehicle With Run-Flat Tires (If speed by about 2 MPH (3 km/h) or If a key fob is left in the vehicle and all Equipped): the warning beep sound will more, a warning beep operates the doors and the trunk are locked be heard for about three seconds if the continuously. using a separate key fob, a beep sound tire pressures decrease. If the tire The warning beep operates until the is heard for about ten seconds to pressure decreases extremely, a beep vehicle speed decreases to the set remind the driver that the key fob has sound will be heard for approximately speedorless. been left in the vehicle. 30 seconds (see “TMPS” in “Safety” If this happens, open the door and chapter). remove the key fob. A key fob removed Blind Spot Monitoring (BSM) from the vehicle this way may not System Warning Beep — If GETTING TO KNOW YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL function because its functions may Equipped have been temporarily suspended. Driving Forward: the warning beep Perform the applicable procedure to operates when the direction indicator restore the functions of the key fob (see lever is operated to the side where the paragraph “Keys” in “Getting To Know Blind Spot Monitoring (BSM) warning Your Vehicle” chapter). light is illuminated. 106 PERSONALIZATION FEATURES Overview The following Personalization Features can be set or changed by the customer or by an authorized dealer. Personalization Features differ depending on the market and specification. Settings change method 1. Settings can be changed by operating the center display screen A: Refer to the “Settings” paragraph in Fiat Connect 7.0 Supplement for further information. B: Refer to “Fuel Economy Monitor” paragraph in this chapter. 2. Settings can be changed by operating the vehicle switches C: Refer to “Auto Lock/Unlock Function” paragraph in “Getting To Know Your Vehicle” for further information. D: Refer to “Key Fob” in “Getting To Know Your Vehicle” for further information. E: Refer to “Lock/Unlock With Request Switch (With The Advanced Keyless Function)” (Doors) in “Getting To Know Your Vehicle” for further information. 3. Settings can be changed by an authorized dealer (refer to the following table) X: Refer to your authorized dealer for setting change.

Settings Change Method Item Feature Factory Setting Available Settings 123 Safety Blind Spot Monitoring Warning Beep Volume (*) High High/Low/Off A — X System (if equipped)

107 Settings Change Method Item Feature Factory Setting Available Settings 123 Vehicle Lock: When Driving/Unlock: In Park/Lock: Out of Park Lock: When Operation condition of Unlock: In Park/Lock: Door Locks Driving/Unlock: IGN ACX auto lock/unlock function Shifting Out of Park/ Off Lock: When Driving Unlock: IGN Off/ Lock: When Driving/Off Keyless 90 seconds/ Time for locking door Entry 30 seconds 60 seconds/30 A—X automatically System seconds 90 seconds/ Time for locking door 30 seconds 60 seconds/30 A—X automatically Advanced seconds Keyless Auto-lock function Entry Off On/Off A — X operation/non operational System Beep volume when Off or Medium High/Medium/Low/Off A D/E X locking/unlocking 60 seconds/ Time until interior lights 15 seconds 30 seconds/15 A—X turn off after closing door Illuminated seconds/7.5 seconds Entry Time until interior lights System turn off automatically 60 minutes/

GETTING TO KNOW YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 30 minutes A—X when any door is not 30 minutes/10 minutes closed completely Auto-Wiper Operational/non- On On/Off (**) A — X Control operational

108 Settings Change Method Item Feature Factory Setting Available Settings 123 Daytime Operational/non- Running On On/Off — — X operational Lights (DRL) 120 seconds/ Auto Time until headlights turn 90 seconds/ headlight off 30 second A—X off 60 seconds/ (***) 30 seconds/Off (****) High/Med. Auto-Light Timing by which lights Medium High/Medium/Med. A—X Control turn on Low/Low Adaptive Front Operational/non- Lighting On On/Off A — X operational (***) System (AFS) Lights-On Reminder Warning beep volume High High/Low/Off A — X

120 seconds/ Coming Time until headlights turn 90 seconds/60 Home 30 seconds A—X off seconds/30 seconds/ System Off Leaving Operational/Non- Home Light On or Off On/Off A — X operational System Turn Signals Beep volume Low High/Low A — X Three-Flash Operational/Non- On or Off On/Off A — X Turn Signal operational

109 Settings Change Method Item Feature Factory Setting Available Settings 123 System Language indicated in Depends on market Language English A—X display (****) Temperature unit Temperature °C °F/°C A — X indicated in display Distance unit indicated in Distance mi or km mi/km A — X display Fuel Economy Monitor Ending On/Off Off On/Off B — X Display Fuel Linkage/non-linkage with Economy fuel economy reset and Off On/Off B — X Resetting trip meter reset Procedure (—) Feature setting change not available. (*) Only the volume of the warning beep during Blind Spot Monitoring (BSM) operation can be changed. The volume of the warning beep during Rear Cross Traffic Alert (RCTA) operation cannot be changed. (**) If the auto-wiper control is set to Off, the wiper lever AUTO position is set to intermittent operation. (***) Though these systems can be turned Off, doing so will defeat the purpose of the system and FCA recommends that these systems remain On. (****) Available only in display from the center display. GETTING TO KNOW YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL

110 ONBOARD DIAGNOSTIC Caution! Warning! SYSTEM — OBD II Your vehicle is equipped with a Prolonged driving with the MIL on could ONLY an authorized service technician sophisticated Onboard Diagnostic cause further damage to the emission should connect equipment to the OBD II system called OBD II. This system control system. It could also affect fuel connection port in order to diagnose or monitors the performance of the economy and driveability. The vehicle must service your vehicle. emissions, engine, and automatic be serviced before any emissions tests can If unauthorized equipment is connected be performed. transmission control systems. When to the OBD II connection port, such as a these systems are operating properly, If the MIL is flashing while the vehicle is driver-behavior tracking device, it may: your vehicle will provide excellent running, severe catalytic converter damage Be possible that vehicle systems, performance and fuel economy, as well and power loss will soon occur. Immediate as engine emissions well within current including safety related systems, could be service is required. impaired or a loss of vehicle control could government regulations. occur that may result in an accident If any of these systems require service, Onboard Diagnostic involving serious injury or death. the OBD II system will turn on the System (OBD II) Access, or allow others to access, Malfunction Indicator Light (MIL). It will Cybersecurity information stored in your vehicle systems, also store diagnostic codes and other including personal information. information to assist your service Your vehicle is required to have an technician in making repairs. Although Onboard Diagnostic system (OBD II) your vehicle will usually be drivable and and a connection port to allow access For further information, refer to not need towing, see your authorized to information related to the “CyberSecurity” in “Tips, Controls, and dealer for service as soon as possible. performance of your emissions General Information” in your Owner’s controls. Authorized service technicians Manual Radio Supplement. may need to access this information to assist with the diagnosis and service of your vehicle and emissions system.

111 EMISSIONS Your vehicle has a simple ignition The MIL will not flash at all and will INSPECTION AND actuated test, which you can use prior remain fully illuminated until you place MAINTENANCE to going to the test station. To check if the ignition in the off position or start PROGRAMS your vehicle's OBD II system is ready, the engine. This means that your you must do the following: vehicle's OBD II system is ready and In some localities, it may be a legal you can proceed to the I/M station. 1. Cycle the ignition switch to the ON requirement to pass an inspection of If your OBD II system is not ready, you your vehicle's emissions control position, but do not crank or start the engine. should see your authorized dealer or system. Failure to pass could prevent repair facility. If your vehicle was vehicle registration. Note: If you crank or start the engine, recently serviced or had a battery failure For states that require you will have to start this test over. or replacement, you may need to do an Inspection and nothing more than drive your vehicle as Maintenance (I/M), this 2. As soon as you cycle the ignition you normally would in order for your check verifies the switch to the ON position, you will see OBD II system to update. A recheck “Malfunction Indicator the “Malfunction Indicator Light (MIL)” with the above test routine may then Light (MIL)” is symbol come on as part of a normal indicate that the system is now ready. bulb check. functioning and is not Regardless of whether your vehicle's on when the engine is running, and that 3. Approximately 15 seconds later, one OBD II system is ready or not, if the MIL the OBD II system is ready for testing. of two things will happen: is illuminated during normal vehicle Normally, the OBD II system will be operation you should have your vehicle The MIL will flash for about ten ready. The OBD II system may not be serviced before going to the I/M station. seconds and then return to being fully ready if your vehicle was recently The I/M station can fail your vehicle illuminated until you turn OFF the serviced, recently had a dead battery or because the MIL is on with the engine ignition or start the engine. This means a battery replacement. If the OBD II running. system should be determined not ready that your vehicle's OBD II system is not for the I/M test, your vehicle may fail the ready and you should not proceed to test. the I/M station. GETTING TO KNOW YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL

112 SAFETY

SAFETY SYSTEMS ...... 114 AUXILIARY DRIVING SYSTEMS . .116 OCCUPANT RESTRAINT SYSTEMS...... 124 SEAT BELT SYSTEMS ...... 125 CHILD RESTRAINT PRECAUTIONS ...... 130 SUPPLEMENTARY RESTRAINT SYSTEMSRS—AIRBAG...... 134 EVENT DATA RECORDER (EDR) . .148 CONSTANT MONITORING ...... 149

113 SAFETY SYSTEMS Note: The ABS cannot prevent the natural The vehicle has the following safety Braking distances may be longer on laws of physics from acting on the vehicle, systems: loose surfaces (snow or gravel, for nor can it increase braking or steering example) which usually have a hard efficiency beyond that afforded by the Anti-lock Braking System (ABS) condition of the vehicle brakes and tires or SAFETY foundation. A vehicle with a normal the traction afforded. Traction Contol System (TCS) braking system may require less distance to stop under these The ABS cannot prevent collisions, Dynamic Stability Control (DSC) conditions because the tires will build including those resulting from excessive For the operation of the systems, see up a wedge of surface layer when the speed in turns, following another vehicle too closely, or hydroplaning. the following pages. wheels skid. The capabilities of an ABS equipped ABS System (Anti-lock The sound of the ABS operating vehicle must never be exploited in a Braking System) may be heard when starting the engine reckless or dangerous manner that could The ABS control unit continuously or immediately after starting the jeopardize the user’s safety or the safety of monitors the speed of each wheel. If vehicle; however, it does not indicate a others. one wheel is about to lock up, the ABS malfunction. responds by automatically releasing TCS System (Traction and reapplying that wheel's brake. The Control System) driver will feel a slight vibration in the Warning! brake pedal and may hear a chattering noise from the brake system. This is The ABS contains sophisticated Warning! normal ABS system operation. electronic equipment that may be Continue to depress the brake pedal susceptible to interference caused by without pumping the brakes. The improperly installed or high output radio The capability of the TCS must never be warning light turns on when the system transmitting equipment. This interference tested irresponsibly and dangerously, in has a malfunction. Refer to “Warning can cause possible loss of anti-lock braking such a way as to compromise personal Lights And Messages” in “Getting To capability. Installation of such equipment safety and the safety of others. Know Your Instrument Panel” for further should be performed by qualified information. professionals. The Traction Control System (TCS) Pumping of the Anti-Lock Brakes will enhances traction and safety by diminish their effectiveness and may lead to a collision. Pumping makes the stopping controlling engine torque and braking. distance longer. Just press firmly on your When the TCS detects driving wheel brake pedal when you need to slow down slippage, it can lower engine torque and or stop. operate the brakes to prevent loss of traction. This means that on a slick surface, the engine adjusts automatically to provide optimum 114 power to the drive wheels, limiting surfaces, or during sudden or evasive If the light stays on, the TCS, DSC or wheel spin and loss of traction. maneuvering, enhancing vehicle safety. the brake assist system may have a The indicator light turns on when the Refer to “ABS System (Antilock Brake malfunction and they may not operate system has a malfunction. Refer to System)” and “TCS System (Traction correctly. Take your vehicle to an “Warning Lights And Messages” in Control System)” in this chapter for authorized dealer. further information. “Getting To Know Your Instrument DSC OFF Indicator Light Panel” for further information. DSC operation is possible at speeds The indicator light stays on for a few greater than 12 mph (20 km/h). TCS / DSC Indicator Light seconds when the ignition is placed in The indicator light turns on when the The indicator light stays on for a few the ON mode. It also illuminates when system has a malfunction. Refer to seconds when the ignition is placed in the DSC OFF switch is pressed and “Warning Lights And Messages” in the ON mode. TCS/DSC is switched off. “Getting To Know Your Instrument If the light remains illuminated and the If the TCS or DSC is operating, the Panel” for further information. indicator light flashes. TCS/DSC is not switched off, contact Note: The DSC may not operate If the indicator light stays on, the your authorized dealer. The DSC may correctly unless the following are have a malfunction. TCS, DSC or the brake assist system observed: may have a malfunction and they may DSC OFF Switch not operate correctly. Contact your Use tires of the correct size specified for your vehicle on all four wheels. Push the switch to turn off the authorized dealer. TCS/DSC. The indicator light in the Use tires of the same manufacturer, Note: instrument cluster will illuminate. Push brand and tread pattern on all four the switch again to turn the TCS/DSC In addition to the indicator light wheels. back on. The indicator light will turn off. flashing, a slight sound will come from Do not mix worn tires. the engine. This indicates that the TCS/DSC is operating properly. Note: The DSC may not operate correctly when tire chains are used. On slippery surfaces, such as fresh snow, it will be impossible to achieve TCS / DSC Indicator Light high rpm when the TCS is on. The indicator light stays on for a few seconds when the ignition is placed in DSC System (Dynamic the ON mode. It also illuminates when Stability Control) the DSC OFF switch is pressed and The Dynamic Stability Control (DSC) TCS/DSC is switched off. automatically controls braking and 05060301-12A-001 engine torque in conjunction with DSC OFF Switch systems such as ABS and TCS to help control side slip when driving on slippery 115 Note: AUXILIARY DRIVING When DSC is on and you attempt to Warning! SYSTEMS free the vehicle when it is stuck, or drive Blind Spot Monitoring it out of freshly fallen snow, the TCS (BSM) System Dynamic Stability Control (DSC) cannot SAFETY (part of the DSC system) will activate. Depressing the accelerator will not prevent the natural laws of physics from The Blind Spot Monitoring (BSM) acting on the vehicle, nor can it increase system is designed to assist the driver increase engine power and freeing the the traction afforded by prevailing road vehicle may be difficult. When this during lane changes by alerting the conditions. DSC cannot prevent accidents, driver to the presence of vehicles happens, turn off the TCS/DSC. including those resulting from excessive approaching from the rear in an If the TCS/DSC is off when the speed in turns, driving on very slippery surfaces, or hydroplaning. DSC also cannot adjacent lane. engine is turned off, it automatically prevent accidents resulting from loss of The system detects vehicles activates when the ignition is placed in vehicle control due to inappropriate driver approaching from the rear while the ON mode. input for the conditions. Only a safe, traveling in the forward direction at a attentive, and skillful driver can prevent speed of 19 mph (30 km/h) or faster, accidents. The capabilities of an DSC and will activate the BSM warning lights equipped vehicle must never be exploited in a reckless or dangerous manner which equipped within the door mirrors. could jeopardize the user’s safety or the If the turn signal lever is operated to safety of others. signal a lane change in the direction in Vehicle modifications, or failure to which the warning light is illuminated, properly maintain your vehicle, may change the system warns the driver of a vehicle the handling characteristics of your vehicle, in the detection area by flashing the and may negatively affect the performance warning light and activating an audible of the DSC system. Changes to the alert. steering system, suspension, braking The detection area on this system system, tire type and size or wheel size covers the driving lanes on both sides may adversely affect DSC performance. Improperly inflated and unevenly worn tires of the vehicle and from the rear part of may also degrade DSC performance. Any the doors to about 164 ft (50 m) behind vehicle modification or poor vehicle the vehicle. maintenance that reduces the effectiveness of the DSC system can increase the risk of loss of vehicle control, vehicle rollover, personal injury and death.

116 The BSM system will not operate under Note: Under the following conditions, the following conditions: the rear radar sensors cannot detect objects, or it may be difficult to detect The vehicle speed falls below about them: 15 mph (25 km/h) even though the warning light is turned off. A vehicle is in the detection area at the rear in an adjacent driving lane but The gear selector is shifted to it does not approach. The BSM system REVERSE. determines the condition based on In the following cases, the warning light radar detection data. in the instrument cluster illuminates and operation of the BSM system is A vehicle is traveling alongside your deactivated. vehicle at nearly the same speed for an extended period of time. A problem with the system (including the BSM warning lights) is detected. Vehicles approaching in the opposite direction. A large change in position of a rear radar sensor on the vehicle has A vehicle in an adjacent driving lane 1 occurred. is attempting to pass your vehicle. There is a large accumulation of A vehicle is in an adjacent lane on a snow or ice on the rear bumper near a road with extremely wide driving lanes. 0528070012A002 rear radar sensor. Remove any snow, The detection area of the rear radar BSM Detection Areas ice or mud on the rear bumper. sensors is set at the road width of expressways. 1 — Detection Area Driving on snow covered roads for In the following cases, the activation of long periods. the BSM warning lights and the audible Activation / Deactivation The temperature near the rear radar alert may not occur, or they may be The Blind Spot Monitoring (BSM) sensors becomes extremely hot due to delayed: driving for long periods on inclines system will operate when all of the A vehicle makes a lane change from during warm weather. following conditions are met: a driving lane two lanes over to an The ignition is ON. The battery voltage has decreased. adjacent lane. The BSM switch is pushed and the If the warning light in the instrument Driving on steep inclines. cluster remains illuminated, have the warning light in the instrument cluster is Crossing the summit of a hill or turned off. vehicle inspected at an authorized dealer as soon as possible. mountain pass. The vehicle speed is 19 mph (30km/h)orfaster. 117 The turning radius is small (making a The door glass is fogged or covered Additionally, while a warning light is sharp turn or turning at intersections). in snow, frost or dirt. illuminated, if the turn signal lever is operated to signal a turn in the direction Whenthereisadifferenceinthe The system switches to the Rear Cross in which the warning light is illuminated, height between your driving lane and Traffic Alert function when the gear selector is shifted to the REVERSE the warning light flashes. SAFETY the adjacent lane. position. Reverse Driving (RCTA System Immediately after pushing the BSM Operation) switch and the system becomes BSM Warning Lights operable. The BSM warning lights are equipped The Rear Cross Traffic Alert (RCTA) system detects vehicles approaching If the road width is extremely narrow, on the left and right door mirrors. from the left and right of your vehicle vehicles two lanes over may be and flashes the BSM warning lights. detected. The detection area of the rear radar sensors is set according to the Function For Canceling Illumination road width of expressways. Dimmer The BSM warning lights may turn on in When the headlight switch is in the reaction to stationary objects on the or position, the brightness of road or the roadside such as guardrails, the Blind Spot Monitoring (BSM) tunnels, sidewalls, and parked vehicles. warning lights is dimmed. If the Blind A BSM warning light may flash or the Spot Monitoring (BSM) warning lights audible alert may be activated several are difficult to see due to glare from times when making a turn at a city surrounding brightness when traveling 05280701-12A-001 intersection. BSM Warning Light on snow-covered roads or under foggy Turn off the BSM system while pulling a conditions, push the dimmer The warning lights turn on when a trailer or while an accessory such as a cancellation button to cancel the vehicle approaching from the rear in an bicycle carrier is installed to the rear of dimmer and increase the brightness of adjacent lane is detected. the vehicle. Otherwise, the radar’s Blind Spot Monitoring (BSM) warning sound system waves will be blocked When the ignition is cycled ON, the lights when they turn on. causing the system to not operate malfunction warning light in the instrument Refer to “Instrument Panel Illumination” normally. cluster illuminates momentarily and then in “Getting To Know Your Instrument turns off after a few seconds. In the following cases, it may be difficult Panel” for further information. to view the illumination/flashing of the Forward Driving (BSM System BSM Warning Beep BSM warning lights equipped on the Operation) The BSM audible alert is activated door mirrors: The BSM system detects vehicles simultaneously with the flashing of a Snow or ice is adhering to the door approaching from the rear and turns on BSM warning light. mirrors. the warning lights equipped on the door mirrors according to the conditions. 118 BSM Switch The BSM and RCTA systems are When the BSM switch is pushed, the turned off when the battery is BSM and RCTA systems are turned off disconnected such as when the and the BSM off indicator light in the battery terminals or fuses have been instrument cluster turns on. removed and reinstalled. To turn the If the switch is pushed again, the BSM BSM and RCTA systems back on, and RCTA systems become operable push the BSM switch. and the BSM off indicator light turns off. RCTA (Rear Cross Traffic Alert) Function The RCTA system is designed to assist the driver in checking the area to the 05281200-03A-001 rear of the vehicle on both sides while Rear Cross Traffic Alert the vehicle is in REVERSE by alerting 1 — Your Vehicle the driver to the presence of vehicles 2 — Approaching Vehicles Left And approaching the rear of the vehicle. Right The RCTA system detects vehicles approaching from the left and right sides of the vehicle while the vehicle is RCTA Operation reversing out of a parking space, and The RCTA system operates when the 05280703-12A-001 BSM Switch Location notifies the driver of possible danger gear selector is shifted to the REVERSE using the BSM warning lights and an position. Note: audible alert. If there is the possibility of a collision When the ignition is cycled OFF, the with an approaching vehicle, the BSM condition before the system was warning light flashes and the audible turned off is maintained. For example, alert is activated simultaneously. if the ignition is cycled OFF while the BSM and RCTA systems are operational, the BSM and RCTA systems remain operational the next time the ignition is cycled ON.

119 With Rear View Camera In the following cases, the BSM off Note: Under the following conditions, The Rear Cross Traffic Alert (RCTA) indicator light turns on and operation of the rear radar sensors cannot detect warning indication in the rearview the system is deactivated. If the BSM objects or it may be difficult to detect monitor also synchronizes with the off indicator light in the instrument them: Blind Spot Monitoring (BSM) warning cluster remains illuminated: SAFETY The vehicle speed while in indicator light on the door mirrors. A problem with the system including REVERSE is about 6 mph (10 km/h ) the BSM warning lights has occurred. or faster. A large change in the position of a The rear radar sensor detection rear radar sensor on the vehicle has area is obstructed by a nearby wall or occurred. parked vehicle (reverse the vehicle to a position where the radar sensor There is a large accumulation of detection area is no longer obstructed). snow or ice on the rear bumper near a rear radar sensor. A vehicle is approaching directly to the rear of your vehicle. Driving on snow-covered roads for long periods. The vehicle is parked on an incline. The temperature near the radar Immediately after pushing the BSM sensors becomes extremely hot due to switch and the system becomes driving for long periods on inclines operable. during warm weather. The battery voltage has decreased. Have the vehicle inspected at an authorized dealer as soon as possible.

0528140012A002 RCTA Detection

05281200-03A-003 Sensors Obstructed By Nearby Vehicles

120 FCC Rules and with Industry Canada license-exempt RSS standard(s). Operation is subject to the following two conditions: 1. This device may not cause harmful interference. 2. This device must accept any interference received, including interference that may cause undesired operation. 05281200-03A-005 Your Vehicle Parked On An Incline Note: Changes or modifications not expressly approved by the party In the following cases, it may be difficult responsible for compliance could void to view the illumination/flashing of the the user’s authority to operate the BSM warning lights equipped on the equipment. door mirrors: TPMS (Tire Pressure Snow or ice adheres to the door Monitoring System) mirrors. Tire Pressure Monitoring System — The door glass is fogged or covered Abarth 05281200-03A-004 in snow, frost or dirt. Another Vehicle Approaching The TPMS system monitors the Directly To The Rear Of Your Turn off the RCTA system while pulling pressure for each tire. Vehicle a trailer or while an accessory such as a If tire pressure is too low in one or more bicycle carrier is installed to the rear of tires, the system will inform the driver the vehicle. via the warning light in the Otherwise, the sound system waves instrument cluster and by the warning emitted by the radar will be blocked beep sound. causing the system to not operate The tire pressure sensors installed on normally. each wheel send tire pressure data by General Information radio signal to the receiver unit in the vehicle. The following regulatory statement TPMS does not alleviate your need to applies to all Radio Frequency (RF) check the pressure and condition of all devices equipped in this vehicle: four tires regularly. This device complies with Part 15 of the 121 Each tire, including the spare (if detects a malfunction, the telltale will signals from the tire pressure sensor to equipped), should be checked monthly flash for approximately one minute and the receiver unit. when cold and inflated to the inflation then remain continuously illuminated. When using the following devices in pressure recommended by the vehicle This sequence will continue upon the vehicle that may cause radio manufacturer on the vehicle placard or subsequent vehicle start-ups as long as SAFETY interference with the receiver unit. tire inflation pressure label. (If your the malfunction exists. When the vehicle has tires of a different size than malfunction indicator is illuminated, the A digital device such as a personal the size indicated on the vehicle placard system may not be able to detect or computer. or tire inflation pressure label, you signal low tire pressure as intended. A current converter device such as a should determine the proper tire TPMS malfunctions may occur for a DC-AC converter. inflation pressure for those tires.) variety of reasons, including the As an added safety feature, your vehicle installation of replacement or alternate When excess snow or ice adheres to has been equipped with a tire pressure tires or wheels on the vehicle that the vehicle, especially around the monitoring system (TPMS) that prevent the TPMS from functioning wheels. properly. Always check the TPMS illuminates a low tire pressure telltale When the tire pressure sensor malfunction telltale after replacing one when one or more of your tires is batteries are discharged. significantly under-inflated. Accordingly, or more tires or wheels on your vehicle when the low tire pressure telltale to ensure that the replacement or When using a wheel with no tire illuminates, you should stop and check alternate tires and wheels allow the pressure sensor installed. TPMS to continue to function properly. your tires as soon as possible, and When using tires with steel wire inflate them to the proper pressure. System Error Activation reinforcement in the side walls. Driving on a significantly under-inflated When the warning light flashes, tire causes the tire to overheat and can When using tire chains. there may be a system malfunction. lead to tire failure. Under-inflation also Contact your authorized dealer. Tires And Wheels reduces fuel efficiency and tire tread life, Note: When inspecting or adjusting the and may affect the vehicle's handling A system error activation may occur in tire air pressures, do not apply and stopping ability. Please note that the following cases: excessive force to the stem portion of the TPMS is not a substitute for proper When there is equipment or a device the wheel unit. The stem portion could tire maintenance, and it is the driver's near the vehicle using the same radio be damaged. responsibility to maintain correct tire frequency as that of the tire pressure pressure, even if under-inflation has not sensors. Changing Tires And Wheels reached the level to trigger illumination The following procedure allows the When a metallic device such as a of the TPMS low tire pressure telltale. TPMS to recognize a tire pressure non-genuine navigation system is Your vehicle has also been equipped sensor's unique ID signal code equipped near the center of the with a TPMS malfunction indicator to whenever tires or wheels are changed, dashboard, which may block radio indicate when the system is not such as changing to and from winter operating properly. When the system tires. 122 Note: Replacing Tires And Wheels When reinstalling a previously removed tire pressure sensor to a Each tire pressure sensor has a Note: wheel, replace the grommet (seal unique ID signal code. The signal code When replacing/repairing the tires or must be registered with the TPMS between valve body/sensor and wheel) wheels or both, have the work done by for the tire pressure sensor. before it can work. The easiest way to your authorized dealer, or the tire do it is to have your authorized dealer pressure sensors may be damaged. change your tire and complete ID Caution! signal code registration. The wheels equipped on your vehicle are specially designed for When your authorized dealer installation of the tire pressure sensors. changes your vehicle's tires, they will The TPMS has been optimized for the Do not use non-genuine wheels, original equipment tires and wheels. TPMS complete the tire pressure sensor ID otherwise it may not be possible to signal code registration. pressures and warning have been install the tire pressure sensors. established for the tire size equipped on If you or someone else changes tires, Be sure to have the tire pressure your vehicle. Undesirable system operation you or someone else can also undertake sensors installed whenever tires or or sensor damage may result when using the steps for the TPMS to complete the wheels are replaced. replacement equipment that is not of the ID signal code registration: same size, type, and/or style. The TPM When having a tire or wheel or both sensor is not designed for use on After tires have been changed, place replaced, the following types of tire aftermarket wheels and may contribute to a the ignition in the ON mode, then back pressure sensor installations are possible: poor overall system performance or sensor to ACC or OFF modes. The tire pressure sensor is removed damage. Customers are encouraged to Wait for about 15 minutes. from the old wheel and installed to the use OEM wheels to assure proper TPM new one. feature operation. After about 15 minutes, drive the Using aftermarket tire sealants may The same tire pressure sensor is used vehicle at a speed of at least 16 mph cause the Tire Pressure Monitoring System (25 km/h) for 20 minutes and the tire with the same wheel. Only the tire is (TPMS) sensor to become inoperable. After pressure sensor ID signal code will be replaced. using an aftermarket tire sealant it is registered automatically. A new tire pressure sensor is recommended that you take your vehicle to Note: installed to a new wheel. your authorized dealer to have your sensor If the vehicle is driven within about function checked. 15 minutes of changing tires, the warning light will flash because the Note: After inspecting or adjusting the tire sensor ID signal code would not have The tire pressure sensor ID signal pressure always reinstall the valve stem been registered. If this happens, park code must be registered when a new tire cap. This will prevent moisture and dirt the vehicle for about 15 minutes, after pressure sensor is purchased. For from entering the valve stem, which could which the sensor ID signal code will purchase of a tire pressure sensor and damage the TPMS sensor. register upon driving the vehicle for registration of the tire pressure sensor ID 20 minutes. signal code, consult your authorized dealer. 123 The following regulatory statement General Information OCCUPANT applies to all radio frequency (RF) RESTRAINT devices equipped in this vehicle: The following regulatory statement applies to all radio frequency (RF) SYSTEMS This device complies with Part 15 of the devices equipped in this vehicle: FCC Rules and with Industry Canada The most important safety equipment SAFETY license-exempt RSS standard(s). This device complies with Part 15 of the of the vehicle comprise the following Operation is subject to the following FCC Rules and with Industry Canada protection systems: two conditions: license-exempt RSS standard(s). Seat Belts Operation is subject to the following (1) This device may not cause harmful two conditions: SBA (Seat Belt Alert) System interference, and (1) This device may not cause harmful (2) This device must accept any Head Restraints interference, and interference received, including Child Restraint Systems interference that may cause undesired (2) This device must accept any operation. interference received, including Front Air Bags And Side Air Bags interference that may cause undesired Note: Changes or modifications not Read the information given in the operation. expressly approved by the party following pages with the utmost care. responsible for compliance could void Note: Changes or modifications not It is of fundamental importance that the the user’s authority to operate the expressly approved by the party protection systems are used in the equipment. responsible for compliance could void correct way to guarantee the maximum the user’s authority to operate the possible safety level for the driver and equipment. the passengers.

124 SEAT BELT Except Mexico SYSTEMS All of the seat belt retractors are designed to keep the lap/shoulder belts Buckle up even though you are an out of the way when not in use. excellent driver, even on short trips. Someone on the road may be a poor The driver's seat belt has no provisions driver and could cause a collision that for child-restraint systems and has only includes you. This can happen far away an emergency locking mode. from home or on your own street. The driver may wear it comfortably, and Research has shown that seat belts it will lock during a collision. save lives, and they can reduce the However, the passenger's seat seriousness of injuries in a collision. lap/shoulder belt retractor operates in 03020100-12A-001 Some of the worst injuries happen two modes: emergency locking mode, Seat Belt Routing Guide when people are thrown from the and for child-restraint systems, vehicle. Seat belts reduce the possibility automatic locking mode. If you must of ejection and the risk of injury caused use the passenger seat for a child, slide Warning! by striking the inside of the vehicle. the passenger seat as far back as Everyone in a motor vehicle should be possible and make sure any child Relying on the air bags alone could lead belted at all times. restraint system is secured properly. to more severe injuries in a collision. The air Seat Belt Precautions Belt retraction may become difficult if bags work with your seat belt to restrain the belts and seat belt guides are you properly. In some collisions, the air Seat belts help to decrease the soiled, so try to keep them clean. Refer bags won’t deploy at all. Always wear your possibility of severe injury during to “Lap/Shoulder Belt” in ”Interiors,” seat belt even though you have air bags. accidents and sudden stops. FCA found in Servicing And Maintenance” In a collision, you and your passengers recommends that the driver and for further information. can suffer much greater injuries if you are passengers always wear seat belts. not properly buckled up. You can strike the Mexico interior of your vehicle or other passengers, or you can be thrown out of the vehicle. All the seats have lap/shoulder belts. Always be sure you and others in your These belts have retractors with inertia vehicle are buckled up properly. locks that keep them out of the way when not in use. It is dangerous to ride in a cargo area, inside or outside of a vehicle. In a collision, The locks allow the belts to remain people riding in these areas are more likely comfortable on users, but they will lock to be seriously injured or killed. in position during a collision.

125 Do not allow people to ride in any area A seat belt that is buckled into the Important Safety of your vehicle that is not equipped with wrong buckle will not protect you properly. Precautions seats and seat belts. The lap portion could ride too high on your Please pay close attention to the body, possibly causing internal injuries. Be sure everyone in your vehicle is in a Always buckle your seat belt into the information in this section. It tells you SAFETY seat and using a seat belt properly. buckle nearest you. how to use your restraint system Occupants, including the driver, should properly, to keep you and your always wear their seat belts whether or not A seat belt that is too loose will not passengers as safe as possible. an air bag is also provided at their seating protect you properly. In a sudden stop, you position to minimize the risk of severe injury could move too far forward, increasing the Here are some simple steps you can or death in the event of a crash. possibility of injury. Wear your seat belt take to minimize the risk of harm from a snugly. deploying air bag: Wearing your seat belt incorrectly could make your injuries in a collision much A seat belt that is worn under your arm 1. Children 12 years old and under worse. You might suffer internal injuries, or is dangerous. Your body could strike the should always ride buckled up in a you could even slide out of the seat belt. inside surfaces of the vehicle in a collision, vehicle with a rear seat. Follow these instructions to wear your seat increasing head and neck injury. A seat belt belt safely and to keep your passengers worn under the arm can cause internal 2. If a child from 2 to 12 years old (not safe, too. injuries. Ribs aren’t as strong as shoulder in a rear-facing child restraint) must ride bones. Wear the seat belt over your Two people should never be belted into in the front passenger seat, move the shoulder so that your strongest bones will seat as far back as possible and use a single seat belt. People belted together take the force in a collision. can crash into one another in a collision, the proper child restraint (refer to “Child hurting one another badly. Never use a A shoulder belt placed behind you will Restraints” in this section for further lap/shoulder belt or a lap belt for more than not protect you from injury during a information). one person, no matter what their size. collision. You are more likely to hit your head in a collision if you do not wear your 3. Children that are not big enough to A lap belt worn too high can increase shoulder belt. The lap and shoulder belt are wear the vehicle seat belt properly (refer the risk of injury in a collision. The seat belt meant to be used together. forces won’t be at the strong hip and pelvic to “Child Restraints” in this section for bones, but across your abdomen. Always A frayed or torn seat belt could rip apart further information) should be secured wear the lap part of your seat belt as low in a collision and leave you with no in a vehicle with a rear seat in child as possible and keep it snug. protection. Inspect the seat belt system restraints or belt-positioning booster periodically, checking for cuts, frays, or seats. Older children who do not use A twisted seat belt may not protect you loose parts. Damaged parts must be child restraints or belt-positioning properly. In a collision, it could even cut into replaced immediately. Do not disassemble you. Be sure the seat belt is flat against booster seats should ride properly or modify the seat belt system. Seat belt buckled up in a vehicle with a rear seat. your body, without twists. If you can’t assemblies must be replaced after a straighten a seat belt in your vehicle, take it collision. to your authorized dealer immediately and 4. Never allow children to slide the have it fixed. shoulder belt behind them or under their arm. 126 5. You should read the instructions Seat Belts And Pregnant Emergency Locking provided with your child restraint to Women Mode make sure that you are using it properly. Pregnant Women And Persons With When the seat belt is fastened, it will 6. All occupants should always wear Serious Medical Conditions always be in the emergency locking their lap and shoulder belts properly. Pregnant women should always wear mode. seat belts. Ask your doctor for specific In the emergency locking mode, the 7. The driver and front passenger seats recommendations. belt remains comfortable on the should be moved back as far as occupant and the retractor will lock in practical to allow the front air bags The lap belt should be worn SNUGLY position during a collision. room to inflate. AND AS LOW AS POSSIBLE OVER THE HIPS. The shoulder belt should be If the belt is locked and cannot be 8. Do not lean against the door or worn across your shoulder properly, but pulled out, retract the belt once, and window. If your vehicle has side air never across the stomach area. then try pulling it out slowly. If this fails, bags, and deployment occurs, the side pull the belt strongly one time and air bags will inflate forcefully into the loosen, then pull it out again slowly. space between occupants and the Seat Belt With Automatic Locking door and occupants could be injured. Mode 9. If the air bag system in this vehicle When the seat belt is fastened, it will needs to be modified to accommodate always be in the emergency locking a disabled person, refer to the mode until it is switched to automatic “Customer Assistance” section for locking mode by pulling it all the way customer service contact information. out to its full length. If the belt feels tight and hinders comfortable movement while the Warning! vehicle is stopped or in motion, it may be in the automatic locking mode because the belt has been pulled too Never place a rear-facing child restraint far out. in front of an air bag. A deploying 0305123592US To return the belt to the more Seat Belts And Pregnant Women passenger front air bag can cause death or comfortable emergency locking mode, serious injury to a child 12 years or younger, including a child in a rear-facing Persons with serious medical wait until the vehicle has stopped in a child restraint. conditions also should wear seat belts. safe, level area, retract the belt fully to Check with your doctor for any special convert it back to emergency locking Only use a rear-facing child restraint in a instructions regarding specific medical mode and then extend it around you vehicle with a rear seat. conditions. again.

127 Automatic Locking Mode Do not use the Automatic Locking Mode 3 Always use the automatic locking mode to restrain occupants who are wearing the to keep the child-restraint system from seat belt or children who are using booster shifting to an unsafe position in the seats. The locked mode is only used to event of an accident. install rear-facing or forward-facing child SAFETY restraints that have a harness for To enable seat belt automatic locking restraining the child. 1 mode, pull it all the way out and 2 connect it as instructed on the child restraint system. It will retract down to Lap/Shoulder Belts the child restraint system and stay Fastening The Seat Belt locked on it. 03020201122002 Adjusting The Seat Belt Warning! 1 — Position Lap Belt Across Lap Area 2 — Lap Belt Routing 1 3 — Shoulder Belt Routing Never place a rear-facing child restraint in front of an air bag. A deploying passenger front air bag can cause death or Unfastening The Seat Belt serious injury to a child 12 years or 2 Depress the button on the seat belt younger, including a child in a rear-facing buckle. If the belt does not fully retract, child restraint. pull it out and check for kinks or twists. Only use a rear-facing child restraint in a 03020201121001 Then make sure it remains untwisted as vehicle with a rear seat. Fastening The Seat Belt it retracts. 1—SeatBelt 2 — Seat Belt Warning! Tongue Buckle

Position the lap belt as low as possible, The seat belt assembly must be not on the abdominal area 2, then replaced if the switchable Automatic Locking Retractor (ALR) feature or any adjust the shoulder belt 3 so that it fits other seat belt function is not working snugly against your body. properly when checked according to the procedures in the Service Manual. Failure to replace the seat belt assembly could increase the risk of injury in collisions.

128 If the driver or passenger's seat belt is 1 unfastened (only when the passenger seat is occupied) and the vehicle is driven at a speed faster than about 12 MPH (20 km/h), the LED flashes. After a short time, the LED stops flashing, but remains illuminated. If a seat belt remains unfastened, the 1 LED flashes again for a given period of time. In this case, fasten the seat belt.

03020202UNF001 0302020012A001 Seat Belt Pretensioner Latching/Unlatching The Seat Belt Seat Belt Routing Guides For optimum protection, the driver and 1 — Seat Belt Release Button 1 — Shoulder Belt Routing Guides passenger seat belts are equipped with pretensioner and load limiting systems. Note: Seat Belt Warning For both these systems to work Systems properly you must wear the seat belt If a belt does not fully retract, properly. inspect it for kinks and twists. If it is still If it detects that the occupant seat belt The seat belt pretensioners are not retracting properly, have it is unfastened, the warning light or beep designed to deploy in moderate or inspected: contact an authorized alerts the occupant. severe frontal, near frontal collisions. In dealer. Refer to “Warning Lights And addition, during a side collision, the Always wear the seat belt with it Messages” in “Getting To Knowing Your pretensioner operates on the side in correctly routed in its guide. Wearing a Instrument Panel” for further which the collision occurs. The seat belt without the seat belt routed in information. pretensioners operate differently its guide is dangerous because the Refer to “Seat Belt Warning Light” in depending on what types of air bags seat belt would not be able to provide “Getting To Knowing Your Instrument are equipped. For details on the seat adequate protection in an accident, Panel” for further information. belt pretensioner operation, refer to the “SRS Air Bag Deployment Criteria” which could result in serious injury. Driver And Passenger paragraph in this chapter. BeltAlert (If Equipped) When a collision is detected, the Seat Belt Warning Systems pretensioners deploy simultaneously The LED on dashboard trim turns on if with the air bags. For deployment the driver or passenger's seat is details, refer to the “SRS Air Bag occupied and the seat belt is not Deployment Criteria” paragraph in this fastened with the ignition switched ON. chapter. 129 The seat belt retractors remove slack Load Limiter CHILD RESTRAINT quickly as the air bags are expanding. The load limiting system releases belt PRECAUTIONS Any time the air bags and seat belt webbing in a controlled manner to pretensioners have fired they must be Child Restraints reduce belt force on the occupant's replaced. SAFETY chest. FCA strongly urges the use of With Passenger Occupant child-restraint systems for children small While the most severe load on a seat Classification System enough to use them. belt occurs in frontal collisions, the load In addition, the pretensioner system for limiter has an automatic mechanical Before buying any restraint system, the passenger, like the front and side function and can activate in any make sure that it has a label certifying passenger Air Bag, is designed to only accident mode with sufficient occupant that it meets all applicable Safety deploy when the passenger occupant movement. Standards. You should also make sure classification sensor detects a that you can install it in the vehicle Even if the pretensioners have not fired, passenger sitting on the passenger's where you will use it. the load limiting function must be seat. checked by an authorized dealer. Check your local and state or provincial Note: laws for specific requirements regarding the safety of children riding in your These devices are not a substitute vehicle. for proper seat belt placement by the occupant. The seat belt still must be Children 12 years or younger should worn snugly and positioned properly. ride properly buckled up in a rear seat, if available. According to crash The pretensioners are triggered by statistics, children are safer when the Occupant Restraint Controller properly restrained in the rear seats (ORC). Like the air bags, the rather than in the front. pretensioners are single use items. A Whatever child-restraint system you deployed pretensioner or a deployed consider, please pick the appropriate air bag must be replaced immediately. one for the age and size of the child, obey the law and follow the instructions that come with the individual child-restraint system. A child who has outgrown child-restraint systems should use seat belts, both lap and shoulder. If the shoulder belt crosses the neck or face, move the child closer to the center of the vehicle. 130 A rear-facing child-restraint system make sure the OFF passenger Air Child Restraint System should NEVER be used on the Bag deactivation indicator light Types passenger seat with the Air Bag system illuminates. For more details, refer to In this Owner Handbook, explanation of activated. In the event of an impact the "Passenger Occupant Classification child restraint systems secured with Air Bag activation may cause fatal Sensor" in “Supplementary Restraint seat belts is provided for the following injuries to the transported child. System SRS — Air Bag” for additional three types of popular child-restraint information. systems: infant seat, child seat, booster Note: A seat belt or child-restraint Warning! seat. system can become very hot in a closed vehicle during warm weather. To avoid Note: In a collision, an unrestrained child can burning yourself or a child, check them Installation position is determined become a projectile inside the vehicle. The before you or your child touches them. by the type of child restraint system. force required to hold even an infant on Always read the manufacturer's your lap could become so great that you could not hold the child, no matter how instructions and this Owner Handbook strong you are. The child and others could Warning! carefully. be badly injured or killed. Any child riding in Due to variations in the design of your vehicle should be in a proper restraint child restraint systems, vehicle seats for the child’s size. Improper installation can lead to failure of an infant or child restraint. It could come and seat belts, not all child restraint loose in a collision. The child could be may fit all seating positions. With Passenger Occupant badly injured or killed. Follow the child Before purchasing a child-restraint Classification System restraint manufacturer’s directions exactly when installing an infant or child restraint. system, it should be tested in the To reduce the chance of injuries caused specific vehicle seating position (or by deployment of the passenger Air After a child restraint is installed in the positions) where it is intended to be Bag, the passenger occupant vehicle, do not move the vehicle seat forward or rearward because it can loosen the child used. If a previously purchased classification sensor work as a part of child-restraint system does not fit, you the supplementary restraint system. restraint attachments. Remove the child restraint before adjusting the vehicle seat may need to purchase a different one This system deactivates the passenger position. When the vehicle seat has been that will. front and side Air Bags and also the adjusted, reinstall the child restraint. passenger seat belt pretensioner When your child restraint is not in use, system when the OFF passenger Air secure it in the vehicle with the seat belt or Bag deactivation indicator light LATCH anchorages, or remove it from the illuminates. vehicle. Do not leave it loose in the vehicle. When an infant or small child sits on the In a sudden stop or accident, it could strike passenger seat, the system shuts off the occupants or seatbacks and cause the passenger front and side Air Bags serious personal injury. and seat belt pretensioner system, so 131 Note: For additional information, refer to Warning! www.safercar.gov/parents/index.htm or call: 1–888–327–4236 SAFETY Canadian residents should refer to Never place a rear-facing child restraint Transport Canada’s website for in front of an air bag. A deploying passenger Front Air Bag can cause death additional information: http:// or serious injury to a child 12 years or www.tc.gc.ca/eng/ younger, including a child in a rear-facing motorvehiclesafety/ child restraint. safedrivers-childsafety-index-53.htm Only use a rear-facing child restraint in a 03030202BOO001 Infant Seat vehicle with a rear seat. Booster Seat An infant seat provides restraint by bracing the infant's head, neck and Child Seat back against the seating surface. Warning! A child seat restrains a child's body using the harness. Never allow a child to put the shoulder belt under an arm or behind their back. In a crash, the shoulder belt will not protect a child properly, which may result in serious injury or death. A child must always wear both the lap and shoulder portions of the seat belt correctly.

Child Seat Installation

06070809INF001 Position Infant Seat The passenger lap/shoulder belt can 03030202CHD001 Child Seat easily be converted into the automatic locking mode, which must be done to Booster Seat hold the child-restraint system. A booster seat is a child restraint Note: To check if your seats have side accessory designed to improve the fit of air bags: FCA vehicles equipped with the seat belt system around the child's side air bag will have an embossed body. "SRS AIRBAG" marking on the outboard shoulder of the seats. 132 Follow the child restraint system To get the retractor into the system, place the ignition in the OFF manufacturer's instructions carefully. automatic locking mode, pull the position, and then reinstall the child Depending on the type of child restraint shoulder belt portion of the seat belt restraint system. system, it may not employ seat belts until the entire length of the belt is out of which are in automatic locking mode, the retractor. however if it uses an upper tether, it Push the child-restraint system firmly may not be mounted properly in this into the vehicle seat. Be sure the belt vehicle as there is no safe way to retracts as snugly as possible. A anchor the tether. Confirm whether the clicking noise from the retractor will be child restraint system can be used with heard during retraction if the system is seat belts by reading the child restraint in automatic locking mode. If the belt system manufacturer's instructions. does not lock the seat down tight, Passengers Seat Child Restraint repeat the previous step and also this System Installation (With Passenger one. Occupant Classification System) 06070400567567 Seat your child safely in the Passenger Air Bag Deactivation Note: Child restraint systems are Light designed to be secured in vehicle seats child-restraint system and secure the by lap belts or the lap belt portion of a child according to the instructions from the child-restraint system manufacturer. lap/shoulder belt. Warning! Proceed as follows: Note: Inspect this function before each use of the child restraint system. Make sure the ignition is switched You should not be able to pull the off. Never place a rear-facing child restraint shoulder belt out of the retractor while in front of an air bag. A deploying Slide the seat as far back as the system is in the automatic locking passenger Advanced Front Air Bag can possible. mode. When you remove the cause death or serious injury to a child child-restraint system, be sure the belt 12 years or younger, including a child in a Place the child-restraint system on fully retracts to return the system to rear-facing child restraint. the seat without putting your weight on emergency locking mode before the seat and secure the child-restraint Only use a rear-facing child restraint in a occupants use the seat belts. system with the lap portion of the vehicle with a rear seat. lap/shoulder belt. See the Place the ignition in the ON position manufacturer's instructions on the and make sure the passenger air bag child-restraint system for belt routing deactivation indicator light illuminates instructions. after installing a child restraint system on the passenger seat. If the passenger air bag deactivation indicator light does not illuminate, remove the child restraint 133 SUPPLEMENTARY during an accident. Seat belt usage is If your vehicle is also equipped with RESTRAINT SYSTEM necessary to: a passenger occupant classification system, refer to the “Passenger SRS — AIR BAG Keep the occupant from being Occupant Classification System” thrown into an inflating Air Bag. Description paragraph for further information. SAFETY The front and side Supplementary Reduce the possibility of injuries If your vehicle is equipped with a Restraint Systems (SRS) include during an accident that is not designed passenger occupant classification different types of Air Bags. for Air Bag inflation, such as roll-over or system, the passenger Air Bag rear impact. Note: Please verify which kinds of Air deactivation indicator light illuminates Bags are equipped on your vehicle by Reduce the possibility of injuries in for a specified time after the ignition has locating the “SRS AIR BAG” location frontal, near frontal or side collisions been placed in the ON position. indicators. that are not severe enough to activate These indicators are visible in the area the Air Bags. where the Air Bags are installed. Reduce the possibility of being The Air Bags are installed in the thrown from your vehicle. following locations: Reduce the possibility of injuries to The steering wheel hub (Driver Air lower body and legs during an accident Bag) because the Air Bags provide no The passenger dashboard protection to these parts of the body. (Passenger Air Bag) Hold the driver in a position which The outer sides of the seat backs allows better control of the vehicle. 06070400567567 Passenger Air Bag Deactivated (Side Air Bags) Light This vehicle has front air bags and lap/shoulder belts for both the driver Warning! Small children must be protected by a and front passenger. The front air bags child-restraint system as stipulated by are a supplement to the seat belt law in every state and province. In In order for the Side Air Bags to work as restraint systems. certain states and provinces, larger intended, do not install any accessory children must use a child-restraint The Air Bag supplementary restraint items in your vehicle which could alter the systems are designed to provide roof. Do not add an aftermarket sunroof to system. Carefully consider which supplementary protection in certain your vehicle. Do not add roof racks that child-restraint system is necessary for situations so seat belts are always require permanent attachments (bolts or your child and follow the installation important in the following ways. screws) for installation on the vehicle roof. directions in this Owner's Manual as Do not drill into the roof of the vehicle for well as the child-restraint system Without seat belt usage, the Air Bags any reason. manufacturer's instructions. cannot provide adequate protection 134 Do not use a child-restraint system which employs an upper tether Warning! because there is no appropriate means to anchor the tether. Unapproved modifications or service procedures to the passenger seat Warning! assembly, its related components, seat cover or cushion may inadvertently change the air bag deployment in case of a frontal collision. This could result in death or If the Indicator Light remains illuminated serious injury to the front passenger if the for an adult passenger, have an authorized vehicle is involved in a collision. A modified dealer service the air bag system vehicle may not comply with required immediately. Failure to do so may cause Federal Motor Vehicle Safety Standards serious injury or death. If the Indicator Light (FMVSS) and/or Canadian Motor Vehicle is illuminated with the words “PASS Safety Standards (CMVSS). AIRBAG OFF,” the Passenger Advanced Front Air Bag will not deploy in the event of If it is necessary to modify the air bag a collision. system for persons with disabilities, contact your authorized dealer. Never place a rear-facing child restraint in front of an air bag. A deploying passenger front air bag can cause death or serious injury to a child 12 years or younger, including a child in a rear-facing child restraint. Only use a rear-facing child restraint in a vehicle with a rear seat. Children 12 years or younger should always ride buckled up in a vehicle with a rear seat.

135 Supplementary Restraint System Components With Passenger Occupant Classification System SAFETY

03040300-121-002 With Passenger Occupant Classification System 1 — Driver/Passenger Inflators And Air 5 — Side Crash Sensors 9 — Passenger Occupant Bags Classification Sensor 2 — Crash Sensors And Diagnostic 6 — Air Bag/Seat Belt Pretensioner 10 — Passenger Occupant Module (Sas Unit) System Warning Light Classification Module 3 — Seat Belt Pretensioners 7 — Side Inflators And Air Bags 4 — Front Air Bag Sensors 8 — Passenger Air Bag Deactivation Indicator Light

136 Without Passenger Occupant Classification System

03040300-122-003 Without Passenger Occupant Classification System 1 — Driver/Passenger Inflators And Air 4 — Front Air Bag Sensors 7 — Side Inflators And Air Bags Bags 2 — Crash Sensors And Diagnostic 5 — Side Crash Sensors Module (Sas Unit) 3 — Seat Belt Pretensioners 6 — Air Bag/Seat Belt Pretensioner System Warning Light

137 How The SRS Air Bags Never place a rear-facing child restraint (With Passenger Occupant Work in front of an air bag. A deploying Classification System) This vehicle has front air bags and passenger front air bag can cause death or The driver's dual-stage air bag controls serious injury to a child 12 years or lap/shoulder belts for both the driver air bag inflation in two energy stages. younger, including a child in a rear-facing During an impact of moderate severity, SAFETY and front passenger. The front air bags child restraint. are a supplement to the seat belt the driver's air bag deploys with lesser restraint systems. The SRS Air Bags are Only use a rear-facing child restraint in a energy, whereas during more severe designed to provide further protection vehicle with a rear seat. impacts, it deploys with more energy. for passengers in addition to the seat Passenger Air Bag belt functions. Be sure to wear seat Driver Air Bag (Dual Stage) belts properly. The driver's air bag is mounted in the The passenger Air Bag is mounted in Seat Belt Pretensioners steering wheel. the passenger dashboard. The seat belt pretensioners are designed to deploy in moderate or severe frontal, near frontal collisions. In addition, during a side collision, the pretensioner operates on the side in which the collision occurs. The pretensioners operate differently depending on what types of air bags are equipped. For details on the seat belt pretensioner operation, refer to the “SRS Air Bag Deployment Criteria”. 06010203-126-123 06010204-126-123 Driver Side Air Bags Passenger Side Air Bag Warning! When Air Bag crash sensors detect a The inflation mechanism for the frontal impact of greater than moderate passenger Air Bag is the same as the force, the driver's Air Bag inflates driver's Air Bag, as mentioned above. Being too close to the steering wheel or quickly helping to reduce injury mainly For more details about Air Bag instrument panel during front air bag deployment could cause serious injury, to the driver's head or chest caused by deployment, refer to "SRS Air Bag including death. Air bags need room to directly hitting the steering wheel. For Deployment Criteria" in this chapter. inflate. Sit back, comfortably extending more details about Air Bag deployment, For further details about air bag your arms to reach the steering wheel or refer to "SRS Air Bag Deployment deployment, refer to "SRS Air Bag instrument panel. Criteria" in this chapter for further Deployment Criteria" in this chapter. information. 138 Side Air Bags The side air bags are mounted in the Warning! Warning! outer sides of the seat backs. When the air bag crash sensors detect a side impact of greater than moderate force, Do not use accessory seat covers or place If a child restraint system, child, small the system inflates the side air bag only objects between you and the Side Air teenager or adult in the front passenger on the side in which the vehicle was hit. Bags; the performance could be adversely seat is seated improperly, the occupant affected and/or objects could be pushed may provide an output signal to the OCS into you, causing serious injury. that is different from the occupant’s properly seated weight input. This may result in serious injury or death in a Warning! collision. Always wear your seat belt and sit Occupants, including children, who are properly, with the seatback in an upright up against or very close to SABs can be position, your back against the seatback, seriously injured or killed. Occupants, sitting upright, facing forward, in the center including children, should never lean on or of the seat, with your feet comfortably on sleep against the door, side windows, or or near the floor. area where the side air bags inflate, even if Do not carry or hold any objects (e.g., they are in an infant or child restraint. backpacks, boxes, etc.) while seated in the Seat belts (and child restraints where front passenger seat. Holding an object appropriate) are necessary for your may provide an output signal to the OCS protection in all collisions. They also help that is different than the occupant’s keep you in position, away from an inflating properly seated weight input, which may SAB. To get the best protection from the result in serious injury or death in a SABs, occupants must wear their seat belts collision. properly and sit upright with their backs Placing an object on the floor under the against the seats. Children must be properly front passenger seat may prevent the OCS restrained in a child restraint or booster seat from working properly, which may result in 06010205-126-123 that is appropriate for the size of the child. serious injury or death in a collision. Do not Side Air Bags place any objects on the floor under the The side air bag inflates quickly to reduce front passenger seat. injury to the driver or passenger's head With Passenger Occupant and chest caused by directly hitting Classification System interior parts such as a door or window. In addition, the passenger side bag is For more details about air bag designed to only deploy when the deployment, refer to "SRS Air Bag passenger occupant classification Deployment Criteria" in this chapter for sensor detects a passenger sitting on further information. the passenger's seat. 139 Warning Light/Beep A system malfunction or operation Warning! conditions are indicated by a warning. Refer to the beginning paragraph of “Warning Lights And Messages” in Side Air Bags need room to inflate. Do SAFETY “Getting To Know Your Instrument not lean against the door or window. Sit Panel” for further information. upright in the center of the seat. Being too close to the Side Air Bags during deployment could cause you to be Warning! severely injured or killed. Relying on the Side Air Bags alone could lead to more severe injuries in a collision. The Ignoring the Air Bag Warning Light in your Side Air Bags work with your seat belt to instrument panel could mean you won’t restrain you properly. In some collisions, Side have the air bags to protect you in a Air Bags won’t deploy at all. Always wear collision. If the light does not come on as a your seat belt even though you have Side Air bulb check when the ignition is first turned Bags. on, stays on after you start the vehicle, or if it comes on as you drive, have an authorized dealer service the air bag system immediately.

03030101-121-001 Passenger Side Front Air Bag And Sun Visor Air Bag Labels Child Restraint Systems Rearward-facing child restraint systems Warning! must NEVER be fitted on the front seat with an active passenger side air bag since in the event of an impact the air Do not use accessory seat covers or place bag activation may cause fatal injuries objects between you and the Side Air to the transported child. Bags; the performance could be adversely ALWAYS comply with the instructions affected and/or objects could be pushed into you, causing serious injury. on the label stuck on the passenger side sun visor : A = Mexico market/ B = U.S.A. and Canada market.

140 SRS Air Bag Deployment Criteria This chart indicates the applicable SRS equipment that will deploy depending on the type of collision (the illustrations are the representative cases of collisions). Deployed air bags and seat belt pretensioners cannot protect you in another collision. Have the air bags, seat belt pretensioners, and the seat belt retractor assemblies replaced by an authorized dealer immediately. Also, have the Occupant Restraint Controller System serviced as well.

Types Of Collision

SRS Equipment A Severe Frontal/Near A Severe Side Collision (*) A Rear Collision Frontal Collision

SRS Equipment

Seat Belt Pretensioner X (**) (Both Sides) X (**) (Impact Side Only) Driver Air Bag X No air bag and seat belt pretensioner will be activated in Passenger Air Bag X (**) a rear collision Side Air Bag X (**) (Impact Side Only) X: the SRS air bag equipment is designed to deploy in a collision. (*) In a side collision, the seat belt pretensioners and the side air bags deploy (only on the side in which the collision occurs). 141 (**) Passenger Occupant Classification System: the passenger front and side air bags and the seat belt pretensioner are designed to deploy when the passenger occupant classification sensor detects a passenger sitting on the passenger's seat. Note: In a frontal offset collision, the equipped air bags and pretensioners may all deploy depending on the direction, angle, and rate of impact. SAFETY Warning!

Unapproved modifications or service procedures to the passenger seat assembly, its related components, seat cover, or cushion may inadvertently change the air bag deployment in case of a frontal collision. This could result in death or serious injury to the front passenger if the vehicle is involved in a collision. A modified vehicle may not comply with required Federal Motor Vehicle Safety Standards (FMVSS) and/or Canadian Motor Vehicle Safety Standards (CMVSS). If it is necessary to modify the air bag system for persons with disabilities, contact your authorized dealer.

Warning!

Deployed air bags and seat belt pretensioners cannot protect you in another collision. Have the air bags, seat belt pretensioners, and the seat belt retractor assemblies replaced by an authorized dealer immediately. Also, have the Occupant Restraint Controller System serviced as well.

Warning!

Ignoring the Air Bag Warning Light in your instrument panel could mean you won’t have the air bags to protect you in a collision. If the light does not come on as a bulb check when the ignition is first turned on, stays on after you start the vehicle, or if it comes on as you drive, have an authorized dealer service the air bag system immediately. Placing an object on the floor under the front passenger seat may prevent the occupant classification sensor from working properly, which may result in serious injury or death in a collision. Do not place any objects on the floor under the front passenger seat. If there is a fault present in the occupant classification sensor, both the Indicator Light and the Air Bag Warning Light will illuminate to show that the Passenger Advanced Front Air Bag is deactivated. Should this occur, the Passenger Advanced Front Air Bag will remain deactivated until the fault is cleared. This indicates that you should take the vehicle to an authorized dealer for service immediately.

142 Limitations To SRS Air Bag A In severe collisions such as those described in "SRS Air Bag Deployment Criteria" paragraph, the applicable SRS air bag equipment will deploy. However, in some accidents, the equipment may not deploy depending on the type of collision and its severity. Limitations To Front / Near Front Collision Detection 03040600-122-001 Front/near front collisions may not be B detected as severe enough to deploy Rear End Collision the SRS air bag equipment: Impacts involving trees or poles A. Frontal offset impact to the vehicle B. Rear-ending or running under a truck's tail gate.

03040600-121-001 Front/Near Front Collision

143 Limitations To Side Collision This system shuts off the passenger Detection front and side Air Bags and seat belt Side collisions may not be detected as pretensioner system, so make sure the severe enough to deploy the SRS air passenger Air Bag deactivation bag equipment: indicator light turns on. SAFETY The air bag/seat belt pretensioner Side impacts involving trees or poles system warning light flashes and the A. passenger Air Bag deactivation Side impacts with two-wheeled indicator light illuminates if the sensors vehicles B. have a possible malfunction. If this happens, the passenger front and side Roll-over. 03040600-124-002 Roll-Over Collision Air Bags and seat belt pretensioner system will not deploy. A Passenger Occupant Note: If a passenger is seated as Classification Sensor shown in the following figure the Your vehicle is equipped with a passenger occupant classification passenger occupant classification sensor cannot detect a passenger sensor as a part of the supplementary sitting on the passenger's seat correctly restraint system. This sensor is and the deployment/non-deployment of equipped in the passenger's seat the Air Bags cannot be controlled as cushion. This sensor measures the indicated in the passenger Air Bag electrostatic capacity of the deactivation indicator light on/off passenger's seat. condition chart. B The SRS unit is designed to prevent the passenger front and side Air Bags and seat belt pretensioner system from Warning! deploying if the passenger Air Bag deactivation indicator light turns on. To reduce the chance of injuries caused If a child restraint system, child, small by deployment of the passenger Air teenager or adult in the front passenger seat is seated improperly, the occupant Bag, the system deactivates the may provide an output signal to the passenger front and side Air Bags and occupant classification sensor that is 03040600-123-001 also the seat belt pretensioner system Side Collision different from the occupant’s properly when the passenger Air Bag seated weight input. This may result in deactivation indicator light turns on. serious injury or death in a collision.

144 Passenger Air Bag Deactivation Indicator Lights Warning! These indicator lights turn on to remind you that the passenger front and side Ignoring the Air Bag Warning Light in Air Bags and seat belt pretensioner will your instrument panel could mean you or will not deploy during a collision. won’t have the air bags to protect you in a collision. If the light does not come on as a bulb check when the ignition is first turned on, stays on after you start the vehicle, or if it comes on as you drive, have an authorized dealer service the air bag system immediately. Placing an object on the floor under the front passenger seat may prevent the occupant classification sensor from working properly, which may result in serious injury or death in a collision. Do not place any objects on the floor under the 06070400567567 front passenger seat. Passenger Air Bag Deactivated If there is a fault present in the occupant classification sensor, both the Indicator 03040702-12A-001 Warning! Light and the Air Bag Warning Light will Passenger Not Sitting Correct illuminate to show that the Passenger Advanced Front Air Bag is deactivated. If the Indicator Light remains illuminated Should this occur, the Passenger Warning! for an adult passenger, have an authorized Advanced Front Air Bag will remain dealer service the air bag system deactivated until the fault is cleared. This immediately. Failure to do so may cause indicates that you should take the vehicle Do not carry or hold any objects (e.g., serious injury or death. If the Indicator Light to an authorized dealer for service backpacks, boxes, etc.) while seated in the is illuminated with the words “PASS immediately. front passenger seat. Holding an object AIRBAG OFF,” the Passenger Advanced may provide an output signal to the Front Air Bag will not deploy in the event of occupant classification sensor that is a collision. different than the occupant’s properly seated weight input, which may result in serious injury or death in a collision.

145 Never place a rear-facing child restraint The passenger air bag deactivation If the passenger Air Bag in front of an air bag. A deploying indicator light may turn on for deactivation indicator light turns on passenger front air bag can cause death or 10 seconds if the electrostatic capacity when an occupant is seated directly in serious injury to a child 12 years or on the passenger seat changes. the passenger seat, have the younger, including a child in a rear-facing passenger readjust their posture by SAFETY The air bag/seat belt pretensioner child restraint. sitting with their feet on the floor, and system warning light might turn on if then refastening the seat belt. If the Only use a rear-facing child restraint in a the passenger seat receives a severe passenger Air Bag deactivation vehicle with a rear seat. impact. indicator light remains turned on, slide Children 12 years or younger should the passenger seat as far back as always ride buckled up in a vehicle with a If the passenger Air Bag rear seat. deactivation indicator light does not possible. Contact an authorized dealer turn on after installing a child restraint as soon as possible. Note: system on the passenger seat, first, reinstall your child restraint system Passenger Air Bag Deactivation The system requires about according to the procedure in this Indicator Light On/Off Condition 10 seconds to alternate between Owner Handbook. Then, if the Chart turning the passenger front and side passenger Air Bag deactivation OFF Air Bags and seat belt pretensioner indicator light still does not turn on, If the passenger occupant classification system on or off. contact an authorized dealer as soon sensor is normal, the indicator light as possible. turns on when the ignition is switched The passenger air bag deactivation ON. The light turns off after a few indicator light may turn on repeatedly if seconds. Then, the indicator light turns luggage or other items are put on the on or is off under the following passenger seat, or if the temperature conditions: of the vehicle's interior changes suddenly.

146 Condition Detected By The Passenger Air Bag Passenger Front And Side Air Passenger Seat Belt Passenger Occupant Deactivation Indicator Light Bags Pretensioner System Classification System Empty (Not occupied) On Deactivated Deactivated A child is seated in a child On Deactivated Deactivated restraint system (*) Adult (**) Off Ready Ready (*) The occupant classification sensor may not detect a child seated on the seat, in a child restraint system, or a junior seat depending on the child's physical size and seated posture. (**) If a smaller adult sits on the passenger seat, the sensors might detect the person as being a child depending on the person's physique. If the passenger air bag deactivation indicator light does not turn on when the ignition is switched ON and does not turn on as indicated in the passenger air bag deactivation indicator light on/off condition chart, do not allow an occupant to sit in the passenger seat and contact an authorized dealer as soon as possible. The system may not work properly in an accident.

Warning!

Never place a rear-facing child restraint in front of an air bag. A deploying passenger front air bag can cause death or serious injury to a child 12 years or younger, including a child in a rear-facing child restraint. Only use a rear-facing child restraint in a vehicle with a rear seat. Children 12 years or younger should always ride buckled up in a vehicle with a rear seat.

Warning!

No objects should be placed over or near the air bag on the instrument panel or steering wheel because any such objects could cause harm if the vehicle is in a collision severe enough to cause the air bag to inflate. Do not put anything on or around the air bag covers or attempt to open them manually. You may damage the air bags and you could be injured because the air bags may no longer be functional. The protective covers for the air bag cushions are designed to open only when the air bags are inflating. Relying on the air bags alone could lead to more severe injuries in a collision. The air bags work with your seat belt to restrain you properly. In some collisions, air bags won’t deploy at all. Always wear your seat belts even though you have air bags. 147 Maintaining Your Air Bag EVENT DATA Note: System RECORDER (EDR) EDR data are recorded by your This vehicle is equipped with an event vehicle only if a non-trivial crash or near Warning! data recorder (EDR). crash-like situation occurs; no data are SAFETY The main purpose of an EDR is to recorded by the EDR under normal record, in certain crash or near driving conditions and no personal Modifications to any part of the air bag crash-like situations, such as an air bag data (e.g., name, gender, age, and system could cause it to fail when you deployment or hitting a road obstacle, crash location) are recorded. However, need it. You could be injured if the air bag other parties, such as law system is not there to protect you. Do not data that will assist in understanding how a vehicle’s systems performed. enforcement, could combine the EDR modify the components or wiring, including data with the type of personally adding any kind of badges or stickers to The EDR is designed to record data the steering wheel hub trim cover or the related to vehicle dynamics and safety identifying data routinely acquired upper right side of the instrument panel. Do systems for a short period of time, during a crash investigation. not modify the front bumper, vehicle body typically 30 seconds or less. To read data recorded by an EDR, structure, or add aftermarket side steps or special equipment is required, and running boards. The EDR in this vehicle is designed to record such data as: access to the vehicle or the EDR is It is dangerous to try to repair any part needed. In addition to the vehicle of the air bag system yourself. Be sure to How various systems in your vehicle manufacturer, other parties, such as tell anyone who works on your vehicle that were operating. law enforcement, that have the special it has an air bag system. Whether or not the driver and equipment, can read the information if Do not attempt to modify any part of passenger safety belts were they have access to the vehicle or the your air bag system. The air bag may inflate buckled/fastened. EDR.FCA will not disclose any of the accidentally or may not function properly if data recorded in an EDR to a third party modifications are made. Take your vehicle How far (if at all) the driver was to an authorized dealer for any air bag pushing the accelerator and/or brake unless: system service. If your seat, including your pedal. A written agreement from the trim cover and cushion, needs to be How fast the vehicle was traveling. vehicle owner or the lessee is serviced in any way (including removal or obtained. loosening/tightening of seat attachment This data can help provide a better bolts), take the vehicle to your authorized understanding of the circumstances in Officially requested by the police or dealer. Only manufacturer approved seat which crashes and injuries occur. other law enforcement authorities. accessories may be used. If it is necessary to modify the air bag system for persons Used as a defense for FCA in a law with disabilities, contact your authorized suit, claim, or arbitration. dealer. Ordered by a judge or court.

148 However, if necessary, FCA will: Data Handling CONSTANT Use the data for research on FCA FCA and its subcontracting parties may MONITORING obtain and use the recorded data for vehicle performance, including safety. The following components of the Air vehicle malfunction diagnosis, research Bag systems are monitored by a Disclose the data or the and development, and quality diagnostic system: summarized data to a third party for improvement. research purposes without disclosing FCA will not disclose or provide any of Crash Sensors, And Diagnostic vehicle or owner identification the obtained data to a third party Module (Sas Unit) information. unless: Front Air Bag Sensors Recording Of Vehicle Data An agreement from the vehicle This vehicle is equipped with a Air Bag Modules owner (agreements from lessor and computer which records the following lessee for leased vehicle) is obtained. Side Crash Sensors main vehicle data related to vehicle controls, operation, and other driving Officially requested by the police or Air Bag/Seat Belt Pretensioner conditions. other law enforcement authorities. System Warning Light Recorded Data For statistical processing by a Seat Belt Buckle Switch Vehicle conditions such as engine research institution, after processing Seat Belt Pretensioners speed and vehicle speed. the data so that identification of the owner or the vehicle is impossible. Related Wiring Driving operation conditions such With Passenger Occupant as accelerator and brake pedals, and Classification System information related to the environmental circumstances while the Passenger Air Bag Deactivation vehicle is driven. Indicator Light Malfunction diagnosis information Passenger Occupant Classification from each on-vehicle computer. Sensor Information related to controls of Passenger Occupant Classification other on-vehicle computers. Module — If Equipped The recorded data may vary depending The diagnostic module continuously on the vehicle grade and optional monitors the system's readiness. This equipment. Voice and images are not begins when the ignition is switched recorded. ON and continues while the vehicle is being driven.

149 Enhanced Accident Response System In the event of an impact, if the communication network remains intact,

SAFETY and the power remains intact, depending on the nature of the event, the ORC will determine whether to have the Enhanced Accident Response System perform the following functions: Cut off fuel to the engine. Flash hazard lights as long as the battery has power or until the hazard light button is pressed. The hazard lights can be deactivated by pressing the hazard light button. Turn on the interior lights, which remain on as long as the battery has power. Unlock the power door locks. Enhanced Accident Response System Reset Procedure In order to reset the Enhanced Accident Response System functions after an event, the ignition switch must be changed from ignition START or ON/RUN to ignition OFF. Carefully check the vehicle for fuel leaks in the engine compartment and on the ground near the engine compartment and fuel tank before resetting the system and starting the engine.

150 STARTING AND OPERATING

STARTINGTHEENGINE...... 152 BRAKE SYSTEM ...... 153 MANUAL TRANSMISSION ...... 155 AUTOMATIC TRANSMISSION — IF EQUIPPED ...... 156 SPORT MODE ...... 161 SPEED CONTROL ...... 162 RADAR SENSORS — IF EQUIPPED ...... 164 REAR PARK ASSIST — IF EQUIPPED ...... 165 PARKVIEW REAR BACKUP CAMERA — IF EQUIPPED ...... 170 REFUELING THE VEHICLE ...... 175 VEHICLELOADING...... 179 TOWING TRAILERS ...... 180 DRIVING TIPS ...... 181

151 STARTING THE Never press the accelerator pedal for 4. Place the start button in the ON ENGINE starting the engine. mode, push and release it as soon as the engine starts. If the engine does not Models Equipped With A Starting The Engine start within 10 seconds, push the start Manual Transmission Before starting the engine, adjust the button to OFF mode and wait for seat, the interior rear view mirrors, and Proceed as follows: 10-15 seconds before repeating the starting procedure. the door mirrors, and fasten the seat 1. Engage the parking brake and place belt correctly. the gear selector in NEUTRAL. Cold Weather Operation 2. Place the start button in the ACC Regarding Cold Start Disable Warning! mode. When the ambient temperature is extremely low, the engine may not 3. Fully depress the clutch pedal crank even when the engine starting without touching the accelerator. When leaving the vehicle, always remove procedure is performed. At this time, the key fob from the vehicle and lock your 4. Place the start button in the ON the Cold Start Disable Indicator light in vehicle. mode, push and release it as soon as the instrument cluster flashes. However, Never leave children alone in a vehicle, the engine starts. If the engine does not this does not indicate a problem.

STARTING AND OPERATING or with access to an unlocked vehicle. start within 10 seconds, push the start Perform the necessary procedures (see Allowing children to be in a vehicle button to OFF mode and wait for “Warning lights And Messages” unattended is dangerous for a number of 10-15 seconds before repeating the paragraph in “Getting To Know Your reasons. A child or others could be starting procedure. Instrument Panel” chapter). seriously or fatally injured. Children should Models Equipped With Regarding Ice Breaker be warned not to touch the parking brake, When the ambient temperature is low, brake pedal or the transmission gear An Automatic selector. Transmission the start of cranking may be delayed after engine starting procedure is Do not leave the key fob in or near the Proceed as follows: performed. At this time, the Cold Start vehicle, or in a location accessible to 1. Engage the parking brake and place Disable Indicator light in the instrument children, and do not leave the ignition of a cluster illumintes. However, this does vehicle equipped with Advanced Keyless the gear selector to P (PARK) or N Entry in the ACC or ON/RUN mode. A child (NEUTRAL). not indicate a problem. could operate power windows, other Refer to your authorized dealer controls, or move the vehicle. 2. Fully depress the brake pedal regarding other related parts which are without touching the accelerator. Do not leave children or animals inside to be input such as function name, parked vehicles in hot weather. Interior heat 3. Place the start button in the ACC operating scenario (condition) of each build-up may cause serious injury or death. mode. function, indicator operation, and user operation/procedure information.

152 Extended Park Starting After Starting — BRAKE SYSTEM Warming Up The Engine Note: Extended Park condition occurs This vehicle has power-assisted brakes when the vehicle has not been started Proceed as follows: that adjust automatically through or driven for at least 30 days. normal use. Should power-assist fail, 1. Travel slowly, letting the engine run you can stop by applying greater force 1. Install a battery charger or jumper at a reduced RPM, without accelerating than normal to the brake pedal. But the cables to the battery to ensure a full suddenly. battery charge during the crank cycle. distance required to stop will be greater 2. It is recommended to wait until the than usual. 2. Place the ignition in the START digital engine coolant temperature Note: Always depress the brake pedal mode and release it when the engine indicator starts moving before with the right foot. Applying the brakes starts. demanding full performance. with the unaccustomed left foot could 3. If the engine fails to start within Stopping The Engine slow your reaction time to an 10 seconds, place the ignition in the emergency situation resulting in STOP (OFF/LOCK) mode, wait five Proceed as follows: insufficient braking operation. seconds to allow the starter to cool, 1. Park the car in a position that is not Do not drive with your foot held on the then repeat the Extended Park Starting dangerous for oncoming traffic, if clutch pedal or brake pedal, or hold the procedure. equipped with manual transmission clutch pedal depressed halfway place gear selector in FIRST (1st) or unnecessarily. Doing so could result in 4. If the engine fails to start after eight the following: attempts, allow the starter to cool for at REVERSE (R) gear, if equipped with least 10 minutes, then repeat the automatic transmission place the gear The clutch and brake parts will wear procedure. selector to PARK (P). out more quickly. 2. Push and release the ignition button The brakes can overheat and to STOP the engine. Caution! adversely affect brake performance.

To prevent damage to the starter, do not Warning! crank continuously for more than 10 seconds at a time. Wait 10 to 15 seconds before trying again. Riding the brakes can lead to brake failure and possibly a collision. Driving with your foot resting or riding on the brake pedal can result in abnormally high brake temperatures, excessive lining wear, and possible brake damage. You would not have your full braking capacity in an emergency. 153 Driving a vehicle with the “Brake Do not leave the key fob in or near the Warning Light” on is dangerous. A vehicle or in a location accessible to significant decrease in braking performance children. A child could operate power or vehicle stability during braking may windows, other controls, or move the occur. It will take you longer to stop the vehicle. vehicle or will make your vehicle harder to control. You could have a collision. Have Be sure the park brake is fully the vehicle checked immediately. disengaged before driving; failure to do so can lead to brake failure and a collision. Always fully apply the park brake when Caution! leaving your vehicle, or it may roll and

cause damage or injury. Also be certain to 05050102-12A-001AB leave a manual transmission in REVERSE Parking Brake Wear shoes appropriate for driving in order (R) or FIRST (1st) gear. Failure to do so may to avoid your shoe contacting the brake allow the vehicle to roll and cause damage 1 — Parking Brake Lever pedal when depressing the accelerator or injury. 2 — Parking Brake Release Button pedal. Setting the Parking Brake Warning Light

STARTING AND OPERATING Parking Brake Depress the brake pedal and then firmly The warning light turns on when the Note: Driving with the parking brake on pull the parking brake lever fully system has a malfunction. Refer to will cause excessive wear of the brake upwards with sufficient force to hold the “Warning Lights And Messages” in parts. vehicle in a stationary position. “Getting To Know Your Instrument Releasing the Parking Brake Panel” for further information. Warning! Depress the brake pedal and pull the Brake Pad Wear Indicator parking brake lever upwards, then When the disc brake pads become press the release button. While holding worn, the built-in wear indicators Never leave children alone in a vehicle, the button, lower the parking brake or with access to an unlocked vehicle. contact the rotors. This causes a lever all the way down to the released screeching noise to warn that the pads Allowing children to be in a vehicle position. should be replaced. When you hear this unattended is dangerous for a number of noise contact your authorized dealer as reasons. A child or others could be soon as possible. seriously or fatally injured. Children should be warned not to touch the park brake, brake pedal or the gear selector.

154 Brake Assist MANUAL During emergency braking situations TRANSMISSION when it is necessary to depress the Manual Transmission brake pedal with greater force, the brake assist system provides braking assistance, thus enhancing braking performance. When the brake pedal is Warning! depressed hard or depressed more quickly, the brakes apply more firmly. You or others could be injured if you leave Note: the vehicle unattended without having the park brake fully applied. The park brake 05987654-12A-001AB When the brake pedal is depressed should always be applied when the driver Gear Selector hard or depressed more quickly, the is not in the vehicle, especially on an pedal will feel softer but the brakes will incline. Depress the clutch pedal all the way apply more firmly. This is a normal down while shifting, then release it slowly. effect of the brake assist operation and Your vehicle is equipped with a device does not indicate a malfunction. Caution! to prevent shifting to REVERSE (R) by mistake. Push the gear selector When the brake pedal is depressed downward and shift to REVERSE (R). hard or depressed more quickly, a Never drive with your foot resting on the motor/pump operation noise may be A natural driving posture can be clutch pedal, or attempt to hold the vehicle achieved by lightly gripping the gear heard. This is a normal effect of the on a hill with the clutch pedal partially brake assist and does not indicate a selector from the side without having to engaged, as this will cause abnormal wear rest your elbow on the center console. malfunction. on the clutch. If shifting to REVERSE (R) is difficult, The brake assist equipment does shift back into neutral, release the not supersede the functionality of the To engage the gears, press the clutch clutch pedal, and try again. vehicle's main braking system. pedal fully and put the gear selector Note: A certain amount of noise from into the required position. The diagram the transmission is normal. This noise for gear engagement is shown on the can be most noticeable when the vehicle knob. is idling in NEUTRAL with the clutch engaged (clutch pedal released), but it may also be heard when driving. The noise may also be more noticeable when the transmission is warm. This noise is normal and is not an indication of a problem with your clutch or transmission. 155 With Parking Sensor System AUTOMATIC When leaving the vehicle, always make When the gear selector is shifted to the TRANSMISSION — IF sure the ignition is in the OFF mode, REVERSE (R) position with the ignition EQUIPPED remove the key fob from the vehicle, and placed in the ON mode, the parking lock the vehicle. Shift Interlock sensor system is activated an audible Never leave children alone in a vehicle, sound is heard. This vehicle is equipped with an or with access to an unlocked vehicle. interlock system that holds the Allowing children to be in a vehicle transmission gear selector in PARK (P) unattended is dangerous for a number of Caution! unless the brakes are applied. To shift reasons. A child or others could be the transmission out of PARK (P), the seriously or fatally injured. Children should be warned not to touch the parking brake, ignition must be placed in the ON/RUN Keep your foot off the clutch pedal brake pedal or the transmission gear except when shifting gears. Also, do not mode (engine running or not) and the selector. use the clutch to hold the vehicle on an hill brake pedal must be pressed. Do not leave the key fob in or near the or grade. Riding the clutch will cause vehicle (or in a location accessible to needless clutch wear and damage. Warning! children), and do not leave the ignition in Do not apply any excessive lateral force the ACC or ON/RUN mode. A child could to the gear selector when changing from operate power windows, other controls, or STARTING AND OPERATING fifth to fourth gear. This could lead to the It is dangerous to shift out of PARK or move the vehicle. accidental selection of second gear, which NEUTRAL if the engine speed is higher could result in damage to the transmission. than idle speed. If your foot is not firmly pressing the brake pedal, the vehicle could Make sure the vehicle comes to a Caution! accelerate quickly forward or in reverse. complete stop before shifting to REVERSE You could lose control of the vehicle and hit (R). Shifting to REVERSE (R) while the someone or something. Only shift into gear vehicle is still moving may damage the Damage to the transmission may occur if when the engine is idling normally and your transmission. the following precautions are not observed: foot is firmly pressing the brake pedal. Shift into or out of PARK or REVERSE Reverse can only be engaged when the Unintended movement of a vehicle only after the vehicle has come to a vehicle is completely stationary. With the could injure those in or near the vehicle. As complete stop. engine running, wait at least two seconds with all vehicles, you should never exit a with the clutch pedal fully pressed before vehicle while the engine is running. Before Do not shift between PARK, REVERSE, engaging reverse to prevent damage to the exiting a vehicle, always apply the park NEUTRAL, or DRIVE when the engine is gears. brake, shift the transmission into PARK, above idle speed. and turn the ignition OFF. When the ignition Before shifting into any gear, make sure is in the OFF mode, the transmission is your foot is firmly pressing the brake pedal. locked in PARK, securing the vehicle against unwanted movement. The gear selector must be in PARK (P) or NEUTRAL (N) to operate the starter. 156 The transmission gear selector has notice the engine speed going higher or PARK (P), REVERSE (R), NEUTRAL (N), hear the engine racing, confirm you Warning! DRIVE (D), and MANUAL (M)(+/–) shift have not accidentally slipped into positions. manual shift mode (refer to “Manual The transmission may be shifted freely Shift Mode” paragraph in this section). Never use the PARK position as a from REVERSE (R), to NEUTRAL (N), to Shift Position Indication substitute for the park brake. Always apply DRIVE (D), to MANUAL (M)(+/–). the park brake fully when parked to guard The gear selector position (PRNDM) is against vehicle movement and possible illuminated when the ignition is placed injury or damage. in the ON mode. Your vehicle could move and injure you Note: If one of the following actions is and others if it is not in PARK. Check by performed, the gear selector position is trying to move the gear selector out of displayed for five minutes even if the PARK with the brake pedal released. Make ignition is placed in a mode other than sure the transmission is in PARK before ON. leaving the vehicle. The ignition is placed in the OFF It is dangerous to shift out of PARK or mode. NEUTRAL if the engine speed is higher than idle speed. If your foot is not firmly The driver's door is opened. pressing the brake pedal, the vehicle could accelerate quickly forward or in reverse. Gear Position Indication You could lose control of the vehicle and hit In MANUAL (M) shift mode, the “M” of someone or something. Only shift into gear the shift position indication illuminates when the engine is idling normally and your and the number of the selected gear is foot is firmly pressing the brake pedal. displayed. Unintended movement of a vehicle could injure those in or near the vehicle. As Gear Selector Positions with all vehicles, you should never exit a PARK (P) vehicle while the engine is running. Before exiting a vehicle, always apply the park 05210200-LHD12AT-001AB PARK (P) locks the transmission and brake, shift the transmission into PARK, Gear Selector And Pattern prevents the driveshaft from rotating. and turn the ignition OFF. When the ignition Note: is in the OFF mode, the transmission is Even if you intend to use the locked in PARK, securing the vehicle automatic transmission functions as a against unwanted movement. traditional automatic, you should also be aware that you can inadvertently When leaving the vehicle, always make shift into manual shift mode and an sure the ignition is in the OFF mode, remove the key fob from the vehicle, and inappropriate gear may be retained as lock the vehicle. the vehicle speed increases. If you 157 Never leave children alone in a vehicle, REVERSE (R) DRIVE (D) or with access to an unlocked vehicle. This range is for moving the vehicle DRIVE (D) is the normal driving position. Allowing children to be in a vehicle backward. Shift into REVERSE only From a stop, the transmission will unattended is dangerous for a number of after the vehicle has come to a automatically shift through all available reasons. A child or others could be complete stop. gears. seriously or fatally injured. Children should be warned not to touch the park brake, With Parking Sensor system: when MANUAL (M) the gear selector is shifted to the brake pedal or the transmission gear MANUAL (M) is the manual shift mode REVERSE (R) position with the ignition selector. position. Gears can be shifted up or placed in the ON mode, the parking down by operating the gear selector. Do not leave the key fob in or near the sensor system is activated and an vehicle (or in a location accessible to (Refer to “Manual Shift Mode” audible sound is heard. children), and do not leave the ignition in paragraph in this section). the ACC or ON/RUN mode. A child could NEUTRAL (N) operate power windows, other controls, or move the vehicle. In NEUTRAL (N), the wheels and transmission are not locked. The vehicle Warning! will roll freely even on the slightest Caution! incline unless the parking brake or

STARTING AND OPERATING brakes are applied. Do not downshift for additional engine braking on a slippery surface. The drive Before moving the transmission gear wheels could lose their grip and the vehicle selector out of PARK, you must place the could skid, causing a collision or personal ignition from the LOCK/OFF mode to the Warning! injury. ON/RUN mode, and also press the brake pedal. Otherwise, damage to the gear selector could result. Do not coast in NEUTRAL and never turn Active Adaptive Shift off the ignition to coast down a hill. These (AAS) DO NOT race the engine when shifting are unsafe practices that limit your Active Adaptive Shift (AAS) from PARK or NEUTRAL into another gear response to changing traffic or road automatically controls the transmission range, as this can damage the drivetrain. conditions. You might lose control of the vehicle and have a collision. shift points to best suit the road Note: conditions and driver input. This improves driving feel. Shifting into PARK (P), NEUTRAL Note: Do not shift into NEUTRAL (N) The transmission may switch to AAS (N) or REVERSE (R) while the vehicle is when driving the vehicle. Doing so will mode when driving up and down moving can damage your damage the transmission. Press the slopes, cornering, driving at high transmission. parking brake or depress the brake elevations, or depressing the pedal before moving the gear selector Shifting into DRIVE (D) or REVERSE accelerator pedal quickly while the gear from NEUTRAL (N) to prevent the selector is in the DRIVE (D) position. (R) when the engine is running faster vehicle from moving unexpectedly. than idle can damage the transmission. 158 Depending on the road and driving Shift Lock Override For Some Models conditions/vehicle operations, gear If the gear selector will not move from Proceed as follows: shifting could be delayed or not occur, PARK (P) using the proper shift however, this does not indicate a 1. Push the lock release button on the procedure, continue to press the brake problem because the AAS mode will gear selector while also pushing down pedal and proceed as follows: maintain the optimum gear position. on the Shift Lock Override button. Shift-Lock System 1. Remove the shift lock override cover 2. Move the gear selector. using a cloth wrapped flat head The shift-lock system prevents shifting screwdriver. 3. Take the vehicle to your authorized out of PARK (P) unless the brake pedal dealer. is depressed. 2. Insert a screwdriver or similar tool into the Override Access Hole, and To shift from PARK (P): push the override button down. 1. Depress and hold the brake pedal. 2. Turn the ignition to the ON/RUN mode. 3. Press and hold the lock-release button on the gear selector. 4. Move the gear selector.

When the ignition is in the ACC or OFF 005210206-122-001 mode, the gear selector cannot be Shift Lock Override shifted from PARK (P). 05210206-12A-002 The ignition cannot be placed in the Shift Lock Override Access Hole OFF mode if the gear selector is not in PARK (P). 3. Push and hold the lock release button on the gear selector and move the gear selector. 4. Take the vehicle to your authorized dealer.

159 Manual Shift Mode Gear Position Indication Note: The manual shift mode gives you the The numeral for the selected gear If a requested downshift would feel of driving a manual transmission illuminates. cause the engine to over-speed, that vehicle by allowing you to operate the shift will not occur. gear selector manually. The system will ignore attempts to This allows you to control engine rpm upshift at too low of a vehicle speed. and torque to the drive wheels much like a manual transmission when more Do not drive the vehicle with the control is desired. tachometer needle in the red zone To change to MANUAL (M) shift mode, while in manual shift mode. shift the gear selector from DRIVE (D) to During deceleration, the MANUAL (M). To return to automatic transmission may automatically shift shift mode, shift the gear selector from down depending on vehicle speed. MANUAL (M) to DRIVE (D). 05210207-12A-002AB Instrument Panel You can start out, from a stop, in You can shift between DRIVE (D) and first or second gear. Tapping the gear MANUAL (M) mode at any time, without 1 — Manual Shift Mode Indication selector rearward (+) (at a stop) will STARTING AND OPERATING taking your foot off the accelerator. 2 — Gear Position Indication allow starting in second gear. Starting Note: out in second gear can be helpful in snowy or icy conditions. If you change to manual shift mode Manually Shifting Up/Down when the vehicle is stopped, the gear To shift up to a higher gear, tap the will shift to M1. gear selector rearward once (or tap the [+] shift paddle on the steering wheel, if If you change to manual shift mode equipped). while the vehicle is moving it will remain in the current gear until a manual shift To shift down to a lower gear, tap the request is made. gear selector forward once (or tap the [-] shift paddle on the steering wheel, if Indicators equipped). Manual Shift Mode Indication In manual shift mode, the “M” of the shift position indication in the instrument panel illuminates.

160 Paddle Mode — If While the gear selector is in the SPORT MODE Equipped MANUAL (M) position and the Dynamic Stability Control (DSC) is turned off, The Sport mode increases steering Tapping one of the steering manual shift mode does not switch to feedback to the driver with slight wheel-mounted shift paddles (+/-), if automatic shift mode even if the increase in effort and changes the equipped, while the gear selector is in accelerator pedal is completely transmission shift schedules for more DRIVE (D), will activate Paddle Mode (a pressed. Tap the gear selector forward aggressive shifting. This driving mode is temporary manual mode). The current or rearward to select the appropriate useful while driving on twisty roads gear will be displayed in the instrument gear. where more steering precision is cluster, with the "M" also illuminated. desired in spirited cornering. The transmission will revert back to Climbing steep grades from a stop To activate Sport mode, toggle the normal operation (if the gear selector To climb a steep grade from a stopped Sport Mode button forward and hold for remains in DRIVE) after a period of time, position: approximately 2 seconds. You will see depending on accelerator pedal activity. “Sport” illuminate in the Instrument 1. Press the brake pedal. Note: Because Paddle mode is only Panel cluster. temporary, use of the MANUAL (M) 2. Shift to DRIVE (D) or M1, depending position is recommended if you need to on the load weight and grade drive the vehicle in a particular gear for steepness. long periods. 3. Release the brake pedal while Driving Tips gradually accelerating. Overtaking Descending steep grades For extra power when passing another When descending a steep grade, shift vehicle or climbing steep grades, press to lower gears, depending on load the accelerator fully. The transmission weight and grade steepness. will shift to a lower gear, depending on Descend slowly, using the brakes only vehicle speed. 05210101-12A-001AB occasionally to prevent them from SPORT Button Note: overheating. The accelerator pedal may initially feel heavy as it is being pressed, then feel lighter as it is pressed further. This change in pedal force controls whether or not kickdown should be performed.

161 SPEED CONTROL Activation / Deactivation Speed Control Warning! Note: When the ignition is cycled OFF, the This is an electronically controlled system status before it was turned off is driving assistance feature that allows stored. For example, if the ignition is cycled Leaving the Speed Control system on the desired vehicle speed to be OFF while the Speed Control is operating, when not in use is dangerous. You could maintained, without having to press the the system will be operable when the accidentally set the system or cause it to accelerator pedal. ignition is cycled ON the next time. go faster than you want. You could lose control and have an accident. Always leave This feature can be used at a speed Activating Speed Control the system off when you are not using it. above 25 mph (40 km/h) on long stretches of dry, straight roads with few Push the ON button located on the variations (e.g. motorways). right side of the steering wheel with the Deactivating Speed Control other Speed Control buttons. The It is therefore not recommended to use Push the OFF/CAN button. The warning light (amber) in the instrument warning light (amber) in the this feature on city roads with traffic. Do cluster will illuminate. not use it in town. instrument cluster turns off. When A Speed Has Been Set: the warning light (green) in the STARTING AND OPERATING Warning! instrument cluster is illuminated, push and hold the OFF/CAN button or push the OFF/CAN button twice to Do not use Speed Control under the deactivate. following conditions: When A Speed Has Not Been Set: hilly terrain the warning light (amber) in the instrument cluster is illuminated, push steep inclines the OFF/CAN button to deactivate. heavy or unsteady traffic Setting A Desired Speed slippery or winding roads Proceed as follows: similar restrictions that require inconsistent speed 1. Activate the Speed Control device Using the Speed Control under the by pushing the ON button. The cruise following conditions is dangerous and warning light (amber) illuminates. could result in loss of vehicle control. 2. Accelerate to the desired speed, whichmustbemorethan25mph (40 km/h). 05100101-877-877AB Speed Control Buttons 162 3. Set the Speed Control by pushing On a steep grade, the vehicle may If the instrument cluster display for the SET (-) button at the desired speed. momentarily slow down while vehicle speed is indicated in km/h: The Speed Control is set at the ascending, or speed up while speed will increase in 1 km/h moment the SET (-) button is pushed. descending. increments. Release the accelerator pedal The Speed Control will cancel if the To increase speed using simultaneously. The warning light vehicle speed decreases below accelerator pedal: (green) illuminates. 16 mph (25 km/h) when climbing a Press the accelerator pedal to Note: The Speed Control setting steep incline. accelerate to the desired speed. cannot be performed under the following conditions: The Speed Control may cancel at Push the SET (-) button and release it about 9 mph (15 km/h) below the immediately. This new set speed will be Automatic Transmission: the preset speed such as when climbing a saved. gear selector is in the PARK or long, steep incline. NEUTRAL position. Note: Accelerate the vehicle to speed The vehicle’s set speed is displayed in up temporarily with the accelerator Manual Transmission: the gear the instrument cluster. pedal when the Speed Control is on. selector is in the NEUTRAL position or Increasing Speed Increasing the speed will not interfere when the clutch is disengaged (clutch with, or change the set speed. Take is depressed). To increase speed using the Speed your foot off the accelerator to return to Control buttons: The parking brake is applied. the set speed. Release the SET (-) button at the Push the RES (+) button and hold it, Decreasing Speed desired speed, otherwise the speed will your vehicle will accelerate. Release the To decrease speed using the Speed continue decreasing while the SET (-) button at the desired speed. Control buttons: button is pushed and held (except when the accelerator pedal is Push the RES (+) button and release Push the SET (-) button and hold it, depressed). it immediately, to adjust the set speed. the vehicle will gradually slow down. Multiple pushes of the button will Note: Release the button at the desired increase the set speed according to the speed. Release the SET (-) button at the number of times it is pushed. desired speed, otherwise the speed Increasing speed with a single RES Push the SET (-) button and release will continue decreasing while the SET (+) button operation: it immediately to adjust the set speed. (-) button is pushed and held (except Multiple button pushes will decrease when the accelerator pedal is If the instrument cluster display for the set speed according to the number vehicle speed is indicated in mph: depressed). of times it is pushed. speed will increase in 1 mph increments.

163 Decreasing speed with a single SET To temporarily cancel the system, use RADAR SENSORS — (-) button operation: one of these methods: IF EQUIPPED If the instrument cluster display for Slightly press the brake pedal. Rear Radar Sensors vehicle speed is indicated in mph: the Press the clutch pedal (if equipped speed will decrease in 1 mph increments. The following systems use the rear with a manual transmission). radar sensors: If the instrument cluster display for Push OFF/CAN button. vehicle speed is indicated in km/h: the Blind Spot Monitoring System (BSM) If the RES (+) button is pushed when speed will decrease in 1 km/h increments. Rear Cross Traffic Alert (RCTA) the vehicle speed is 25 mph (40 km/h) Resume Speed or higher, the system reverts to the The radar sensors function by detecting previously set speed. the radio waves reflected off of a vehicle If any other method besides the approaching from the rear, or an Note: If any of the following conditions OFF/CAN button was used to cancel obstruction, sent from the radar sensor. cruising speed (such as applying the occur, the Speed Control system is brake pedal or pressing in the clutch temporarily canceled: The radar sensors are installed inside the rear bumper, one each on the left pedal) and the system is still activated, The parking brake is applied. the most recent set speed will and right sides. Automatic Transmission: the STARTING AND OPERATING automatically resume when the RES (+) button is pushed. gear selector is in the PARK or If vehicle speed is below 25 mph NEUTRAL position. (40 km/h), increase the vehicle speed Manual Transmission: the gear up to 16 mph (25 km/h) or more and selector is in the NEUTRAL position. push RES (+) button. Automatic Transmission: the Temporarily Canceling Speed Control cannot be canceled The System while driving in manual mode (gear selector shifted from D to M position). Therefore, engine braking will not be 07080915112112 Warning! applied even if the transmission is Radar Sensor Locations shifted down to a lower gear. If deceleration is required, lower the set Always keep the surface of the rear Leaving the Speed Control system on speed or press the brake pedal. bumper near the radar sensors clean so when not in use is dangerous. You could When the Speed Control system is that the radar sensors operate normally. accidentally set the system or cause it to temporarily canceled, the speed cannot Also, do not apply items such as go faster than you want. You could lose stickers. control and have an accident. Always leave be reset. the system OFF when you are not using it. 164 Vehicles are shipped with the direction REAR PARK ASSIST of the radar sensors adjusted for each Caution! — IF EQUIPPED vehicle to a loaded vehicle condition so that the radar sensors detect Rear Park Assist If the rear bumper receives a severe approaching vehicles correctly. If the direction of the radar sensors has impact, the system may no longer operate Warning! normally. Stop the system immediately and changed, contact your authorized contact your authorized dealer. dealer. The radar sensors are regulated by the Do not rely completely on the parking The detection ability of the radar relevant radio wave laws of the country sensor system and be sure to confirm the sensors has limitations. In the following in which the vehicle is driven. If the safety around your vehicle visually when cases, the detection ability may be vehicle is driven abroad, authorization driving. This system can assist the driver in from the country in which the vehicle is operating the vehicle in the forward and decreased, and the system may not backward directions while parking. The operate normally: driven may be required. detection ranges of the sensors are limited, The rear bumper near the radar Note: therefore, driving the vehicle while relying sensors has been damaged. only on the system may cause an accident. For repairs or replacement of the Always confirm the safety around your Snow, ice or mud has adhered to the radar sensors, bumper repairs, paint vehicle visually when driving. radar sensors on the rear bumper. work, or replacement near the radar Parking and other potentially dangerous sensors, consult your authorized Operating in weather conditions such maneuvers are, however, always the dealer. as rain, snow and fog. driver’s responsibility. When performing these operations, always make sure that Note: Under the following conditions, Turn off the radar system when there are no other people (especially the radar sensors cannot detect objects pulling a trailer or while an accessory, children) or animals on the route you want or it may be difficult to detect them: such as a bicycle carrier, is installed to to drive into. The parking sensors are an the rear of the vehicle. Otherwise, the aid for the driver, but the driver must never Stationary objects on a road or a radio waves emitted by the radar will allow their attention to lapse during road side such as small, two-wheeled be blocked causing the system to not potentially dangerous maneuvers, even vehicles, bicycles, pedestrians, operate normally. those executed at low speeds. animals, and shopping carts. Vehicle shapes which do not reflect radar waves well such as empty trailers with a low vehicle height and sports cars.

165 The Rear Park Assist System uses four Depending on the type of Anything which generates ultrasonic sensors (two rear sensors obstruction and the surrounding ultrasound is near the vehicle, such as and two rear corner sensors) to detect conditions, the detection range of a another vehicle's horn, the engine obstructions around the vehicle while sensor may narrow, or the sensors sound of a motorcycle, the air brakes parking the vehicle in a garage or may not be able to detect of a large-sized vehicle, or another during parallel parking when the gear obstructions. vehicle's sensors. selector is in REVERSE. The system may not operate The vehicle is driven in heavy rain or The system is equipped with an assist normally under the following in road conditions causing water device to notify the driver of the conditions: splash. approximate distance from the vehicle to the surrounding obstruction using a Mud, ice, or snow adhered to the A antenna for a radio transmitter is audible alert. sensor area (operation will return to installed to the vehicle. normal when removed). The vehicle is moving towards a tall The sensor area is frozen (operation or square curbstone. will return to normal when the ice is An obstruction is too close to the thawed). sensor.

STARTING AND OPERATING The sensor is covered by a hand or The following types of obstructions excessive force has been applied to may not be detected: the bumper. Thin objects such as wire or rope. The vehicle is on a steep incline. Things which absorb sonic waves Under extremely hot or cold easily such as rain or snow. 05200100-121-001AB weather conditions. Parking Sensor Locations Angular shaped objects. The vehicle is driven on bumps, Note: inclines, gravel, or grass covered Very tall objects, and those which Do not install any accessories within roads. are wide at the top. the detection ranges of the sensors. It Small, short objects. may affect the system operation.

166 Obstructions under the bumper When installing a trailer hitch, Sensor Detection Range may not be detected. Obstructions contact your authorized dealer. The sensors detect obstructions within that are lower than the bumper or thin the following range: which may have been initially detected but are no longer detected as the Caution! Lateral Detection Range: vehicle approaches more closely. 19 inches (50 cm) Always have the system inspected Only have repairs on the bumper in the Rear Detection Range: 59 inches by your authorized dealer if any force is area of the sensors carried out by your (150 cm) applied to the bumpers, even in a authorized dealer. Repairs on the bumper System Operation minor accident. If the sensors have that are not carried out properly may been repositioned in any way, they compromise the operation of the parking The system is operational when the cannot detect obstructions. sensors. ignition is cycled ON and the gear selector is shifted to REVERSE. When The system may have a malfunction Only have the bumpers repainted or any retouches to the paint work in the area of an audible signal sounds, the system is if the audible signal does not operate. the sensors carried out by your authorized enabled for use. Contact your authorized dealer. dealer. Incorrect paint application could The beeper which indicates a affect the operation of the parking sensors. system malfunction may not be heard if the ambient temperature is extremely cold, or mud, ice, or snow adheres to the sensor area. Remove any foreign material from the sensor area.

167 Parking Sensor Audible Alert The audible alert will sound while the system is operating according to the following chart: Rear Sensor

Distance Between Vehicle And Distance Detection Area Audible Alert (*) Obstruction Farthest distance Approx. 59 - 23 inches (150 cm - 60 cm) Slow intermittent sound Far distance Approx. 23 -17 inches (60 - 45 cm) Medium intermittent sound Middle distance Approx. 17 -13 inches (45 - 35 cm) Fast intermittent sound Close distance Within approx. 13 inches (35 cm) Continuous sound (*) The rate at which the intermittent audible alert increases as the vehicle approaches the obstruction. Rear Corner Sensor

Distance Between Vehicle And STARTING AND OPERATING Distance Detection Area Audible Alert (**) Obstruction Far distance Approx. 19 - 14 inches (50 - 38 cm) Medium intermittent sound Middle distance Approx. 14 - 9.8 inches (38 - 25 cm) Fast intermittent sound Close distance Within approx. 9.8 inches (25 cm) Continuous sound (**) The rate at which the intermittent audible alert increases as the vehicle approaches the obstruction. Note: If an obstruction is detected in a zone for six seconds or more, the audible alert stops, unless the obstruction is within the close distance zone. If the same obstruction is detected in another zone, the corresponding audible alert is heard.

168 When A Warning Alert Is Activated The system notifies the driver of an obstacle by activating the audible alert.

Beep How To Check The system may have a malfunction. Contact your authorized dealer as soon as The audible alert is not heard. possible. When the engine is cycled ON, or if the parking sensor Remove any foreign material from the sensor area. If the system continues to sound detects a problem while driving, an intermittent audible the audible alert, contact your authorized dealer as soon as possible. alert is heard one to four times(*). ( * ) The number of times the audible alert is heard changes depending on the malfunction location.

169 PARKVIEW REAR When the display is cold, the images When snow chains are mounted or the BACKUP CAMERA — could be more blurred than usual, temporary space saver spare wheel is IF EQUIPPED making it difficult to check the fitted. conditions of the area around the Operation vehicle. Always use extreme caution and The rear trunk is not completely closed. The camera is located on the trunk lid, verify the real conditions of the area The vehicle is on a sloping road. above the license plate. behind the vehicle with you own eyes. Using the rear-view monitor under the If water, snow, or mud is deposited conditions listed above is dangerous and can on the camera lens, clean it with a soft cause damage to persons and/or the vehicle. cloth. If this does not clean it, use a mild detergent. Caution! If the camera is subjected to abrupt temperature changes (from hot to cold or vice versa), the rear-view monitor Do not apply excessive force to the may not work properly. camera. You could alter the position and When replacing tires, contact an angle of the camera. Do not disassemble,

STARTING AND OPERATING modify or remove it as this could authorized dealer. Replacing the tires compromise the seal. 07040110-124-008AB can cause the guide lines that appear Rear Camera Location on the display to be misaligned. The camera’s cover is made of plastic. Switching The Display To Rear View Do not apply degreasers, organic solvents, Camera Mode: wax or glass polish to the camera’s cover. If some substance ends up on the cover, Place the gear selector in the REVERSE Warning! clean it off immediately with a soft cloth. position, after the ignition is cycled ON, to switch the display to rear-view Do not rub the cover too much, nor camera mode. Always use extreme caution and verify the polish it with abrasive compounds or hard real conditions of the area behind the vehicle. brushes. The cover could be damaged and Note: Backing up while looking only at the screen is create image problems. dangerous and can lead to an accident or When the gear selector is moved If the vehicle has been involved in a collision with an object. The rear-view frontal, lateral or rear collision, the rear from the REVERSE position and put in monitor is simply a system to aid reversing. any other position, the screen returns parking camera’s alignment (location or The view on the display can show a situation installation angle) may have been altered. to the previous display mode. that differs from the real one. Contact a authorized dealer. Do not use the rear-view monitor under When parking in REVERSE, take If the display shows "no video signal", the following conditions: care over obstacles that may be above there may be a problem with the camera. or under the camera’s display range. Roads covered in ice or snow. Contact your authorized dealer. 170 Display Note: If it is difficult to see the display Note: The images on the display can under the following conditions, it does show a situation that differs from the not mean that there is a malfunction: actual view. In dark areas. When the temperature around the lens is particularly high or low. When the camera is wet from rain or due to a high atmospheric humidity. When there is some foreign deposit around the camera, such as mud. When the camera lens reflects sunlight or a headlight beam.

07080913987987 The image on the display may be Camera View delayed if the temperature around the 1 — Blocked Area camera is low. 2 — Rear Bumper Caution! The field of view varies depending on 07080913988988 the vehicle and the road conditions. The Camera Field Of View To avoid vehicle damage, ParkView field of view is limited. Objects below The distance displayed by the camera the bumper or around it’s sides may not should only be used as a parking aid. The view differs from the actual view, as the ParkView camera is unable to view every be displayed. rear parking camera is equipped with a obstacle or object in your drive path. special lens. To avoid vehicle damage, the vehicle The camera could capture any must be driven slowly when using ParkView non-standard accessories installed on to be able to stop in time when an obstacle the vehicle. Do not install non-standard is seen. It is recommended that the driver accessories that could interfere with the look frequently over his/her shoulder when camera’s view, such as lights or using ParkView. reflectors.

171 Looking At The Display The vehicle width guide lines are Warning! displayed on the screen as a reference to show the width of the vehicle compared to the width of the parking Drivers must be careful when backing up space to be entered while in REVERSE. even when using the ParkView Rear Back Up Camera. Always check carefully behind Vehicle Width Guide Lines: these your vehicle, and be sure to check for guide lines serve as a reference pedestrians, animals, other vehicles, showing the width of the vehicle. obstructions, or blind spots before backing up. You are responsible for the safety of Distance Guide Lines: these lines your surroundings and must continue to indicate the approximate distance from pay attention while backing up. Failure to the rear of the vehicle (the rear edge of do so can result in serious injury or death. the bumper). The red and yellow lines indicates the points at about 19 inches Rear View Camera (50 cm), for the red line and 39 inches Operation (1 m) for the yellow line, from the rear STARTING AND OPERATING bumper (central point of each line). The operating modes of the rear view camera when the vehicle is in REVERSE vary depending on traffic, road, and vehicle conditions. Also, the 07080913989989 amount of turning and the duration of Entering Parking Spot the maneuver vary depending on the conditions. Therefore, it is important to A — Rear Camera View check the surrounding conditions and B — Check Surrounding Area adapt the steering as necessary. Note: The images from the rear 3. Once the vehicle starts to enter the parking camera shown on the monitor parking space, proceed slowly in are reversed (mirror image). REVERSE while keeping the vehicle 07080913-111-111 width guide lines away from the two 1. Place the gear selector in the Vehicle Width Guide Lines sides of the parking space. REVERSE position to switch the display to rear view camera mode. 4. Continue to adjust the steering wheel until the vehicle width guide lines 2. Check the surrounding conditions are parallel with the two sides of the and begin backing up. parking space. 172 5. Once the guide lines are parallel, 6. When the gear selector is moved Road Conditions And straighten the steering wheel and from the REVERSE position and put in Displayed Image reverse slowly into the parking space. any other position, the screen returns to There are some differences between Continue to check the vehicle’s the previous display mode. what is shown on the display, and the surroundings and stop in the best actual road conditions. position possible (if the parking space Note: has dividing lines, check that the vehicle Since there may be some The different perceptions of distance width guide lines are parallel with them). differences between the displayed could lead to an accident. The image and the real conditions, always conditions that can lead to the different visually inspect the area behind the perceptions of distance, listed below, vehicle, and the surrounding areas, to must be taken into consideration: make sure they are completely clear. When The Vehicle Slopes Due To In the image of the parking space The Weight Of Passengers And (or garage) shown above, the rear of Load: the vehicle and the distance guide lines When the vehicle is rear heavy, the may seem parallel on the monitor, but object on the screen seems to be may not be when the parked vehicle is further away than it really is. inspected. When you enter a parking space with a dividing line only on one side, the dividing line and the vehicle width guide lines may appear parallel on the monitor, but may not be when the parked vehicle is inspected.

07080913991991 07080913990990 Entering Parking Spot Loaded Vehicle Camera Angle A — Rear Camera View 1 — Object B — Check Surrounding Area 2 — Variance

173 When The Road Behind The Vehicle Slopes Steeply: When the vehicle is on a steep uphill (downhill) slope, the object on the screen seems to be further away than it really is.

07080913993993 Downgrade Camera Angle 1 — Distance Between The Vehicle And Object Displayed On The Screen 2 — Actual Distance Between The Ve- hicle And Object

STARTING AND OPERATING 07080913992992 3 — Appears Closer Than Actual Di- Downhill Camera Angle stance 4 — Object On Screen 1 — Distance Between The Vehicle And 5 — Object At Actual Position Object Displayed On The Screen 07080913994994 2 — Actual Distance Between The Ve- Three-Dimensional Object Camera hicle And Object Three Dimensional Object Behind View The Vehicle: 3 — Appears Farther Than Actual Di- A—ObjectInView stance Since the distance guide line display is B — Actual Distance To Object 4 — Object At Actual Position based on a flat surface, the distance to C — Appears Farther Than Actual 5 — Object On Screen a three dimensional object on the screen differs from the actual distance.

174 Adjusting The Image REFUELING THE Quality VEHICLE The image quality can be adjusted with Refueling The Vehicle the gear selector in the REVERSE position. Stop the engine before refueling. Four adjustments can be made: Fuel Requirements brightness, contrast, tint and color. Give Vehicles with catalytic converters or attention to the vehicle’s surroundings oxygen sensors must use ONLY while making adjustments: UNLEADED FUEL, which will reduce 1. Select the icon on the top left of the exhaust emissions and keep spark plug screen to display the tabs. fouling to a minimum. 07080914-111-111 Fuel: Premium unleaded fuel. Image Quality Adjustments 2. Select the desired tab. Octane Rating 3. Use the cursor to adjust the (Anti-knock index): 91 brightness, contrast, tint and color. If a Warning! (R + M)/2 method or reset is needed, press the reset button. above (96 RON or above) (U.S. federal 4. Select the icon on the top left of the Adjusting the rear-view camera image law requires that screen to close the tabs. quality must always be done when the octane ratings be vehicle is stationary. Do not adjust the posted on gasoline station pumps). rear-view camera image quality while Regular unleaded fuel with an octane vehicle driving. Adjusting the image quality (brightness, contrast, color and tint) of the rating from 87 to 90 (91 to 95 RON) can rear-view camera while driving the vehicle be used, but this will reduce is dangerous since it could distract the performance slightly, such as reduced driver and cause a serious accident. engine output, and engine knocking. Fuel with a rating lower than 87 octane (91 RON) will negatively affect the emission control system performance and could also cause engine knocking and serious engine damage.

175 While operating on gasoline with an Reformulated Gasoline or gasoline containing methanol are not octane number of 87, hearing a light the responsibility of the manufacturer and Many areas of the country require the knocking sound from the engine is not may void or not be covered under New use of cleaner burning gasoline referred a cause for concern. However, if the Vehicle Limited Warranty. to as “Reformulated Gasoline”. engine is heard making a heavy Reformulated gasoline contains Do Not Use E-85 In knocking sound, see your authorized oxygenates and are specifically blended Non-Flex Fuel Vehicles dealer immediately. Use of gasoline with to reduce vehicle emissions and improve an octane number lower than 87 can Non-Flex Fuel Vehicles (FFV) are air quality. cause engine failure and may void or compatible with gasoline containing up not be covered by the New Vehicle The use of reformulated gasoline is to 15% ethanol (E-15). Use of gasoline Limited Warranty. Poor quality gasoline recommended. Properly blended with higher ethanol content may void can cause problems such as hard reformulated gasoline will provide the New Vehicle Limited Warranty. improved performance and durability of starting, stalling, and hesitations. If you If a Non-FFV vehicle is inadvertently engine and fuel system components. experience these symptoms, try fueled with E-85 fuel, the engine will another brand of gasoline before Gasoline/Oxygenate have some or all of these symptoms: considering service for the vehicle. Blends Operate in a lean mode. Gasoline blended with oxygenates such Some fuel suppliers blend unleaded STARTING AND OPERATING as alcohol or ether compounds are OBD II “Malfunction Indicator Light” gasoline with oxygenates such as generally referred to as oxygenated on. ethanol. fuels. Poor engine performance. The common gasoline blend that can be used with your vehicle is ethanol Caution! Poor cold start and cold drivability. blended at no more than 15%. Gasoline Increased risk for fuel system containing alcohol, such as ethanol or component corrosion. methanol, may be marketed under the DO NOT use E-85, gasoline containing name "Gasohol". methanol, or gasoline containing more than MMT In Gasoline 15% ethanol (E-15). Use of these blends Vehicle damage and problems resulting may result in starting and drivability Methylcyclopentadienyl Manganese from the use of the following may not problems, damage critical fuel system Tricarbonyl (MMT) is a manganese- be covered by the New Vehicle Limited components, cause emissions to exceed containing metallic additive that is Warranty: the applicable standard, and/or cause the blended into some gasoline to increase “Malfunction Indicator Light” to illuminate. octane. Gasoline blended with MMT Alcohol containing more than 15% Please observe pump labels as they should ethanol. provides no performance advantage clearly communicate if a fuel contains beyond gasoline of the same octane greater than 15% ethanol (E-15). Gasoline or alcohol containing number without MMT. Gasoline blended methanol. with MMT reduces spark plug life and Leaded fuel or leaded alcohol. Problems that result from using gasoline reduces emissions system performance containing more than 15% ethanol (E-15) 176 in some vehicles. The manufacturer Fuel System Cautions Carbon Monoxide recommends that gasoline without MMT Warnings be used in your vehicle. The MMT content of gasoline may not be indicated Caution! on the gasoline pump; therefore, you Warning! should ask your gasoline retailer whether Follow these guidelines to maintain your the gasoline contains MMT. MMT is vehicle’s performance: Carbon monoxide (CO) in exhaust gases is prohibited in Federal and California The use of leaded gasoline is prohibited deadly. Follow the precautions below to reformulated gasoline. by Federal law. Using leaded gasoline can prevent carbon monoxide poisoning: Materials Added To Fuel impair engine performance and damage Do not inhale exhaust gases. They the emissions control system. contain carbon monoxide, a colorless and Besides using unleaded gasoline with odorless gas, which can kill. Never run the the proper octane rating, gasolines that An out-of-tune engine or certain fuel or engine in a closed area, such as a garage, ignition malfunctions can cause the contain detergents, corrosion and and never sit in a parked vehicle with the catalytic converter to overheat. If you notice engine running for an extended period. If stability additives are recommended. a pungent burning odor or some light Using gasolines that have these the vehicle is stopped in an open area with smoke, your engine may be out of tune or the engine running for more than a short additives will help improve fuel malfunctioning and may require immediate period, adjust the ventilation system to economy, reduce emissions, and service. Contact your authorized dealer for force fresh, outside air into the vehicle. maintain vehicle performance. service assistance. Guard against carbon monoxide with Designated TOP TIER The use of fuel additives, which are now proper maintenance. Have the exhaust Detergent Gasoline being sold as octane enhancers, is not system inspected every time the vehicle is contains a higher level recommended. Most of these products raised. Have any abnormal conditions of detergents to further contain high concentrations of methanol. repaired promptly. Until repaired, drive with aide in minimizing Fuel system damage or vehicle all side windows fully open. engine and fuel system performance problems resulting from the deposits. When use of such fuels or additives is not the responsibility of the manufacturer and may Refueling Procedure available, the usage of Top Tier void or not be covered under the New Detergent gasoline is recommended. Vehicle Limited Warranty. Fuel Filler Door Visit www.toptiergas.com for a list of Note: Always use only a designated TOP TIER Detergent Gasoline Retailers. FCA fuel filler cap or an approved Note: Intentional tampering with the Indiscriminate use of fuel system equivalent, available at your authorized emissions control system can result in cleaning agents should be avoided. dealer. The wrong cap can result in a civil penalties being assessed against Many of these materials intended for serious malfunction of the fuel and you. gum and varnish removal may contain emission control systems. active solvents or similar ingredients. These can harm fuel system gasket and diaphragm materials. 177 When the fuel filler door end is pressed Do not use a mobile phone near the with the doors unlocked, the fuel filler refueling pump: risk of fire. door rises. Emergency Fuel Filler Door Release If the battery is discharged, the fuel filler door cannot be opened. In this case, the fuel filler door can be opened by taking care of the discharged battery situation. If the fuel filler door cannot be opened 04040202-12A-001AB Fuel Filler Cap even if the discharged battery situation has been resolved, the electrical system To close the fuel filler cap, turn it may have a malfunction. 04040201-12A-002AB clockwise until a click is heard. Fuel Filler Door In this case, the fuel filler door can be opened using the following procedure The fuel filler door operates in as an emergency measure:

STARTING AND OPERATING conjunction with the door Warning! locking/unlocking mechanism. 1. Open the trunk and pull the center section of the plastic fastener and To close, press the fuel filler door until a remove the fastener. click sound is heard. Never have any smoking materials lit in or near the vehicle when the gas cap is Note: removed or the tank is being filled. Make sure to lock both the doors Never add fuel when the engine is when leaving the vehicle. running. This is in violation of most state and federal fire regulations and may cause Lock the doors after closing the fuel the MIL to turn on. filler door. If the fuel filler door is closed A fire may result if gasoline is pumped after locking the doors, the fuel filler into a portable container that is inside of a door cannot be locked. vehicle. You could be burned. Always place Fuel Filler Cap gas containers on the ground while filling.

To remove the fuel filler cap, turn it Do not apply any object/plug to the end 08100100-121-002 counterclockwise. Attach the removed of the filler which is not provided for the Trunk Interior cap to the inner side of the fuel filler vehicle. The use of non-compliant objects/plugs could cause a pressure 1 — Plastic Fasteners door. increase inside the tank, resulting in 2 — Cover dangerous situations. 178 2. Partially peel back the cover inside VEHICLE LOADING Gross Axle Weight Rating the trunk, then pull the emergency (GAWR) release lever. Certification Label As required by National Highway Traffic The GAWR is the maximum permissible Safety Administration regulations, your load on the front and rear axles. The vehicle has a certification label affixed to load must be distributed in the cargo the driver's side door or pillar. area so that the GAWR of each axle is This label contains the month and year not exceeded. of manufacture, Gross Vehicle Weight Each axle GAWR is determined by the Rating (GVWR), Gross Axle Weight components in the system with the Rating (GAWR) front and rear, and lowest load carrying capacity (axle, Vehicle Identification Number (VIN). A springs, tires or wheels). Heavier axles Month-Day-Hour (MDH) number is or suspension components sometimes included on this label and indicates the specified by purchasers for increased 08100100-122-001 durability does not necessarily increase Fuel Door Emergency Release Month, Day and Hour of manufacture. The bar code that appears on the the vehicle's GVWR. 3 — Emergency Release Lever bottom of the label is your VIN. Tire Size Gross Vehicle Weight Rating The tire size on the Vehicle Certification (GVWR) Label represents the actual tire size on The GVWR is the total permissible your vehicle. Replacement tires must be weight of your vehicle including driver, equal to the load capacity of this tire passengers, vehicle, options and cargo. size. The label also specifies maximum Rim Size capacities of front and rear axle systems (GAWR). Total load must be This is the rim size that is appropriate limited so GVWR and front and rear for the tire size listed. GAWR are not exceeded. Inflation Pressure Payload This is the cold tire inflation pressure for The payload of a vehicle is defined as your vehicle for all loading conditions up the allowable load weight a truck can to full GAWR. carry, including the weight of the driver, all passengers, options and cargo.

179 Curb Weight may show that the GAWR of either the TOWING TRAILERS front or rear axles has been exceeded The curb weight of a vehicle is defined but the total load is within the specified Trailer Towing as the total weight of the vehicle with all GVWR. If so, weight must be shifted Your car is not designed for towing. fluids, including vehicle fuel, at full from front to rear or rear to front as capacity conditions, and with no appropriate until the specified weight Recreational Towing occupants or cargo loaded into the limitations are met. Store the heavier An example of "recreational towing" is vehicle. The front and rear curb weight items down low and be sure that the towing your vehicle behind a values are determined by weighing your weight is distributed equally. Stow all motorhome. vehicle on a commercial scale before loose items securely before driving. The transmission is not designed for any occupants or cargo are added. Improper weight distributions can have towing this vehicle on all four wheels. Loading an adverse effect on the way your vehicle steers and handles and the way The actual total weight and the weight the brakes operate. Caution! of the front and rear of your vehicle at the ground can best be determined by weighing it when it is loaded and ready Caution! DO NOT flat tow this vehicle. Damage to the drivetrain will result. If this vehicle

STARTING AND OPERATING for operation. requires towing, make sure the drive The entire vehicle should first be Do not load your vehicle any heavier than wheels are OFF the ground. weighed on a commercial scale to the GVWR or the maximum front and rear insure that the GVWR has not been Towing this vehicle in violation of the GAWR. If you do, parts on your vehicle can above requirements can cause severe exceeded. The weight on the front and break, or it can change the way your transmission damage. Damage from rear of the vehicle should then be vehicle handles. This could cause you to improper towing is not covered under the determined separately to be sure that lose control. Also overloading can shorten New Vehicle Limited Warranty. the load is properly distributed over the the life of your vehicle. front and rear axle. Weighing the vehicle

180 DRIVING TIPS Anticipate when to apply the brakes For more traction in starting on (avoid sudden braking). slippery surfaces such as ice or packed Engine Break-In snow, use sand, rock salt, chains, Follow the maintenance schedule Recommendation carpeting, or other nonslip material and contact your authorized dealer. No special break-in is necessary, but a under the rear wheels. few precautions in the first 620 miles Use the air conditioner only when Note: Use snow chains only on the (1000 km) may add to the performance, necessary. rear wheels. economy, and life of the vehicle: Slow down on rough roads. Floor Mat Safety Do not race the engine. Keep the tires properly inflated. Information Do not maintain one constant speed, Do not carry unnecessary weight. Always use floor mats designed to fit either slow or fast, for a long period of the footwell of your vehicle. Use only time. Do not rest your foot on the brake floor mats that leave the pedal area pedal while driving. Do not drive constantly at full-throttle unobstructed and that are firmly or high engine rpm for extended Keep the wheels in correct secured so that they cannot slip out of periods of time. alignment. position and interfere with the pedals or impair safe operation of your vehicle in Avoid unnecessary hard stops. Keep windows closed at high other ways. speeds. Avoid full-throttle starts. Slow down when driving in Saving Fuel And crosswinds and headwinds. Protection Of The Environment Hazardous Driving How you operate your vehicle When driving on ice or in water, snow, determines how far it will travel on a mud, sand, or similar hazards: tankoffuel. Be cautious and allow extra distance Use these suggestions to help save fuel for braking. and reduce CO : 2 Avoid sudden braking and sudden Avoid long warm-ups. Once the maneuvering. 04090400-USA-001 engine runs smoothly, begin driving. Floor Mat Retention Post Location Do not pump the brakes. Continue to Avoid fast starts. press down on the brake pedal. Drive at lower speeds. If you get stuck, select a lower gear and accelerate slowly. Do not spin the rear wheels. 181 ONLY use the passenger’s side floor mat Warning! on the passenger’s side floor area. Warning! ALWAYS make sure objects cannot fall or slide into the driver’s side floor area An improperly attached, damaged, folded, when the vehicle is moving. Objects can Fast spinning tires can be dangerous. or stacked floor mat, or damaged floor mat become trapped under accelerator, brake, Forces generated by excessive wheel fasteners may cause your floor mat to or clutch pedals and could cause a loss of speeds may cause damage, or even interfere with the accelerator, brake, or vehicle control. failure, of the axle and tires. A tire could clutch pedals and cause a loss of vehicle explode and injure someone. Do not spin control. To prevent SERIOUS INJURY or NEVER place any objects under the floor your vehicle's wheels faster than 30 mph DEATH: mat (e.g., towels, keys, etc.). These objects (48 km/h) or for longer than 30 seconds ALWAYS securely attach your floor could change the position of the floor mat continuously without stopping when you mat using the floor mat fasteners. DO NOT and may cause interference with the are stuck and do not let anyone near a install your floor mat upside down or turn accelerator, brake, or clutch pedals. spinning wheel, no matter what the speed. your floor mat over. Lightly pull to confirm If the vehicle carpet has been removed mat is secured using the floor mat and re-installed, always properly attach fasteners on a regular basis. carpet to the floor and check the floor mat Caution! ALWAYS REMOVE THE EXISTING fasteners are secure to the vehicle carpet.

STARTING AND OPERATING FLOOR MAT FROM THE VEHICLE Fully depress each pedal to check for before installing any other floor mat. interference with the accelerator, brake, or When “rocking” a stuck vehicle by NEVER install or stack an additional floor clutch pedals then re-install the floor mats. shifting between DRIVE and REVERSE, do mat on top of an existing floor mat. not spin the wheels faster than 15 mph It is recommended to only use mild soap (24 km/h), or drivetrain damage may result. ONLY install floor mats designed to fit and water to clean your floor mats. After your vehicle. NEVER install a floor mat that cleaning, always check your floor mat has Revving the engine or spinning the cannot be properly attached and secured been properly installed and is secured to wheels too fast may lead to transmission to your vehicle. If a floor mat needs to be your vehicle using the floor mat fasteners overheating and failure. It can also damage replaced, only use a FCA approved floor by lightly pulling mat. the tires. Do not spin the wheels above mat for the specific make, model, and year 30 mph (48 km/h) while in gear (no of your vehicle. transmission shifting occurring). Rocking The Vehicle ONLY use the driver’s side floor mat on Note: Too much rocking may cause Winter Driving the driver’s side floor area. To check for engine overheating, transmission failure, interference, with the vehicle properly and tire damage. Carry emergency gear, including tire parked with the engine off, fully depress the chains, window scraper, flares, a small accelerator, the brake, and the clutch pedal If you must rock the vehicle to free it shovel, jumper leads, and a small bag (if present) to check for interference. If your from snow, sand or mud, depress the of sand or salt. floor mat interferes with the operation of accelerator slightly and slowly move the any pedal, or is not secure to the floor, remove the floor mat from the vehicle and gear selector from 1 (D) to R. place the floor mat in your trunk. 182 Contact an authorized dealer to check Do not apply excessive force to a Note: the following: window scraper when removing ice or Chains may affect handling. frozen snow on the mirror glass and Have the proper ratio of antifreeze in windshield. Do not go faster than 30 mph the radiator. Never use warm or hot water for (50 km/h) or the chain manufacturer's Inspect the battery and its leads. removing snow or ice from windows recommended limit, whichever is lower. Cold reduces battery capacity. and mirrors as it could result in the Drive carefully and avoid bumps, Use an engine oil appropriate for the glass cracking. holes, and sharp turns. lowest ambient temperatures that the Snow Tires Avoid locked-wheel braking. vehicle will be driven in. If your vehicle is equipped with the tire Do not use chains on roads that are Inspect the ignition system for pressure monitoring system (vehicle free of snow or ice. The tires and damage and loose connections. with run-flat tires), the system may not function correctly when using tires with chains could be damaged. Use winter windshield washer fluid steel wire reinforcement in the Chains may scratch or chip that will not freeze. sidewalls. aluminium wheels. Note: Use Snow Tires on all Four Wheels: Do not exceed the maximum Remove snow before driving. Snow permissible speed for your snow tires or left on the windshield is dangerous as Warning! legal speed limits. it could obstruct vision. When snow tires are used, select the Drive slowly. Braking performance specified size and pressure. Using tires of different size and type (M+S, can be adversely affected if snow or Snow) between front and rear axles can ice adheres to the brake components. Tire Chains cause unpredictable handling. You could If this situation occurs, drive the vehicle Check local regulations before using tire lose control and have a collision. slowly, releasing the accelerator pedal chains. and lightly applying the brakes several If your vehicle is equipped with the times until the brake performance TPMS system, the system may not returns to normal. function correctly when using tire Do not open or close the soft top when chains. the temperature is 41 °F (5 °C) or less. Install the chains on the rear tires only. The material of the soft top could be Do not use chains on the front tires. damaged by freezing.

183 Driving In Flooded Area Caution! Note: Do not drive the vehicle on Caution! flooded roads as it could cause short circuit of electrical/electronic parts, or To avoid damage to your vehicle or tires, water enters the engine and causes it Always check the depth of the standing observe the following precautions: to lock up (hydro-lock) and stall. If the water before driving through it. Never drive Because of restricted traction device vehicle has been immersed in water through standing water that is deeper than clearance between tires and other contact your authorized dealer. the bottom of the tire rims mounted on the suspension components, it is important vehicle. that only traction devices in good condition Although your vehicle is capable of are used. Broken devices can cause driving through shallow standing water, Determine the condition of the road or serious damage. Stop the vehicle consider the following Cautions and the path that is under water and if there are immediately if noise occurs that could Warnings before doing so. any obstacles in the way before driving indicate device breakage. Remove the through the standing water. damaged parts of the device before further Do not exceed 5 mph (8 km/h) when use. Warning! driving through standing water. This will Install device as tightly as possible and minimize wave effects. then retighten after driving about ½ mile Driving through standing water may STARTING AND OPERATING (0.8 km). Driving through standing water limits cause damage to your vehicle’s drivetrain your vehicle’s traction capabilities. Do not Do not exceed 30 mph (48 km/h). components. Always inspect your vehicle’s exceed 5 mph (8 km/h) when driving fluids (i.e., engine oil, transmission, axle, Drive cautiously and avoid severe turns through standing water. etc.) for signs of contamination (i.e., fluid and large bumps, especially with a loaded Driving through standing water limits that is milky or foamy in appearance) after vehicle. your vehicle’s braking capabilities, which driving through standing water. Do not continue to operate the vehicle if any fluid Do not drive for a prolonged period on increases stopping distances. Therefore, after driving through standing water, drive appears contaminated, as this may result in dry pavement. slowly and lightly press on the brake pedal further damage. Such damage is not Observe the traction device several times to dry the brakes. covered by the New Vehicle Limited Warranty. manufacturer’s instructions on the method Failure to follow these warnings may of installation, operating speed, and result in injuries that are serious or fatal to Getting water inside your vehicle’s conditions for use. Always use the you, your passengers, and others around engine can cause it to lock up and stall out, suggested operating speed of the device you. and cause serious internal damage to the manufacturer’s if it is less than 30 mph engine. Such damage is not covered by (48 km/h). the New Vehicle Limited Warranty. Do not use traction devices on a compact spare tire.

184 Overloading Use care not to damage the vehicle's Note: Be careful not to overload your underbody, bumpers or muffler(s) when vehicle. The gross axle weight rating driving under the following conditions: (GAWR) and the gross vehicle weight Ascending or descending a slope rating (GVWR) of the vehicle are on the with a sharp transition angle. Motor Vehicle Safety Standard Label on the driver's door frame. Exceeding Ascending or descending a driveway these ratings can cause an accident or or trailer ramp with a sharp transition vehicle damage. You can estimate the angle. weight of the load by weighing the This vehicle is equipped with low profile items (or people) before putting them in tires allowing class-leading performance the vehicle. and handling. As a result, the sidewall of the tires are very thin and the tires Driving On Uneven Road and wheels can be damaged if driven Your vehicle's suspension and through potholes or on rough/uneven underbody can be damaged if driven roads at excessive speeds. on rough/uneven roads or over speed Use care and reduce speed when bumps at excessive speeds. traveling on rough/uneven roads or Use care and reduce speed when through potholes. traveling on rough/uneven roads or over speed bumps.

185 IN CASE OF EMERGENCY

HAZARD WARNING LIGHTS . . . .187 REPLACING A BULB...... 187 REPLACING FUSES ...... 197 JACKING AND TIRE CHANGING . .206 TIRE SERVICE KIT ...... 211 JUMPSTARTING...... 220 IF YOUR ENGINE OVERHEATS . . .222 TOWINGTHEVEHICLE...... 223 EVENT DATA RECORDER (EDR) . .225 IN CASE OF EMERGENCY

186 HAZARD WARNING When the switch is pushed, the Hazard REPLACING A BULB LIGHTS Warning Lights are active and all directional turn signals will flash on and General Instructions Control off to warn oncoming traffic of an The Hazard Warning Lights should emergency. Push the switch a second Warning! alwaysbeusedwhenyoustoponor time to turn off the Hazard Warning near a roadway in an emergency. Lights. The hazard warning indicator The Hazard Warning Light switch is lights in the instrument cluster will flash Before proceeding with the replacement located on the center instrument panel simultaneously. of the lamp wait until the exhaust pipes are cool: DANGER OF BURNS! below the radio. Push the switch to turn Note: theHazardWarningLightsonoroff. Modifications or repair of the electrical The turn signals do not work while Note: The Hazard Warning Lights warn system performed incorrectly and without the Hazard Warning Lights are taking into account the technical other drivers that your vehicle is a traffic activated. characteristics can cause malfunctions with hazard and that they must take extreme the risk of fire. caution when near it. Check local regulations about the use of Hazard Warning Lights while the Halogen lamps contain gas under vehicle is being towed to verify that it is pressure, in the event of breakage be careful of the projection of fragments of not in violation of the law. glass. If the brake pedal is pressed while Halogen lamps must be handled by driving on slippery roads, the touching only the metallic part. If the emergency stop signal system could transparent bulb is in contact with the operate causing all of the directional fingers, reduces the intensity of the emitted turn signals to flash. light and you can also affect the life of the lamp. In case of accidental contact, rub the While the emergency stop signal bulb with a cloth dampened with alcohol system is operating, all of the and allow to dry. 05031100-L12-001AB directional turn signals automatically Hazard Warning Light Switch flash rapidly to caution the driver of a Before replacing a bulb check the vehicle following behind of a sudden contacts for oxidation. braking situation. Replace blown bulbs with others of the same type and power.

187 After replacing a headlight bulb, When the weather is cold or damp always check its alignment. or after heavy rain or washing, the surface of headlights or rear lights may To replace the bulb, contact your steam up and/or form drops of authorized dealer. condensation on the inside. This is a When a light is not working, check natural phenomenon due to the that the corresponding fuse is intact difference in temperature and humidity before replacing the bulb. For the between the inside and the outside of location of fuses, refer to the section on the glass which does not indicate a “Replacing Fuses” in this chapter. fault and does not compromise the normal operation of lighting devices. The mist disappears quickly when the Caution! lights are turned on, starting from the center of the diffuser, extending progressively towards the edges. Use the protective cover and carton for the

IN CASE OF EMERGENCY replacement bulb to dispose of the old bulb promptly and out of the reach of children.

Note: When removing the lens or light unit using a flathead screwdriver, make sure that the flathead screwdriver does not contact the interior terminal. If the flathead screwdriver contacts the terminal, a short circuit may occur.

188 Replacement Bulbs

Light Bulbs Type Power Front Position LED – Front Side-Maker Lights (If Equipped With Full-LED Headlights) W5W 5 W Front Positions/Side-Maker Lights (If Equipped With Halogen Headlights) WY5W 5 W High Beam (If Equipped With Full-LED Headlights) LED – High Beam/Daytime Running Lights (DRL) (If Equipped With Halogen Headlights) HB3 60 W Daytime Running Lights (DRL) (If Equipped With Full-LED Headlights) LED – Low Beam (If Equipped With Full-LED Headlights) LED – Low Beam (If Equipped With Halogen Headlights) H11 55 W Front Direction Indicator Light WY21W 21 W Side Direction Indicator Light WY5W 5 W Fog Light H11 55 W Rear Position Lights LED – Stop Lights LED – Center High Mount Stop Lamp (CHMSL) LED – Rear Direction Indicator Light WY21W 21 W Rear Side Marker W5W 5 W Reverse Light W21W 21 W License Plate Light W5W 5 W Overhead Light 10 W Trunk Lid Light 5W

189 Light Bulbs Rear Lights 3. Remove the fasteners in the seven locations and partially peel back the Front Lights The bulbs are arranged as follows : mud guard. The bulbs are arranged as follows :

04110102-L40-010AB Rear Lights 08020499000002 04110102-L38-008AB Mud Guard Head Lights 4 — Position Light/Stop Light/Rear Di- IN CASE OF EMERGENCY 1 — Fasteners 1 — High Beam with Daytime Running rection Indicator Light 5 — Reverse Light — If Equipped 2 — Mud Guard Lights (DRL)/Position Light/Low Beam/ 6 — Third Stop Light Side Marker 2 — Front Indicator Light 4. Turn the cover counterclockwise and 3 — Fog Light Replacing Exterior remove it, disconnect the connector Lights from the unit by pressing the tab on the connector with your finger and pulling Headlights (low beam) the connector. (If Equipped with halogen bulb) 5. Turn the socket and bulb assembly Proceed as follows: counterclockwise and remove it. 1. If you are changing the right bulb, 6. Disconnect the bulb from the start the engine, turn the steering wheel socket. all the way to the right, and turn off engine. If you are changing the left bulb, 7. Install the new bulb in the reverse turn the steering wheel to the left. order of the removal procedure. 2. Make sure the ignition is placed in the OFF mode, and the headlight switch is off. 190 Headlights (High Beam) With 8. Install the new bulb in the reverse Daytime Running Lights order of the removal procedure. (If Equipped With LED Lamps) Proceed as follows: 1. If you are changing the right bulb, start the engine, turn the steering wheel all the way to the right, and turn off engine. If you are changing the left bulb, turn the steering wheel to the left.

2. Make sure the ignition is placed in 07031501-206-002AB the OFF mode, and the headlight Mud Guard switch is off. Front Direction Indicator Lights 3. Remove the fasteners in the seven Proceed as follows: locations and partially peel back the mud guard. 1. If you are changing the right bulb, start the engine, turn the steering wheel 4. Turn the socket and bulb assembly all the way to the right, and turn off counterclockwise and remove it. engine. If you are changing the left bulb, turn the steering wheel to the left. 5. Turn the cover counterclockwise and remove it, disconnect the connector 2. Make sure the ignition is placed in from the unit by pressing the tab on the the OFF mode, and the headlight 08020499000010 connector with your finger and pulling Head Lamp Assembly switch is off. the connector. 1 — High Beam Lamp 3. Remove the fasteners in the five 6. Turn the socket and bulb assembly 2 — Position Lamp locations and partially peel back the counterclockwise and remove it. 3 — Daytime Running Lamp mud guard. 7. Disconnect the bulb from the 4. Disconnect the connector from the socket. unit by pressing the tab on the connector with your finger and pulling the connector rearward.

191 5. Turn the socket and bulb assembly Fog Lights Side Direction Indicator Lights counterclockwise and remove it. Proceed as follows: Proceed as follows: 1. If you are changing the right bulb, 1. Make sure the ignition is placed in start the engine, turn the steering wheel the OFF mode, and the headlight all the way to the right, and turn off switch is off. engine. If you are changing the left bulb, turn the steering wheel to the left. 2. If you are changing the right bulb, start the engine, turn the steering wheel 2. Make sure the ignition is switched all the way to the right, and turn off off, and the headlight switch is off. engine. If you are changing the left bulb, turn the steering wheel to the left. 3. Remove the fasteners in the five locations and partially peel back the 3. Remove the fasteners in the five 07031501-207-001 mud guard. locations and partially peel back the Front Direction Indicator Housing mud guard. 4. Disconnect the connector from the 1 — Socket Assembly

IN CASE OF EMERGENCY unit by pressing the tab on the 4. Disconnect the electrical connector 2 — Bulb connector with your finger and pulling from the bulb by pressing the tab on the connector. the connector with your finger and 6. Disconnect the bulb from the pulling the connector. 5. Turn the socket and bulb assembly socket. counterclockwise, extract the bulb and 5. Remove the lens assembly by remove it. pressing the tab on the unit with your finger and pulling the unit forward to 6. Disconnect the bulb from the compress in the internal catch, then pull socket. the cluster outwards. 7. Install the new bulb in the reverse order of the removal procedure. Brake lights / Tail lights Go to your authorized dealer when the replacement of this lights is necessary.

07031501-208-002AB Direction Indicator Lamp Connector 7. Install the new bulb in the reverse order of the removal procedure.

192 6. Lift up the lens assembly, and then 2. Turn the socket counterclockwise, remove the cluster and install the new remove socket assembly then remove side direction indicator lens assembly in the bulb. the reverse order of the removal procedure.

08020499-000-011AB Side Direction Indicator 1 — Fasteners

07031501211001 Side Direction Indicator 3 — Internal Catch 4 — Lens Assembly 08070604-123-100 Front Side Marker Front Side Marker 1 — Socket 2 — Bulb Assembly (If Equipped With Halogen Bulb) Proceed as follows: 3. Install the new bulb in the reverse 1. Remove the fasteners in the seven order of the removal procedure. 07031501-210-001AB locations and partially peel back the Side Direction Indicator upper side of the mud guard. 2 — Lens Assembly

193 Rear Direction Indicator Lights Proceed as follows: 1. Remove the retainers and the trunk lid end trim.

07031501214002 07031501-215-001 Trunk Trim Taillight Housing Fasteners 2 — Connector 4—Screw 5 — Nuts 2. Disconnect the connector from the IN CASE OF EMERGENCY unit by pressing the tab on the 4. Pull the taillight housing rearward to connector with your finger. remove it.

07031501-212-002 Trunk Trim 1 — Retainers

07031501213002 07031501-216-001AB Rear Direction Indicator Socket Rear of Vehicle 3 — Connector 6 — Taillight Housing

3. Remove the screw and nuts.

194 5. Turn the socket and bulb assembly Reverse Light Rear Side Marker counterclockwise to remove from Proceed as follows: Proceed as follows: taillight housing, and remove bulb. 1. Make sure the ignition is placed in 1. Push the lens assembly rearward to the OFF mode, and the headlight compress the internal catch, then pull switch is off. the lens assembly outwards. 2. Turn the socket assembly counterclockwise to remove, and remove bulb.

07031501-203-002 Taillight Housing 7 — Socket and Bulb Assembly 08070605AB Rear Side Marker 6. Install the new bulb in the reverse 1 — Rear Side Marker Lens Assembly order of the removal procedure. 07031501-219-001 Reverse Light 1 — Socket Assembly 2 — Bulb

3. Install the new bulb in the reverse order of the removal procedure.

195 2. Turn the socket and bulb assembly License Plate Lights 3. Turn the socket and bulb assembly counterclockwise to remove, and Proceed as follows: counterclockwise and remove, remove remove bulb. bulb. 1. Make sure the ignition is placed in the OFF mode, and the headlight switch is off. 2. Slide the unit as shown in the figure to remove it.

07031501-221-001 License Plate Light Housing

IN CASE OF EMERGENCY 2 — Socket and Bulb Assembly

4. Install the new bulb in the reverse order of the removal procedure. Insert catch and push the housing back into place.

08070606-123-100 Side Marker Housing 2 — Socket and Bulb Assembly

3. Install the new bulb and then 07031501220001 reinstall the socket in the reverse order Trunk Lid of the removal procedure. 1 — License Plate Light Assembly

196 Replacing Interior Light REPLACING FUSES Bulbs General Information Overhead Light Proceed as follows: Warning! 1. Using a suitable tool to prevent damage to the lens, remove the overhead light by carefully prying on the When replacing a blown fuse, always edge of the lens. use an appropriate replacement fuse with the same amp rating as the original fuse. Never replace a fuse with another fuse of 07031502-202-001 Trunk Light higher amp rating. Never replace a blown fuse with metal wires or any other material. 1 — Trunk Light Lens Do not place a fuse inside a circuit breaker cavity or vice versa. Failure to use proper fuses may result in serious personal injury, 2. Disconnect the connector from the fire and/or property damage. trunk light lens. Before replacing a fuse, make sure that the ignition is off and that all the other services are switched off and/or disengaged. 07031502-201-001 Overhead Light Location If the replaced fuse blows again, contact an authorized dealer. 1 — Overhead Light Lens If a general protection fuse for safety systems (air bag system, braking system), 2. Disconnect the bulb by pulling it out. power unit systems (engine system, transmission system) or steering system 3. Install the new bulb in the reverse blows, contact an authorized dealer. order of the removal procedure. 07031502-203-001 Trunk Light Trunk Light Housing Your vehicle's electrical system is Proceed as follows: 2 — Connector protected by fuses. 1. Using a suitable tool to prevent If any lights, accessories, or controls do not work, inspect the appropriate circuit damage to the to the lens, remove the 3. Disconnect the bulb by pulling it out. trunk light lens by carefully prying on protector. If a fuse has blown, the inside the edge of the lens. 4. Install the new bulb in the reverse element will be melted. If the same fuse order of the removal procedure. blows again, go to an authorized dealer as soon as possible. 197 Fuse location 4. Pull the fuse straight out with the 6. Insert a new fuse of the same Fuses are grouped together in two fuse fuse puller provided on the fuse block amperage rating, and make sure it fits boxes located in the interior on the left located in the engine compartment. tightly. If it does not fit tightly, contact side of the vehicle and under the hood. your authorized dealer. If you have no spare fuses, borrow one of the same Interior Fuses rating from a circuit not essential to If the electrical system does not work, vehicle operation, such as the audio or first inspect the fuses on the vehicle's outlet circuit. left side. 7. Reinstall the cover and make sure Proceed as follows: that it is securely installed. 1. Make sure the ignition is placed in Note: Always replace a fuse with a the OFF mode, and other switches are genuine FCA fuse or equivalent of the turned off. same rating. Otherwise you may 07031601-122-001 damage the electric system. 2. Open the fuse panel cover (located Fuse Puller near the door). IN CASE OF EMERGENCY 5. Inspect the fuse and replace it if it is blown.

07031601-121-001 Fuse Panel Cover 07031601-ALL-001 3. Press retaining clip and remove Fuses protection cover. 1 — Normal Fuse 2 — Blown Fuse

198 Underhood Fuses 2. Remove the front tab while slightly If the headlights or other electrical lifting the front of the cover. components do not work and the fuses 3. Remove the cover while lifting it and in the cabin are normal, inspect the fuse sliding it to the rear. block in the engine compartment. If a fuse is blown, it must be replaced. 4. If any fuse but the main fuse is Make sure the ignition is placed in the blown, replace it with a new one of the OFF mode, and other switches are same amperage rating. turned off and remove the fuse block cover. If the lock is forcefully opened, the fuse block cover may come in contact with the frame when it is removed and become scratched. When removing the cover, remove it slowly according to the following procedure: 1. Disengage the rear lock by pressing down on the front tab with your fingers. 07031601-ALL-002AB Fuse 1 — Normal Fuse 2 — Blown Fuse

5. Reinstall the cover and make sure that it is securely installed.

07031601-123-001 Underhood Fuse Block 1 — Lock 2 — Cover

199 Fuse Block (Engine Compartment) IN CASE OF EMERGENCY

07031602-121-001

200 DESCRIPTION FUSE RATING PROTECTED COMPONENT F01 ENG IG3 5 A Engine Control Systems F02 ENG IG2 5 A Engine Control Systems F03 HORN2 7.5 A Horn F04 C/U IG1 15 A For Protection Of Various Circuits F05 ENG IG1 7.5 A Engine Control System F06 — — — F07 INTERIOR 15 A Overhead Light F08 — — — F09 AUDIO2 15 A Audio System F10 METER1 10 A Instrument Cluster F11 SRS1 7.5 A Air Bag F12 — — — F13 RADIO 7.5 A Audio System F14 ENGINE3 20 A Engine Control System F15 ENGINE1 10 A Engine Control System F16 ENGINE2 15 A Engine Control System F17 AUDIO1 25 A Audio System F18 A/C MAG 7.5 A Air Conditioner F19 AT PUMP H/L HI 20 A Transmission Control System (If Equipped) F20 AT 15 A Transmission Control System (If Equipped) F21 D LOCK 25 A Power Door Locks F22 H/L RH 20 A Headlight (RH) F23 ENG + B2 7.5 A Engine Control System 201 DESCRIPTION FUSE RATING PROTECTED COMPONENT F24 TAIL 20 A Taillights/Number Plate Lights/Position Lights F25 — — — F26 ROOM 25 A Overhead Light F27 FOG 15 A Fog Lights F28 H/CLEAN 20 A Headlight Washer (If Equipped) F29 STOP 10 A Stop Lights/Rear Fog Light (If Equipped) F30 HORN 15 A Horn F31 H/L LH 20 A Headlight (LH) F32 ABS/DSC S 30 A ABS/DSC System

IN CASE OF EMERGENCY F33 HAZARD 15 A Hazard Warning Flashers/Direction Indicators Lights F34 FUEL PUMP 15 A Fuel System F35 ENG + B3 5 A Engine Control System F36 WIPER 20 A Windshield Wipers F37 CABIN + B 50 A For Protection Of Various Circuits F38 — — — F39 — — — F40 ABS/DSC M 50 A ABS/DSC System F41 EVVT A/R PUMP 20 A Engine Control System F42 — — — F43 — — — F44 FAN2 40 A Cooling Fan F45 ENG.MAIN 40 A Engine Control System F46 EPS 60 A Power Steering System 202 DESCRIPTION FUSE RATING PROTECTED COMPONENT F47 DEFOG 30 A Rear Window Defogger F48 IG2 30 A For Protection Of Various Circuits F49 — — — F50 HEATER 40 A Air Conditioner F51 — — — F52 — — —

203 Fuse Block Interior IN CASE OF EMERGENCY

07031602-03F-002

204 DESCRIPTION FUSE RATING PROTECTED COMPONENT F01 RHT R 30 A — F02 RHT L 30 A — F03 — — — F04 — — — F05 F.OUTLET 15 A Accessory Sockets F06 — — — F07 AT IND 7.5 A AT Shift Indicator — If Equipped F08 MIRROR 7.5 A Power Control Mirror F09 R_DECK R 30 A — F10 R_DECK L 30 A — F11 F.WASHER 15 A Windshield Washer F12 P.WINDOW 30 A Power Windows F13 — — — F14 SRS2/ESCL 15 A — F15 — — — F16 — — —

205 JACKING AND TIRE Tools Location CHANGING Your vehicle may be equipped with a spare tire, jack, lug wrench and tow eyes. For details, contact your Warning! authorized dealer. Tools are stored in the trunk. Do not attempt to change a tire on the side of the vehicle close to moving traffic. Pull far enough off the road to avoid the danger of being hit when operating the jack or changing the wheel. 08020101-124-001 Being under a jacked-up vehicle is Jack Location dangerous. The vehicle could slip off the 1 — Cover Tab jack and fall on you. You could be crushed. 2 — Jack And Tools Cover Never put any part of your body under a vehicle that is on a jack. If you need to get IN CASE OF EMERGENCY under a raised vehicle, take it to a service 2. Turn the wing bolt and jack screw center where it can be raised on a lift. 08020100-122-002 counterclockwise. The jack is designed to be used as a Jack Tools tool for changing tires only. The jack should not be used to lift the vehicle for service 1 — Jack Lever purposes. The vehicle should be jacked on 2 — Lug Wrench (If Equipped) a firm level surface only. Avoid ice or 3 — Tow Eyes (If Equipped) slippery areas. Preparations For Jacking To Remove The Jack Proceed as follows: 1. In the right side of the trunk, pull the 08020101-122-001 cover tab to remove cover. Jack Components 3 — Wing Bolt 4 — Jack Screw

206 To Secure The Jack Conditions Of Non-Use 2. Turn on the Hazard Warning Lights and engage the parking brake. Proceed as follows: Temperatures below -40°F (−40°C). 1. Insert the wing bolt into the jack with On sandy or muddy ground. 3. For vehicles with automatic the jack screw pointing back, and turn transmission, place the gear selector in the wing bolt clockwise to temporarily On uneven ground. PARK. For vehicles with manual tighten it. On steep roads. transmission, place gear selector in REVERSE and cycle the engine to OFF. 2. Turn the jack screw clockwise. In extreme weather conditions. 4. Stop the engine. The motor must be 3. Turn the wing bolt completely to In direct contact with the engine or kept off as long as the vehicle is lifted secure the jack. for repairs under the vehicle. off the ground. 4. Insert the cover tabs and install the On boats. 5. Remove the jack and tools. cover. Jacking Instructions 6. Block both the front and rear of the Note: Make sure the jack is well wheel diagonally opposite of the jacking Warning! lubricated before using it. position. For example, if changing the right front tire, block the left rear wheel.

A loose tire or jack thrown forward in a Warning! collision or hard stop could endanger the occupants of the vehicle. Always stow the jack parts and the spare tire in the places Do not attempt to change a tire on the side provided. Have the deflated (flat) tire of the vehicle close to moving traffic, pull repaired or replaced immediately. far enough off the road to avoid being hit when operating the jack or changing the wheel. Maintenance Always keep the jack clean. Proceed as follows:

Make sure the moving parts are kept 1. Stop the vehicle in a position that 08020300-121-001 free from dirt or rust. does not cause any danger to traffic Blocking Right Front Tire And Left Make sure the screw thread is and lets you change the tire in safety, as Rear Tire adequately lubricated. far as possible from the edge of the driving lane. The ground must be flat and sufficiently compact.

207 Removing A Tire 4. Continue raising the jack head gradually by rotating the screw with your hand until the jack head is inserted Warning! into the lift point.

Carefully follow these tire changing Caution! warnings to help prevent personal injury or damage to your vehicle: Always park on a firm, level surface as Do not attempt to raise the vehicle by far from the edge of the roadway as jacking on locations other than those indicated in the Jacking Instructions for this possible before raising the vehicle. 08020301-123-001 Loosen Lug Nuts Counterclockwise vehicle. Turn on the Hazard Warning flasher. Block the wheel diagonally opposite the 2. Place the jack under the lift point wheel to be raised. closest to the tire being changed with the jack head squarely under the

IN CASE OF EMERGENCY Set the parking brake firmly and set the jacking location. transmission in PARK. Do not let any passenger sit in the 3. Turn the jack screw in the direction vehicle when it is on a jack. shown and adjust the jack head so that it is close to the jacking location. Do not get under the vehicle when it is on a jack. If you need to get under a raised vehicle, take it to a service center where it can be raised on a lift. 08020301-121-001 Only use the jack in the positions Front Jacking Location indicated and for lifting this vehicle during a tire change. If working on or near a roadway, be extremely careful of motor traffic.

Proceed as follows: 08020301-ALL-003 1. Loosen the lug nuts by turning them Raising The Jack counterclockwise one turn each, but do 1 — Jack Head not remove any lug nuts until the tire has been raised off the ground. 208 5. Insert the jack lever and attach the To Remove An Anti-theft Lug Nut lug wrench to tire jack. Warning! Proceed as follows: 1. Obtain the special key for the Raising the vehicle higher than necessary anti-theft lug nut. can make the vehicle less stable. It could 2. Place the special key on top of the slip off the jack and hurt someone near it. anti-theft lug nut, and be sure to hold Raise the vehicle only enough to remove the tire. the key square to it. If you hold the key at an angle, you may damage both key and nut. Do not use a power impact 7. Remove the lug nuts by turning wrench. them counterclockwise, then remove the wheel. 3. Place the lug wrench on top of the 08020301-ALL-006 Locking Lug Nuts — If Equipped key and apply pressure. Turn the Jack With Lug Wrench Attached wrench counterclockwise. If your vehicle has optional anti-theft To Install The Anti-theft Lug Nut wheel lug nuts, one on each wheel will lock the tires and you must use a Proceed as follows: Warning! special key to unlock them. This key will 1. Place the special key on top of the attach to the lug wrench. nut, and be sure to hold the key square Being under a jacked-up vehicle is Register them with the lock to it. If you hold the key at an angle, you dangerous. The vehicle could slip off the manufacturer by filling out the card may damage both key and nut. Do not jack and fall on you. You could be crushed. provided in the glove compartment and use a power impact wrench. Never get any part of your body under a mailing it in the accompanying vehicle that is on a jack. If you need to get envelope. If you lose this key, contact 2. Place the lug wrench on top of the under a raised vehicle, take it to a service your authorized dealer or use the lock special key, apply pressure, and turn it center where it can be raised on a lift. manufacturer's order form, which is clockwise. with the registration card. 6. Turn the jack handle clockwise and Accessory wheel locks cannot be used raise the vehicle high enough so that on steel wheels. This includes situations the tire is just raised off the ground and when the spare tire is installed. If the can be removed. Before removing the spare tire is installed, one of the original lug nuts, make sure your vehicle is lug nuts (which should still be in the firmly in position and that it cannot slip vehicle) must be installed in place of the or move. wheel lock.

209 Mounting The Tire With TPMS Proceed as follows: Do not push the tire pressure monitoring system set switch after 1. Remove dirt and grime from the installing the spare tire. The switch is mounting surfaces of the wheel and only to be pushed after installing the hub, including the hub bolts, with a repaired flat tire or installing a cloth. replacement tire. Note: To prevent the jack and tool from rattling, store them properly.

08020303-122-001 Lug Nut Tightening Order Warning!

A loose tire or jack thrown forward in a Warning! collision or hard stop could endanger the

IN CASE OF EMERGENCY occupants of the vehicle. Always stow the jack parts and the spare tire in the places To avoid the risk of forcing the vehicle off 08020303-XX4-001 provided. Have the deflated (flat) tire Clean Mounting Surface the jack, do not tighten the wheel nuts fully repaired or replaced immediately. until the vehicle has been lowered. Failure 2. Mount the tire and install the lug to follow this warning may result in serious nuts with the beveled edge inward, then injury. tighten them by hand. 4. After tightening the lug nuts, have them checked with a torque wrench by Caution! your authorized dealer or service station to verify correct tightness.

Be sure to mount the spare tire with the 5. Remove the tire blocks and store valve stem facing outward. The vehicle the tools and jack. could be damaged if the spare tire is mounted incorrectly. 6. Check the inflation pressure. Refer to “Recommended Tire Inflation Pressure” in “Technical Specifications” 3. Turn the lug wrench for more information. counterclockwise and lower the vehicle. Use the lug wrench to tighten the nuts in the order shown. 210 TIRE SERVICE KIT Tire Service Kit Mexico Market: Components And Tire Service Storage Operation The Tire Service Kit is located inside the The Tire Service Kit includes the trunk. following items: U.S.A. And Canada Markets:

08020202-121-003 Tire Service Kit Location The Tire Service Kit included with your vehicle is for a temporary repair of a slightly damaged flat tire resulting from running over nails or similar sharp 08070606456456 objects on the road surface. Tire Service Kit Components — Perform the emergency flat tire repair Mexico Markets without removing the nail or similar sharp object which punctured the tire. 1— Tire Sealant 2— Compressor Note: Your vehicle is not equipped with 3— Valve Core Tool a spare tire. In the event of a flat tire, 08070606457457 4— Injection Hose use the Tire Service Kit to repair the tire Tire Service Kit Components — 5— Spare Valve Core temporarily. When doing the repair, refer U.S.A. And Canada Markets 6— Speed Restriction Sticker to the instructions included in the Tire 1— Sealant Bottle 7— Instructions Service Kit. If an emergency repair was 2— Compressor performed on a flat tire using the Tire 3— Speed Restriction Sticker Service Kit, contact your authorized 4— Repaired Tire Sticker dealer to repair or replace the tire as 5— Instructions soon as possible. 211 Tire Service Usage Sealing A Tire With Tire Take care not to allow the contents of Precautions Service Kit Tire Service Kit to come in contact with The tire sealant cannot be reused. If the hair, eyes, or clothing. Tire Service Kit sealant is harmful if inhaled, swallowed, or sealant has been used, or is expired, Warning! absorbed through the skin. It causes skin, purchase new tire sealant at your eye, and respiratory irritation. Flush authorized dealer. immediately with plenty of water if there is Note: The Tire Service Kit cannot be Do not attempt to seal a tire on the side any contact with eyes or skin. Change used in the following cases. Consult of the vehicle closest to traffic. Pull far clothing as soon as possible, if there is any your authorized dealer if any of these enough off the road to avoid the danger of contact with clothing. being hit when using the Tire Service Kit. conditions exist: Tire Service Kit Sealant solution contains Do not use Tire Service Kit or drive the latex. In case of an allergic reaction or rash, The period of effective use for the vehicle under the following circumstances: consult a physician immediately. Keep Tire tire sealant has expired (the period of Service Kit out of reach of children. If effectiveness is indicated on the bottle If the puncture in the tire tread is approximately 1/4 inch (6 mm) or larger. swallowed, rinse mouth immediately with label). plenty of water and drink plenty of water. If the tire has any sidewall damage. Do not induce vomiting! Consult a IN CASE OF EMERGENCY The tear or puncture in the tire physician immediately. exceeds about 0.16 inches (4 mm). If the tire has any damage from driving with extremely low tire pressure. The damage has occurred to an U.S.A. And CANADA Markets: area of the tire other than the tread. If the tire has any damage from driving on a flat tire. Proceed as follows: The vehicle has been driven with If the wheel has any damage. nearly no air remaining in the tire. 1. Pull over to a safe location and turn If you are unsure of the condition of the on the vehicle’s Hazard Warning Lights. The tire has come off the wheel rim. tire or the wheel. 2. Verify that the valve stem (on the Damage to the wheel rim has Keep Tire Service Kit away from open wheel with the deflated tire) is in a occurred. flames or heat sources. position that is near to the ground. This The tire has two or more punctures. A loose Tire Service Kit thrown forward will allow the Tire Service Kit hoses to in a collision or hard stop could endanger reach the valve stem and keep the Tire the occupants of the vehicle. Always stow Service Kit flat on the ground. This will the Tire Service Kit in the place provided. provide the best positioning of the kit Failure to follow these warnings can result when injecting the sealant into the in injuries that are serious or fatal to you, deflated tire and running the air pump. your passengers, and others around you. Move the vehicle as necessary to place the valve stem in this position before proceeding. 212 3. Place the gear selector in REVERSE 7. Pull out the air compressor hose for a manual transmission, and PARK and the air compressor plug from the for automatic transmission. air compressor. 4. Apply the parking brake with the brake pedal pressed and cycle the engine OFF. 5. Unload passengers and cargo, then remove the Tire Service Kit.

08020202-03A-666 Sealant Bottle With Injection Hose 1 — Injection Hose 08020202-36A-004 Air Compressor With Hose And Note: Plug Do not shake the bottle excessively. Otherwise, the sealant 2 — Air Compressor Hose could spray out of the injection hose. If the sealant contacts clothing or other 08020202-121-003 Tire Service Kit Location objects, you may not be able to remove it. 6. Gently shake the sealant bottle to The sealant hardens easily, and mix the contents. Then extend the injecting it will be difficult under cold injection hose. weather conditions (32 °F (0 °C) or below). Warm the sealant inside the vehicle to facilitate injection.

213 8. Install the air compressor hose, 11. Insert the air compressor plug into which was pulled out of the air the accessory socket inside the vehicle compressor, into the injection valve of and cycle the ignition to ACC. the bottle. Note: When inserting the air compressor plug into or removing it from the accessory socket, make sure that the air compressor switch is off. When turning the air compressor on/off, use the air compressor switch. Before checking the tire inflation pressure using 08020202-03A-004AB the tire pressure gauge, turn the air Valve And Valve Cover compressor switch off. 5 — Valve Cap 12. The sealant is injected into the tire 6 — Valve when the air compressor is switched 08020202-031-670 on. After the sealant is injected

IN CASE OF EMERGENCY Install Air Compressor To Sealant completely, wait until the tire inflation Bottle 10. Install the bottle to the air compressor and push it in until the left pressure increases to the specified tire 3 — Air Compressor Hose and right tabs are engaged securely. inflation pressure. For the correct 4 — Injection Valve pressure, check the tire inflation pressure label on the driver's door frame. Note: Make sure that the air compressor switch is off before Note: The inflation pressure may inserting the air compressor hose into increase to about 43.5 psi (3 Bar) the injection valve of the bottle. If the air temporarily to inject the sealant through compressor hose is not installed to the the valve. Normally, the inflation injection valve of the bottle securely, the pressure decreases gradually and it sealant may leak. reaches the actual inflation pressure after about 30 seconds. 9. Remove the valve cap from the valve of the flat tire, install the injection hose 08020202-031-669 to the tire valve, and turn the sleeve to Sealant Bottle Into Air Compressor the right to tighten. 7 — Air Compressor Tabs

214 16. Remove the air compressor hose from the injection valve of the bottle. Warning! Warning! Then, install the injection hose to the injection valve of the bottle to prevent Never use the air compressor above 3 Bar Do not adhere the speed restriction sticker leakage of any remaining sealant. (43.5 psi). Using the air compressor at an to the padded area on the steering wheel. inflation pressure above 3 Bar (43.5 psi) Adhering the speed restriction sticker to continuously is dangerous. If the air the padded area on the steering wheel is compressor overheats, hot air will be dangerous because the air bag may not exhausted and you could get burned. operate (deploy) normally resulting in serious injury. In addition, do not adhere the sticker to areas where warning lights or the speedometer cannot be viewed. Caution!

14. Adhere the repaired tire sticker to If the tire inflation pressure does not the wheel of the flat tire. increase, repair of the tire is not possible. If 08020202-031-668 the tire does not reach the specified tire Install Injection Hose To Sealant inflation pressure within 10 minutes, it may Bottle have received extensive damage. In this case, the repair using the tire service kit Note: The remaining sealant in the was not successful. hose may spray out when the hose is removed. Remove the hose carefully Do not operate the air compressor for a continuous 10 minutes or longer because because you may not be able to using it for long periods could cause a remove the sealant contacting clothing malfunction. or other objects. 17. Install the tire valve cap. 13. Adhere the speed restriction sticker 08020202-031-667 to an area where it can be viewed easily Repaired Tire Sticker 18. Place the Tire Service Kit back into its storage location. by the driver. 15. When the tire inflates to the specified tire inflation pressure, turn the 19. Start driving immediately to spread air compressor switch off, turn the the sealant in the tire. sleeve of the injection hose to the left, Note: Carefully drive the vehicle at a and pull it out of the tire valve. speed of 50 mph (80 km/h) or less. If the vehicle is driven at a speed of 50 mph (80 km/h) or more, the vehicle may vibrate. 215 Note: With TPMS System: if the tire Sealing A Tire With Tire Take care not to allow the contents of is not properly inflated, the warning Service Kit Tire Service Kit to come in contact with light will illuminate. hair, eyes, or clothing. Tire Service Kit After driving the vehicle for about sealant is harmful if inhaled, swallowed, or Warning! absorbed through the skin. It causes skin, 10 minutes or 3 miles (5 km), connect eye, and respiratory irritation. Flush the air compressor to the tire using immediately with plenty of water if there is Step nine of the procedure, and check Do not attempt to seal a tire on the side any contact with eyes or skin. Change the tire inflation pressure using the tire of the vehicle closest to traffic. Pull far clothing as soon as possible, if there is any pressure gauge on the air compressor. enough off the road to avoid the danger of contact with clothing. being hit when using the Tire Service Kit. If the tire inflation pressure is lower than Tire Service Kit Sealant solution contains the specified tire inflation pressure, turn Do not use Tire Service Kit or drive the latex. In case of an allergic reaction or rash, the air compressor on and wait until it vehicle under the following circumstances: consult a physician immediately. Keep Tire reaches the specified tire inflation If the puncture in the tire tread is Service Kit out of reach of children. If pressure. approximately 1/4 inch (6 mm) or larger. swallowed, rinse mouth immediately with plenty of water and drink plenty of water. The Tire Service Kit is completed If the tire has any sidewall damage. Do not induce vomiting! Consult a IN CASE OF EMERGENCY successfully if the tire inflation pressure physician immediately. does not decrease. Carefully drive the If the tire has any damage from driving with extremely low tire pressure. vehicle to the nearest authorized dealer immediately and have the flat tire If the tire has any damage from driving Mexico Market replaced. Replacement with a new tire on a flat tire. Proceed as follows: is recommended. If the tire is to be If the wheel has any damage. 1. Pull over to a safe location and turn repaired or reused, consult your on the vehicle’s Hazard Warning Lights. authorized dealer. If you are unsure of the condition of the tire or the wheel. 2. Verify that the valve stem (on the Note: Keep Tire Service Kit away from open wheel with the deflated tire) is in a If an emergency flat tire repair has flames or heat sources. position that is near to the ground. This been performed using the Tire Service A loose Tire Service Kit thrown forward will allow the Tire Service Kit hoses to Kit, FCA recommends that the tire be in a collision or hard stop could endanger reach the valve stem and keep the Tire replaced with a new one as soon as the occupants of the vehicle. Always stow Service Kit flat on the ground. This will possible. If the tire is to be repaired or the Tire Service Kit in the place provided. provide the best positioning of the kit reused, contact your authorized dealer. Failure to follow these warnings can result when injecting the sealant into the in injuries that are serious or fatal to you, deflated tire and running the air pump. The wheel can be reused if the your passengers, and others around you. Move the vehicle as necessary to place sealant adhering to it is removed. the valve stem in this position before However, replace the valve with a new proceeding. one. 216 3. Place the gear selector in REVERSE for a manual transmission, or PARK for automatic transmission. 4. Apply the parking brake with the brake pedal pressed and cycle the engine OFF. 5. Unload passengers and cargo, then remove the Tire Service Kit. 6. Gently shake the tire sealant. If the bottle is shaken after the injection hose 08020202-03A-004AB is screwed on, tire sealant could spray Valve And Valve Cover out from the injection hose. Tire sealant 5 — Valve Cap contacting clothing or other objects 6 — Tire Valve may be impossible to remove. Shake the bottle before screwing on the injection hose. Note: If there is air remaining in the tire when the valve core is removed, the Note: valve core could fly out. Remove the Do not shake the bottle valve core carefully. excessively. Otherwise, the sealant could spray out of the injection hose, 9. Turn the valve core counter and if the sealant contacts clothing or clockwise with the valve core tool and 0802020203A003 remove the valve core. other objects, you may not be able to Attaching Injection Hose To Sealant remove it. Bottle The sealant hardens easily and injecting it will be difficult under cold 8. Remove the valve cap from the flat weather conditions 32 °F (0 °C) or tire. Push the back of a valve core tool below. Warm the sealant inside the to the core of the tire valve and bleed vehicle to facilitate injection. out all of the remaining air. 7. Remove the cap from the bottle and screw on the injection hose with the bottle's inner cap left on to break the inner cap. 08020202-03A-005AB Turn Valve Core Counterclockwise 217 Note: Store the valve core in a place where it will not get dirty. Warning! 10. Insert the injection hose into the valve. Do not adhere the speed restriction sticker to the padded area on the steering wheel. Adhering the speed restriction sticker to the padded area on the steering wheel is dangerous because the air bag may not operate (deploy) normally resulting in serious injury. In addition, do not adhere

08020202-03A-007AB the sticker to areas where warning lights or Turn Valve Core Clockwise To the speedometer cannot be viewed. Reinstall 13. Reinsert the valve core into the 16. Pull out the air compressor hose valve and turn it clockwise to install. and the air compressor plug from the 08020202-03A-008AB IN CASE OF EMERGENCY air compressor. Injection Hose Into Valve Note: 11. Hold the bottom of the bottle The tire sealant cannot be reused. upright, squeeze the bottle with your If the tire sealant kit has been used, or hands, and inject the entire amount of is expired, purchase new one at your tire sealant into the tire. authorized dealer. Do not throw away the empty tire sealant bottle after use. Return the empty tire sealant bottle to your authorized dealer when replacing the tire. The empty tire sealant bottle will need to be used to extract and dispose of the used sealant from the 08020202-36A-004 tire. Air Compressor With Hose And Plug 14. Install the injection hose to the tab of the bottle to prevent leakage of any 2 — Air Compressor Hose remaining sealant. 08020202-03A-008 Squeeze Sealant Into Tire 15. Adhere the speed restriction sticker 17. Install the air compressor hose to the tire valve. 12. Pull out the injection hose from the to an area where it can be viewed easily valve. by the driver. 218 Note: Caution! Carefully drive the vehicle at a speed of 50 mph (80 km/h) or less. If the vehicle is driven at a speed of If the tire inflation pressure does not 50 mph (80 km/h) or more, the vehicle increase, repair of the tire is not possible. If may vibrate. the tire does not reach the specified tire inflation pressure within 10 minutes, it may With TPMS System: if the tire is have received extensive damage. In this not properly inflated, the warning case, the repair using the tire service kit light will illuminate. was not successful. 08020202-03A-00BAB After driving the vehicle for about Air Compressor Hose Into Valve Do not operate the air compressor for a 10 minutes or 3 miles (5 km), connect continuous 10 minutes or longer because the air compressor to the tire using 18. Insert the air compressor plug into using it for long periods could cause a step nine of the procedure, and check the accessory socket inside the vehicle malfunction. the tire inflation pressure using the tire and cycle the ignition to ACC. Note: If the tire has been over pressure gauge on the air compressor. 19. Turn the air compressor switch on inflated, loosen the screw cap on the air If the tire inflation pressure is lower and inflate the tire carefully to the compressor and bleed some of the air than the specified tire inflation correct inflation pressure. For the out. pressure, turn the air compressor on correct pressure, check the tire inflation and wait until it reaches the specified pressure label on the driver's door tire inflation pressure; frame. 20. When the tire inflates to the specified tire inflation pressure, turn the The emergency flat tire repair is Note: When inserting the air air compressor switch off, turn the completed successfully if the tire compressor plug into or removing it sleeve of the air compressor hose to inflation pressure does not decrease. from the accessory socket, make sure the left, and pull it out of the tire valve. Carefully drive the vehicle to the that the air compressor switch is off. nearest authorized dealer and have the When turning the air compressor on/off, 21. Install the tire valve cap. flat tire replaced. Replacement with a use the air compressor switch. Before new tire is recommended. If the tire is 22. Place the Tire Service Kit back into to be repaired or reused, contact your checking the tire inflation pressure using its storage location. the tire pressure gauge, turn the air authorized dealer. compressor switch off. 23. Start driving immediately to spread the sealant in the tire.

219 If an emergency flat tire repair has JUMP STARTING been performed using the Tire Service Kit, FCA recommends that the tire be Preparations For Jump replaced with a new one as soon as Starting possible. If the tire is to be repaired or If the battery is discharged, a jump reused, contact your authorized dealer. starting procedure can be performed The tire can be reused if the sealant using the battery and the cables of adhering to it is removed. However, another vehicle, or using a booster replace the valve with a new one. battery. Jump starting is dangerous if done Replacing The Bottle incorrectly, so follow the procedure in Note: The tire sealant has a period of this section carefully. If you feel unsure effective use. Check the period of about jump starting, it is strongly effective use indicated on the bottle recommended that you have a label and do not use it if it has expired. competent service technician do the Have the tire sealant replaced at your work. IN CASE OF EMERGENCY authorized dealer before the period of Note: When a booster battery is being effective use has expired. used, comply with the utilization and Inspect the Tire Service Kit at regular precaution instructions specified by the intervals as well as the operation of the manufacturer. tire compressor. 08030100121001 Jump Start Locations

Warning!

Do not attempt jump starting if the battery is frozen. It could rupture or explode and cause personal injury.

220 5. Connect the opposite end of the positive jumper cable to the positive Caution! terminal on the booster battery. 6. Connect the negative end of the Do not use a portable battery booster pack negative jumper cable to the negative or any other booster source with a system voltage greater than 12 Volts or damage to terminal of the booster battery. the battery, starter motor, alternator or 7. Connect the opposite end of the electrical system may occur. negative jumper cable to a good engine ground of the vehicle with the Jump Starting discharged battery (exposed metal part 08030100-122-001 Procedure Positive Terminal Cover of the engine) away from the battery and the fuel injection system. 2. Make sure the booster battery is 12 Volts and that the negative terminal 8. Start the engine of the booster Warning! is grounded. vehicle and run it a few minutes. Then start the engine of the other vehicle. 3. Make sure the engine of the vehicle Failure to follow this jump starting with the booster battery is OFF and all 9. Once the engine is started, remove procedure could result in personal injury or unnecessary electrical loads in both the jumper cables in the reverse property damage due to battery explosion. vehicles. sequence. 10. Replace the positive terminal cover. Caution! Warning! Make sure cover is secure. Bump Starting

Failure to follow these procedures could Do not allow vehicles to touch each other Never jump start the engine by pushing, result in damage to the charging system of as this could establish a ground towing or coasting downhill. the booster vehicle or the discharged connection and personal injury could vehicle. result. Note: You cannot start a vehicle with an To jump start the vehicle, follow this 4. Connect the positive end of the automatic transmission by pushing it. procedure: jumper cable to the positive terminal on Do not push-start a vehicle that has the discharged battery. 1. Remove the positive terminal cover. a manual transmission. It can damage the emission control system.

221 Starting A Flooded IF YOUR ENGINE Engine OVERHEATS Warning! If the engine fails to start, it may be If Your Engine Overheats flooded (excessive fuel in the engine). In any of the following situations, you You or others can be badly burned by hot Follow this procedure: can reduce the potential for overheating engine coolant (antifreeze) or steam from 1. If the engine does not start within by taking the appropriate action. your radiator. If you see or hear steam 5 seconds on the first try, wait coming from under the hood, do not open On highways — slow down. the hood until the radiator has had time to 10 seconds and try again. cool. Never try to open a cooling system In city traffic — while stopped, place 2. Make sure the parking brake is on. pressure cap when the radiator or coolant the transmission in NEUTRAL, but do bottle is hot. 3. Press the accelerator all the way and not increase engine idle speed. hold it there. Note: There are steps that you can 4. Press the clutch pedal (manual take to slow down an impending Caution! transmission) or the brake pedal overheat condition: IN CASE OF EMERGENCY (automatic transmission), then push the If your air conditioner (A/C) is on, Driving with a hot cooling system could push button start. If the engine starts, turn it off. The A/C system adds heat damage your vehicle. If temperature gauge release the accelerator immediately to the engine cooling system and reads “H”, pull over and stop the vehicle. because the engine will suddenly rev turning the A/C off can help remove Idle the vehicle with the air conditioner up. this heat. turned off until the pointer drops back into the normal range. If the pointer remains on 5. If the engine fails to start, crank it You can also turn the temperature the “H”, turn the engine off immediately, without pressing the accelerator. control to maximum heat, the mode and call for service. If the engine still does not start using control to floor and the blower control the above procedure, have your vehicle to high. This allows the heater core to If Steam Is Coming From The inspected an authorized dealer. act as a supplement to the radiator Engine Compartment: and aids in removing heat from the engine cooling system. Do not go near the front of the vehicle. Stop the engine. Wait until the steam dissipates, then open the hood and start the engine. If Neither Coolant Nor Steam Is Escaping: Open the hood and idle the engine until it cools.

222 Note: TOWING THE If the cooling fan does not operate VEHICLE Caution! while the engine is running, the engine Attaching The Tow Eyes temperature will increase. Stop the — If Equipped engine and contact your authorized The tow eye must be used exclusively dealer. for roadside assistance operations. Only use the tow eye with an appropriate device If the engine continues to overheat Warning! in accordance with the highway code (a or frequently overheats, have the rigid bar or rope) to flat tow the vehicle for cooling system inspected. The engine a short distance to the nearest service could be seriously damaged unless Stand clear of vehicles when pulling with location. tow eyes. repairs are made. Contact your Tow eyes MUST NOT be used to tow Do not use a chain with a tow eye. authorized dealer. vehicles off the road or where there are Chains may break, causing serious injury or obstacles. death. Do not use a tow strap with a tow eye. In compliance with the above Tow straps may break or become conditions, towing with a tow eye must disengaged, causing serious injury or take place with two vehicles (one towing, death. the other towed) aligned as much as possible along the same center line. Failure to follow proper tow eye usage Damage to your vehicle may occur if these may cause components to break resulting guidelines are not followed. in serious injury or death. When towing, only use a facility that can tow vehicles with low ground clearances as extensive damage can result by using a standard tow truck platform.

Proceed as follows: 1. Remove the towing eyelet and the lug wrench from the luggage compartment.

223 2. Wrap a flathead screwdriver or similar 3. Securely install the tow eye in front tool with a soft cloth to prevent damage or rear using the lug wrench or Caution! to a painted bumper, and open the cap equivalent. located on the front or rear bumper. Tow eyes are for emergency use only, to rescue a vehicle stranded off road. Do not use tow eyes for tow truck hookup or highway towing. You could damage your vehicle.

When using the tow eyes, always pull the lead or chain in a straight direction with respect to the eyelet. Never apply a sideways force. 08060201-121-001AB 08060203-121-001AB Installing Front Towing Eye Note: Follow the precautions below to

IN CASE OF EMERGENCY Front Bumper Cap Location avoid damage to the towing eyelet and 1— Front Bumper Cap towing hook, vehicle body, or transmission system when towing: Do not tow a vehicle heavier than yours. Do not suddenly accelerate your vehicle as it will apply a severe shock to the tow eye and towing hook or rope.

08060201-122-001AB Do not attach any rope other than Installing Rear Tow Eye to the tow eye and towing hook. 4. Hook the towing rope to the tow

08060203-122-001AB eye. Rear Bumper Cap Location Note: Do not use excessive force as it may damage the cap or scratch the painted bumper surface. Remove the cap completely and store it so as not to lose it. 224 Emergency Towing If towing service is not available in an EVENT DATA emergency, the vehicle may be towed Towing Description RECORDER (EDR) with all four wheels on the ground using Proper lifting and towing are necessary the towing hook at the front of the This vehicle is equipped with an Event to prevent damage to the vehicle. vehicle. Only tow the vehicle on paved Data Recorder (EDR). The main Government and local laws must be surfaces for short distances at low purpose of an EDR is to record data followed. speeds. that will assist in understanding how a vehicle’s systems performed under A towed vehicle usually should have its Follow these instructions when towing certain crash or near crash-like drive wheels (rear wheels) OFF of the the vehicle with all wheels on the situations, such as an air bag ground. If excessive damage or other ground: conditions prevent this, use wheel deployment or hitting a road obstacle. dollies. 1. Shift to NEUTRAL for manual Please refer to “Occupant Restraint When towing with the rear wheels on transmission or automatic transmission. Systems” in “Safety” for further information on the Event Data Recorder the ground, release the parking brake. 2. Place the ignition in ACC mode. (EDR). 3. Release the parking brake. Caution! Note: Remember that power assist for the brakes and steering will not be DO NOT use sling-type equipment when available when the engine is not towing. When securing the vehicle to a running. flatbed truck, do not attach to front or rear suspension components. Damage to your vehicle may result from improper towing.

225 SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE

INTRODUCTION...... 227 ENGINE COMPARTMENT ...... 234 BATTERY RECHARGING ...... 238 MAINTENANCE PROCEDURES. . .238 RAISING THE VEHICLE ...... 241 WHEELS AND TIRES...... 241 DEPARTMENT OF TRANSPORTATION UNIFORM TIRE QUALITY GRADES...... 256 STORINGTHEVEHICLE...... 257 BODYWORK...... 257 INTERIORS ...... 263 SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE

226 INTRODUCTION Limited Warranty coverage Claims against the warranty resulting Be extremely careful and prevent injury disagreement occur. Failure to do so from lack of maintenance, as opposed to yourself and others or damage to can result in your New Vehicle Limited to defective materials or authorized FCA your vehicle when using this Owner’s Warranty being voided either in whole workmanship, will not be honored. Manual for inspection and maintenance. or in part. Any auto repair shop using parts If you are unsure about any procedure it This evidence may consist of the equivalent to your vehicle's original describes, we strongly urge you to have following: equipment may perform maintenance. But we recommend that it always be a reliable and qualified service shop The FCA Scheduled Maintenance done by an authorized dealer using perform the work, preferably at your Record, refer to the Warranty Booklet, genuine FCA parts. Selecting authorized dealer. must be completely filled out showing “Maintenance Monitor” enables the Factory-trained FCA technicians and mileage, repair order number, date for system to notify you of your vehicle's genuine FCA parts are best for your each service, and signed by a qualified approaching inspection/servicing vehicle. Without this expertise and the automotive service technician who period. parts that have been designed and service vehicles. made especially for your vehicle, Owner Maintenance Original copies of repair orders or inadequate, incomplete, and insufficient Precautions other receipts that include the mileage servicing may result in problems. This and date the vehicle was serviced. The owner or a qualified service could lead to vehicle damage or an Each receipt should be signed by a technician should make these vehicle accident and injuries. qualified automotive service technician. inspections at the indicated intervals to For expert advice and quality service, ensure safe and dependable operation. contact your authorized dealer. For self maintenance, a statement Bring any problem to the attention of an Note: Under no circumstances should that you completed the maintenance yourself, displaying mileage and the authorized dealer or qualified service oil change intervals exceed 10,000 technician as soon as possible. miles (16,000 kilometers) or 1 year. date the work was performed. Also, receipts for the replacement parts (fluid, To continue New Vehicle Limited When refueling perform inspection filters, etc.) indicating the date and of: Warranty eligibility and to protect your mileage must accompany this investment, it is your responsibility to statement. Brake and clutch fluid level properly maintain your vehicle according to factory recommended Note: If you elect to perform Engine coolant level maintenance yourself or have your schedules outlined in this Owner’s Engine oil level Manual. As part of this you must keep vehicle serviced at a location other than your maintenance records, receipts, an authorized dealer, FCA requires that Washer fluid level all fluids, parts and materials must meet repair orders and any other documents At least monthly perform inspection FCA standards for durability and as evidence this maintenance was of: performance as described in this performed. You must present these Tire inflation pressures documents, should any New Vehicle Owner’s Manual. 227 At least twice a year (for example, (headlights, direction indicators, hazard Visually inspect conditions of the: every spring and fall) perform warning lights, etc.). engine, transmission, lines and hoses inspection of: (exhaust/fuel system/brakes) and Operation of windshield rubber elements (hoses/belts/etc.). Engine coolant washer/wiper system and positioning/wear of windshield wiper Check battery charge and battery Engine oil blades. fluid level. As explained in the “Introduction” Every 1860 miles (3,000 km) check paragraph, several procedures can be Visually inspect conditions of the and top off the engine oil level if done only by a qualified service accessory drive belts. required. technician with special tools. Check and, if necessary, change For details, read the separate Warranty Heavy-Duty Use Of The engine oil and replace oil filter. Booklet provided with the vehicle. If you Vehicle are unsure about any servicing or If the vehicle is used under one of the Check and, if necessary, replace maintenance procedure, have it done following conditions: cabin air filter. by an authorized dealer. Dusty roads. Check and, if necessary, replace air There are strict environmental laws cleaner. regarding the disposal of waste oil and Short, repeated trips less than 4.4 - Severe Duty All Models 5 miles (7-8km)atsub-zero outside fluids. Please dispose of your waste Change Engine Oil at 4,000 miles temperatures. properly and with due regard to the (6,500 km) if the vehicle is operated in a

SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE environment. Engine idling for long periods of time dusty and off road environment or is We recommend that you entrust the oil or driving long distances at low speeds operated predominately at idle or only and fluid changes of your vehicle to an or long periods of inactivity. very low engine RPM’s. This type of authorized dealer. The following checks must be carried vehicle use is considered Severe Duty. Periodic Checks out more often than indicated in the Every 620 miles (1,000 km) or before Scheduled Servicing Plan: long trips check and, if necessary, top Check front disc brake pad condition off: and wear. Engine coolant level. Check cleanliness of underhood area Brake fluid level. and all door and trunk locks, cleanliness and lubrication of linkage. Windshield washer fluid level. Tire inflation pressure and condition. Operation of lighting system 228 Scheduled Servicing Plan

Mileage or time passed (whichever comes first) 10,000 20,000 30,000 40,000 50,000 60,000 70,000 80,000 90,000 100,000 110,000 120,000 130,000 140,000 150,000

Or Years: 123456789101112131415

Or Kilometers: 16,000 32,000 48,000 64,000 80,000 96,000 112,000 128,000 144,000 160,000 176,000 192,000 208,000 224,000 240,000

Check tire condition/wear and adjust pressure, if necessary, check TIREKIT ••••••••••••••• expiration date (if provided). Check operation of lighting system (headlamps, direction indicators, hazard warning lights, luggage ••••••••••••••• compartment, passenger compartment, glove compartment, instrument panel warning lights, etc.). Check and, if necessary, top up fluid levels (brakes/hydraulic clutch, ••••••••••••••• windshield washer, battery, engine coolant, etc.).

229 Mileage or time passed (whichever comes first) 10,000 20,000 30,000 40,000 50,000 60,000 70,000 80,000 90,000 100,000 110,000 120,000 130,000 140,000 150,000

Or Years: 123456789101112131415

Or Kilometers: 16,000 32,000 48,000 64,000 80,000 96,000 112,000 128,000 144,000 160,000 176,000 192,000 208,000 224,000 240,000

Check engine control system operation (via ••••••••••••••• diagnostic tool). Visually inspect condition of: exterior bodywork, underbody protection, pipes and hoses (exhaust - ••••• • • fuel system - brakes), SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE rubber elements (boots, sleeves, bushings, etc.). Visually inspect conditions of steering elements and ••••• • • check their operation. Check the front and rear suspension, tie rods, CV ••••• • • Joints, and replace if necessary. Check endfloat of wheel ••••• • • bearings.

230 Mileage or time passed (whichever comes first) 10,000 20,000 30,000 40,000 50,000 60,000 70,000 80,000 90,000 100,000 110,000 120,000 130,000 140,000 150,000

Or Years: 123456789101112131415

Or Kilometers: 16,000 32,000 48,000 64,000 80,000 96,000 112,000 128,000 144,000 160,000 176,000 192,000 208,000 224,000 240,000

Check windshield/rear window wiper blade •• ••• • • • position/wear. Check operation of windshield washer system •• ••• • • • and adjust jets if necessary. Check cleanliness of hood and trunk locks and •• ••• • • • cleanliness and lubrication of linkages. Check parking brake lever travel and adjust, if ••••••••••••••• necessary. Visually check the condition and wear of the ••••••••••••••• front and rear brakes. Visually inspect condition of evaporation control ••• • • system. 231 Mileage or time passed (whichever comes first) 10,000 20,000 30,000 40,000 50,000 60,000 70,000 80,000 90,000 100,000 110,000 120,000 130,000 140,000 150,000

Or Years: 123456789101112131415

Or Kilometers: 16,000 32,000 48,000 64,000 80,000 96,000 112,000 128,000 144,000 160,000 176,000 192,000 208,000 224,000 240,000

Visual inspect the condition and tensioning of •• • the accessory drive belt. Replace the accessory • drive belt. **** Inspect and replace PCV • valve if necessary. SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE Change engine oil and In accordance with Oil Change Indicator System OR Severe Duty Mileage, whichever occurs first. replace oil filter.* Replace spark plugs (1.4L ••• • • Turbo engine).**

****Replace belt every 40,000 miles (60,000 km) for use on dusty roads. *The oil and oil filter replacement must be carried out when indicated by a warning light or message on the instrument panel, or in any case should not exceed one year. **The spark plug change is distance based only, yearly intervals do not apply. The following are essential to ensure correct operation and prevent serious damage to the engine: Only use spark plugs of the same make and type which are specially certified for such engines (refer to “Engine” in “Technical Specifications” for further information). Strictly comply with the spark plug replacement interval given in the scheduled servicing plan for spark plug replacement. Contact your authorized dealer if you have any questions. 232 Mileage or time passed (whichever comes first) 10,000 20,000 30,000 40,000 50,000 60,000 70,000 80,000 90,000 100,000 110,000 120,000 130,000 140,000 150,000

Or Years: 123456789101112131415

Or Kilometers: 16,000 32,000 48,000 64,000 80,000 96,000 112,000 128,000 144,000 160,000 176,000 192,000 208,000 224,000 240,000

Replace engine air filter.# ••• • • Flush and replace the engine coolant at 10 years or 150,000 miles •• (240,000 km) whichever comes first. Replace the timing belt • (1.4L Turbo Engine).

#The engine air cleaner should be inspected at every oil change if used in dusty areas.

Warning!

You can be badly injured working on or around a motor vehicle. Do only service work for which you have the knowledge and the right equipment. If you have any doubt about your ability to perform a service job, take your vehicle to a competent mechanic. Failure to properly inspect and maintain your vehicle could result in a component malfunction and effect vehicle handling and performance. This could cause an accident.

233 ENGINE COMPARTMENT Checking Levels SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE

07030300-121-003 1 — Window Washer Reservoir 4 — Engine Coolant Reservoir 2 — Engine Oil Dipstick 5 — Brake/Clutch Fluid Reservoir 3 — Engine Oil Cap 6 — Battery

234 Engine Oil Engine Coolant

Warning! Warning!

Be very careful when working in the Turn vehicle off and disconnect the fan engine compartment when the engine is motor lead before working near the radiator hot: you may get burned. cooling fan. Do not get too close to the radiator You or others can be badly burned by cooling fan: the electric fan may start; hot engine coolant (antifreeze) or steam 07030403-121-001 danger of injury. Engine Compartment from your radiator. If you see or hear steam coming from under the hood, do not open Loose clothing might be pulled by the hood until the radiator has had time to moving parts. 1 — Engine Oil Dipstick 2 — Engine Oil Cap cool. Never open a cooling system pressure cap when the radiator or coolant Recommended Oil bottle is hot. Refer to “Fluids And Lubricants” in 5. Pull the dipstick out again and Keep hands, tools, clothing, and jewelry “Technical Specifications” for further examine the level. The level is normal if away from the radiator cooling fan when information. it is between Low and Full. If it is near the hood is raised. The fan starts or below Low, open the engine oil Inspecting engine oil level automatically and may start at any time, cap/filler 2 and add enough oil to bring whether the engine is running or not. Proceed as follows: the level to Full. When working near the radiator cooling 1. Be sure the vehicle is on a level Note: Do not overfill the engine oil. fan, disconnect the fan motor lead or turn surface. This may cause engine damage. the ignition to the OFF mode. The fan is temperature controlled and can start at any 2. Warm up the engine to normal 6. Make sure the O-ring on the dipstick time the ignition is in the ON mode. operating temperature. is positioned properly before reinserting You or others can be badly burned by 3. Turn it off and wait at least five the dipstick. hot engine coolant (antifreeze) or steam from your radiator. If you see or hear steam minutes for the oil to return to the 7. Reinsert the dipstick fully. sump. coming from under the hood, do not open Engine Oil Consumption the hood until the radiator has had time to 4. Pull out the dipstick, wipe it clean, cool. Never try to open a cooling system During the initial period of use the pressure cap when the radiator is hot. and reinsert it fully. engine oil consumption conditions should stabilize after the first 3000 – 3500 miles (5000 – 6000 km). 235 Inspecting Coolant Level It should be kept between the MAX Note: Changing the coolant should be and MIN lines. done by your authorized dealer. The level normally drops with Inspect the antifreeze protection and accumulated use, a condition coolant level in the coolant reservoir at associated with wear of brake and least once a year, at the beginning of clutch linings. If it is excessively low, the winter season, and before traveling have the brake/clutch system where temperatures may drop below inspected. Contact your authorized freezing. dealer. Inspect the condition and connections of all cooling system and heater hoses. 07030501-121-001 Replace any that are worn or Coolant Reservoir deteriorated. If it is at or near L (Low), add coolant by mixing a minimum solution of 50% Mopar Long Life Coolant Concentrate Warning! for FIAT Spider. Use higher concentrations (not to exceed 70%) if temperatures below −34°F (−37°C) are Do not open hot engine cooling system. anticipated. Bring the level to F (Full). Never add engine coolant (antifreeze) when SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE Please contact your authorized dealer the engine is overheated. Do not loosen or 07030601-121-002 remove the cap to cool an overheated for assistance. Brake Fluid Reservoir engine. Heat causes pressure to build up in Securely tighten the coolant reservoir the cooling system. To prevent scalding or tank cap after adding coolant. injury, do not remove the pressure cap If the coolant reservoir is empty or new Warning! while the system is hot or under pressure. coolant is required frequently, contact Do not use a pressure cap other than your authorized dealer. the one specified for your vehicle. Personal Use only manufacturer's recommended injury or engine damage may result. Brake/Clutch Fluid brake fluid. Refer to “Fluids And Lubricants” in “Technical Specifications” for further Inspecting Brake/Clutch Fluid Level information. Using the wrong type of brake The coolant should be at full in the The brakes and clutch draw fluid fluid can severely damage your brake system and/or impair its performance. The radiator and between the F (Full) and L from the same reservoir. (Low) marks on the coolant reservoir proper type of brake fluid for your vehicle is when the engine is cool. Inspect the fluid level in the reservoir also identified on the original factory regularly. installed hydraulic master cylinder reservoir.

236 To avoid contamination from foreign Rinse off spilled electrolyte matter or moisture, use only new brake immediately with a solution of water fluid or fluid that has been in a tightly and baking soda. closed container. Keep the master cylinder If the vehicle will not be used for an reservoir cap secured at all times. Brake fluid in a open container absorbs moisture extended time, disconnect the battery from the air resulting in a lower boiling leads and charge the battery every six point. This may cause it to boil weeks. unexpectedly during hard or prolonged Battery Replacement braking, resulting in sudden brake failure. This could result in a collision. Contact your authorized dealer to purchase a replacement battery. Overfilling the brake fluid reservoir can 07030901-121-001 result in spilling brake fluid on hot engine Windshield Washer Fluid Reservoir parts, causing the brake fluid to catch fire. Warning! Brake fluid can also damage painted and Use plain water if washer fluid is vinyl surfaces, care should be taken to unavailable. But use only washer fluid in avoid its contact with these surfaces. cold weather to prevent it from freezing. Battery fluid is a corrosive acid solution Do not allow petroleum based fluid to Automatic Transmission and can burn or even blind you. Do not contaminate the brake fluid. Brake seal Control Unit allow battery fluid to contact your eyes, components could be damaged, causing skin, or clothing. Do not lean over a battery partial or complete brake failure. This could The transmission oil level should only be when attaching clamps. If acid splashes in result in a collision. checked at your authorized dealer. eyes or on skin, flush the area immediately with large amounts of water. Refer to Battery Maintenance “Jump Starting Procedure” in “In Case Of Windshield And To get the best service from a battery: Emergency” for further information. Headlight Washer Fluid Keep it securely mounted. Battery gas is flammable and explosive. Inspecting Washer Fluid Level Keep flame or sparks away from the Keep the top clean and dry. Inspect fluid level in the washer fluid battery. Do not use a booster battery or reservoir, open the cap and add fluid if Keep terminals and connections any other booster source with an output clean, tight, and coated with petroleum greater than 12 Volts. Do not allow cable necessary. clamps to touch each other. jelly or terminal grease. Battery posts, terminals, and related accessories contain lead and lead compounds. Wash hands after handling.

237 BATTERY MAINTENANCE RECHARGING Caution! PROCEDURES BATTERY CHARGING The following pages contain PROCEDURE instructions on the required It is essential when replacing the cables maintenance from the technical on the battery that the positive cable is personnel who designed the vehicle. attached to the positive post and the In addition to these specific Warning! negative cable is attached to the negative post. Battery posts are marked positive (+) maintenance instructions specified for and negative (-) and are identified on the routine scheduled servicing, there are Battery fluid is a corrosive acid solution battery case. Cable clamps should be tight other components which may require and can burn or even blind you. Do not on the terminal posts and free of corrosion. periodic maintenance or replacement allow battery fluid to contact your eyes, over the vehicle’s life cycle. If a “fast charger” is used while the skin, or clothing. Do not lean over a battery battery is in the vehicle, disconnect both when attaching clamps. If acid splashes in Body Lubrication vehicle battery cables before connecting eyes or on skin, flush the area immediately Ensure that the locks and bodywork the charger to the battery. Do not use a with large amounts of water. Refer to “fast charger” to provide starting voltage. junction points, including components “Jump Starting Procedure” in “In Case Of such as the seat guides, door hinges Emergency” for further information. (and rollers), trunk and hood are Battery gas is flammable and explosive. Charge battery as follows: periodically lubricated with lithium Keep flame or sparks away from the based grease to ensure correct, silent

SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE Before recharging the battery, turn off battery. Do not use a booster battery or all accessories and turn the engine off operation and to protect them from rust any other booster source with an output and wear. greater than 12 Volts. Do not allow cable by placing the ignition in the OFF mode. clamps to touch each other. Thoroughly clean the components, Disconnect the negative battery eliminating every trace of dirt and dust. Battery posts, terminals, and related cable. After lubricating, eliminate excess oil accessories contain lead and lead Connect the charger cables to the and grease. Also pay particular compounds. Wash hands after handling. battery terminals, observing the polarity attention to the hood closing devices, (+,–). to ensure correct operation. Turn on the charger. During operations on the hood, be sure to perform with the engine cold, also When finished, turn the charger off remember to check, clean and lubricate before disconnecting the battery. the locking, release and safety devices. Reconnect the negative battery Make sure the hood's secondary latch terminal. keeps the hood from opening when the primary latch is released.

238 Lubricate the external lock cylinders Note: Blade Replacement twice a year. Apply a small amount of Hot waxes applied by automatic car Proceed as follows: high-quality lubricant directly into the washers have been known to affect lock cylinder. If necessary, contact your 1. Raise the wiper arm. the wiper's ability to clean windows. authorized dealer. 2. Open the clip and slide the blade To prevent damage to the wiper Wiper Blades assembly in the direction of the arrow. blades, do not use gas, paraffin, paint Contamination of either the windshield thinner, or other solvents on or near or the blades with foreign matter can them. reduce wiper effectiveness. Common sources are insects, tree sap, and hot Be careful not to pinch hands or wax treatments used by some fingers as it may cause injury, or commercial car washes. damage the wipers. When washing or If the blades are not wiping properly, servicing the vehicle, make sure the clean the window and blades with a wiper lever is in the OFF position. good cleaner or mild detergent; then Replacing Windshield Wiper Blades rinse thoroughly with clean water. When the wipers no longer clean well, Repeat if necessary. the blades are probably worn or 07031101-36A-001 When the wiper lever is in the AUTO cracked. Replace them. Clip position and the ignition is placed in the When raising both windshield wiper ON mode, the wipers may move arms, raise the driver's side wiper arm automatically in the following cases: first. If the windshield above the rain When lowering the wiper arms, slowly sensor is touched. lower the wiper arm from the passenger's side first while supporting If the windshield above the rain it with your hand. Forcefully lowering sensor is wiped with a cloth. the wiper arms could damage the wiper If the windshield is struck with a hand arm and blade, and may scratch or or other object. crack the windshield. If the rain sensor is struck with a Note: To prevent damage to the wiper hand or other object from inside the arms and other components, do not try vehicle. to sweep the wiper arm by hand.

239 3. Tilt the blade assembly and remove 4. Pull down the blade rubber and slide 6. Carefully insert the new blade it from the arm. it out of blade holder. rubber. Then install the blade assembly in the reverse order of removal.

07031101-36A-002 07031101-36A-003 Blade Assembly and Arm Blade Holder 07031101-36A-005 Reassemble Blade 5. Remove the metal stiffeners from each blade rubber and install them in Warning! the new blade.

To prevent damage to the windshield let SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE the wiper arm down easily, do not let it slap down on the windshield.

07031101-36A-004 Metal Stiffeners

240 RAISING THE WHEELS AND TIRES Note: VEHICLE Tire Safety Information P (Passenger) — Metric tire sizing is based on U.S. design standards. If the vehicle needs to be raised, see an Tire safety information will cover authorized dealer which is equipped P-Metric tires have the letter “P” aspects of the following information: molded into the sidewall preceding the with arm hoists or workshop lifts. Tire Markings, Tire Identification The vehicle’s lifting points are marked size designation. Example: Numbers, Tire Terminology and P215/65R15 95H. on the side skirts with the symbols. Definitions, Tire Pressures, and Tire Loading. European — Metric tire sizing is based on European design standards. Tire Markings Tires designed to this standard have the tire size molded into the sidewall beginning with the section width. The letter "P" is absent from this tire size designation. Example: 215/ 65R15 96H. LT (Light Truck) — Metric tire sizing is based on U.S. design standards. The size designation for LT-Metric tires is the same as for P-Metric tires except 0601085395US for the letters “LT” that are molded into Tire Markings the sidewall preceding the size designation. Example: LT235/85R16. 1 — U.S. DOT 4 — Maximum Safety Standards Load Temporary spare tires are designed Code (TIN) for temporary emergency use only. 2 — Size 5 — Maximum Temporary high pressure compact spare tires have the letter “T” or “S” Designation Pressure molded into the sidewall preceding the 3 — Service 6 — Treadwear, size designation. Example: Description Traction and T145/80D18 103M. Temperature High flotation tire sizing is based on Grades U.S. design standards and it begins with the tire diameter molded into the sidewall. Example: 31x10.5 R15 LT.

241 Tire Sizing Chart

EXAMPLE: Example Size Designation: P215/65R15XL 95H, 215/65R15 96H, LT235/85R16C, T145/80D18 103M, 31x10.5 R15 LT P = Passenger car tire size based on U.S. design standards, or "....blank...." = Passenger car tire based on European design standards, or LT = Light truck tire based on U.S. design standards, or TorS= Temporary spare tire or 31 = Overall diameter in inches (in) 215, 235, 145 = Section width in millimeters (mm) 65, 85, 80 = Aspect ratio in percent (%) Ratio of section height to section width of tire, or 10.5 = Section width in inches (in) R = Construction code SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE "R" means radial construction, or "D" means diagonal or bias construction 15, 16, 18 = Rim diameter in inches (in) Service Description: 95 = Load Index A numerical code associated with the maximum load a tire can carry H = Speed Symbol A symbol indicating the range of speeds at which a tire can carry a load corresponding to its load index under certain operating conditions The maximum speed corresponding to the speed symbol should only be achieved under specified operating conditions (i.e., tire pressure, vehicle loading, road conditions, and posted speed limits)

242 EXAMPLE: Load Identification: Absence of the following load identification symbols on the sidewall of the tire indicates a Standard Load (SL) tire: XL = Extra load (or reinforced) tire, or LL = Light load tire or C, D, E, F, G = Load range associated with the maximum load a tire can carry at a specified pressure Maximum Load – Maximum load indicates the maximum load this tire is designed to carry Maximum Pressure – Maximum pressure indicates the maximum permissible cold tire inflation pressure for this tire

Tire Identification Number (TIN) white sidewalls will have the full TIN, vehicle. If the TIN is not found on the including the date code, located on the outboard side, then you will find it on The TIN may be found on one or both white sidewall side of the tire. Look for the inboard side of the tire. sides of the tire; however, the date code the TIN on the outboard side of black may only be on one side. Tires with sidewall tires as mounted on the

EXAMPLE: DOT MA L9 ABCD 0301 DOT = Department of Transportation This symbol certifies that the tire is in compliance with the U.S. Department of Transportation tire safety standards and is approved for highway use MA = Code representing the tire manufacturing location (two digits) L9 = Code representing the tire size (two digits) ABCD = Code used by the tire manufacturer (one to four digits) 03 = Number representing the week in which the tire was manufactured (two digits) 03 means the 3rd week

243 EXAMPLE: 01 = Number representing the year in which the tire was manufactured (two digits) 01 means the year 2001 Prior to July 2000, tire manufacturers were only required to have one number to represent the year in which the tire was manufactured. Example: 031 could represent the 3rd week of 1981 or 1991 Tire Terminology And Definitions

Term Definition The vehicle B-Pillar is the structural member of the body located behind the front B-Pillar door. Cold tire inflation pressure is defined as the tire pressure after the vehicle has not been driven for at least three hours, or driven less than 1 mile (1.6 km) after sitting Cold Tire Inflation Pressure for a minimum of three hours. Inflation pressure is measured in units of PSI (pounds per square inch) or kPa (kilopascals). The maximum inflation pressure is the maximum permissible cold tire inflation Maximum Inflation Pressure SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE pressure for this tire. The maximum inflation pressure is molded into the sidewall. Vehicle manufacturer's recommended cold tire inflation pressure as shown on the Recommended Cold Tire Inflation Pressure tire placard. A label permanently attached to the vehicle describing the vehicle’s loading Tire Placard capacity, the original equipment tire sizes and the recommended cold tire inflation pressures.

244 Tire Loading And Tire Pressure Tire And Loading Information Note: Under a maximum loaded Note: The proper cold tire inflation Placard vehicle condition, gross axle weight pressure is listed on the driver’s side ratings (GAWRs) for the front and rear B-Pillar or the rear edge of the driver's axles must not be exceeded. side door. For further information on GAWRs, vehicle loading, and trailer towing, refer Check the inflation pressure of each to “Vehicle Loading” in the “Starting tire, including the spare tire (if And Operating” section of this manual. equipped), at least monthly and inflate To determine the maximum loading to the recommended pressure for your conditions of your vehicle, locate the vehicle. statement “The combined weight of GUID-054900418-high.tif occupants and cargo should never Tire And Loading Information exceed XXX kg or XXX lbs” on the Tire Placard and Loading Information placard. The This placard tells you important combined weight of occupants, information about the: cargo/luggage and trailer tongue weight (if applicable) should never exceed the 1. Number of people that can be weight referenced here. carried in the vehicle. Steps For Determining Correct

0806115150US 2. Total weight your vehicle can carry. Load Limit— Example Tire Placard Location 3. Tire size designed for your vehicle. (1) Locate the statement “The (Door) combined weight of occupants and 4. Cold tire inflation pressures for the front, rear, and spare tires. cargo should never exceed XXX kg or XXX lbs.” on your vehicle's Loading placard. The vehicle maximum load on the tire (2) Determine the combined weight must not exceed the load carrying of the driver and passengers that capacity of the tire on your vehicle. You will be riding in your vehicle. will not exceed the tire's load carrying capacity if you adhere to the loading (3) Subtract the combined weight of 0806115151US conditions, tire size, and cold tire the driver and passengers from XXX Example Tire Placard Location inflation pressures specified on the Tire kg or XXX lbs. (B-Pillar) and Loading Information placard in “Vehicle Loading” in the “Starting And Operating” section of this manual. 245 (4) The resulting figure equals the Metric Example For Load Limit available amount of cargo and For example, if “XXX” amount equals luggage load capacity. For 635 kg and there will be five 68 kg example, if “XXX” amount equals passengers in your vehicle, the amount of available cargo and luggage load 1400 lbs. and there will be five capacity is 295 kg (635-340 (5x68) = 150 lb passengers in your vehicle, 295 kg) as shown in step 4. the amount of available cargo and Note: luggage load capacity is 650 lbs. (1400-750 (5x150) = 650 lbs.) If your vehicle will be towing a trailer, load from your trailer will be transferred (5) Determine the combined weight to your vehicle. The following table of luggage and cargo being loaded shows examples on how to calculate on the vehicle. That weight may not total load, cargo/luggage, and towing safely exceed the available cargo capacities of your vehicle with varying seating configurations and number and and luggage load capacity size of occupants. This table is for calculated in Step 4. illustration purposes only and may not (6) If your vehicle will be towing a be accurate for the seating and load carry capacity of your vehicle.

SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE trailer, load from your trailer will be transferred to your vehicle. Consult For the following example, the this manual to determine how this combined weight of occupants and reduces the available cargo and cargo should never exceed 865 lbs (392 kg). luggage load capacity of your vehicle.

246 GUID-054900419-high.tif

Warning!

Overloading of your tires is dangerous. Overloading can cause tire failure, affect vehicle handling, and increase your stopping distance. Use tires of the recommended load capacity for your vehicle. Never overload them.

247 Tires — General Unequal tire pressures from one side of Tire Inflation Pressures Information the vehicle to the other can cause the The proper cold tire inflation pressure is vehicle to drift to the right or left. Tire Pressure listed on the driver's side B-Pillar or rear Always drive with each tire inflated to edge of the driver's side door. Proper tire inflation pressure is essential the recommended cold tire inflation At least once a month: to the safe and satisfactory operation of pressure. your vehicle. Four primary areas are Check and adjust tire pressure with a affected by improper tire pressure: Both under-inflation and over-inflation good quality pocket-type pressure Safety and Vehicle Stability affect the stability of the vehicle and can gauge. Do not make a visual judgement produce a feeling of sluggish response when determining proper inflation. Tires Economy or over responsiveness in the steering. may look properly inflated even when Tread Wear they are under-inflated. Note: Ride Comfort Inspect tires for signs of tire wear or Unequal tire pressures from side to visible damage. Safety side may cause erratic and unpredictable steering response. Caution! Warning! Unequal tire pressure from side to side may cause the vehicle to drift left or right. After inspecting or adjusting the tire SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE Improperly inflated tires are dangerous Fuel Economy pressure, always reinstall the valve stem and can cause collisions. cap. This will prevent moisture and dirt Underinflated tires will increase tire Underinflation increases tire flexing and from entering the valve stem, which could can result in overheating and tire failure. rolling resistance resulting in higher fuel damage the valve stem. consumption. Overinflation reduces a tire's ability to Tread Wear cushion shock. Objects on the road and Inflation pressures specified on the chuckholes can cause damage that result Improper cold tire inflation pressures placard are always “cold tire inflation in tire failure. can cause abnormal wear patterns and pressure”. Cold tire inflation pressure is reduced tread life, resulting in the need Overinflated or underinflated tires can defined as the tire pressure after the affect vehicle handling and can fail for earlier tire replacement. vehicle has not been driven for at least suddenly, resulting in loss of vehicle Ride Comfort And Vehicle Stability three hours, or driven less than 1 mile control. Proper tire inflation contributes to a (1.6 km) after sitting for a minimum of Unequal tire pressures can cause comfortable ride. Over-inflation three hours. The cold tire inflation steering problems. You could lose control produces a jarring and uncomfortable pressure must not exceed the of your vehicle. ride. maximum inflation pressure molded into the tire sidewall. 248 Check tire pressures more often if Consult an authorized tire dealer for tire subject to a wide range of outdoor repairs and additional information. Warning! temperatures, as tire pressures vary Damaged Run Flat tires, or Run Flat with temperature changes. tires that have experienced a loss of Tire pressures change by approximately High speed driving with your vehicle under pressure should be replaced 1 psi (7 kPa) per 12°F (7°C) of air maximum load is dangerous. The added immediately with another Run Flat tire temperature change. Keep this in mind strain on your tires could cause them to of identical size and service description when checking tire pressure inside a fail. You could have a serious collision. Do (Load Index and Speed Symbol). garage, especially in the Winter. not drive a vehicle loaded to the maximum capacity at continuous speeds above Run Flat Tires — If Equipped Example: If garage temperature = 68°F 75 mph (120 km/h). (20°C) and the outside temperature = Run Flat tires allow you the capability to 32°F (0°C) then the cold tire inflation drive 50 miles (80 km) at 50 mph pressure should be increased by 3 psi Radial Ply Tires (80 km/h) after a rapid loss of inflation (21 kPa), which equals 1 psi (7 kPa) for pressure. This rapid loss of inflation is every 12°F (7°C) for this outside referred to as the Run Flat mode. A Run temperature condition. Warning! Flat mode occurs when the tire inflation Tire pressure may increase from 2 to pressure is of/or below 14 psi (96 kPa). Once a Run Flat tire reaches the run flat 6 psi (13 to 40 kPa) during operation. DO Combining radial ply tires with other types NOT reduce this normal pressure build of tires on your vehicle will cause your mode it has limited driving capabilities up or your tire pressure will be too low. vehicle to handle poorly. The instability and needs to be replaced immediately. could cause a collision. Always use radial A Run Flat tire is not repairable. Tire Pressures For High Speed ply tires in sets of four. Never combine It is not recommended driving a vehicle Operation them with other types of tires. loaded at full capacity or to tow a trailer The manufacturer advocates driving at while a tire is in the run flat mode. safe speeds and within posted speed Tire Repair See the tire pressure monitoring section limits. Where speed limits or conditions If your tire becomes damaged, it may for more information. are such that the vehicle can be driven at be repaired if it meets the following Tire Spinning high speeds, maintaining correct tire criteria: inflation pressure is very important. When stuck in mud, sand, snow, or ice The tire has not been driven on when Increased tire pressure and reduced conditions, do not spin your vehicle's flat. vehicle loading may be required for wheels above 30 mph (48 km/h) or for high-speed vehicle operation. Refer to The damage is only on the tread longer than 30 seconds continuously your authorized tire dealer or original section of your tire (sidewall damage is without stopping. equipment vehicle dealer for not repairable). recommended safe operating speeds, loading and cold tire inflation pressures. The puncture is no greater than a ¼ of an inch (6 mm). 249 becomes a 1/16 of an inch (1.6 mm). Keep dismounted tires in a cool, dry When the tread is worn to the tread place with as little exposure to light as Warning! wear indicators, the tire should be possible. Protect tires from contact with replaced. Refer to “Replacement Tires” oil, grease, and gasoline. Fast spinning tires can be dangerous. in this section for further information. Forces generated by excessive wheel Replacement Tires Life Of Tire speeds may cause tire damage or failure. A The tires on your new vehicle provide a tire could explode and injure someone. Do The service life of a tire is dependent balance of many characteristics. They not spin your vehicle's wheels faster than 30 mph (48 km/h) for more than upon varying factors including, but not should be inspected regularly for wear 30 seconds continuously when you are limited to: and correct cold tire inflation pressures. The manufacturer strongly recommends stuck, and do not let anyone near a Driving style. spinning wheel, no matter what the speed. that you use tires equivalent to the Tire pressure - Improper cold tire originals in size, quality and inflation pressures can cause uneven performance when replacement is Tread Wear Indicators wear patterns to develop across the tire needed. Refer to the paragraph on Tread wear indicators are in the original tread. These abnormal wear patterns “Tread Wear Indicators” in this section. equipment tires to help you in will reduce tread life, resulting in the Refer to the Tire and Loading determining when your tires should be need for earlier tire replacement. Information placard or the Vehicle Certification Label for the size replaced. Distance driven. designation of your tire. The Load Index SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE Performance tires, tires with a speed and Speed Symbol for your tire will be rating of V or higher, and Summer tires found on the original equipment tire typically have a reduced tread life. sidewall. Rotation of these tires per the vehicle See the Tire Sizing Chart example scheduled maintenance is highly found in the “Tire Safety Information” recommended. section of this manual for more information relating to the Load Index and Speed Symbol of a tire.

0806104865NA Warning! It is recommended to replace the two Tire Tread front tires or two rear tires as a pair. Replacing just one tire can seriously 1—WornTire Tires and the spare tire should be replaced 2—NewTire affect your vehicle’s handling. If you after six years, regardless of the remaining ever replace a wheel, make sure that tread. Failure to follow this warning can result in sudden tire failure. You could lose the wheel’s specifications match those These indicators are molded into the control and have a collision resulting in of the original wheels. bottom of the tread grooves. They will serious injury or death. appear as bands when the tread depth 250 It is recommended you contact your Summer tires do not contain the all authorized tire dealer or original season designation or mountain/ Caution! equipment dealer with any questions snowflake symbol on the tire sidewall. you may have on tire specifications or Use Summer tires only in sets of four; capability. Failure to use equivalent Replacing original tires with tires of a failure to do so may adversely affect the replacement tires may adversely affect different size may result in false safety and handling of your vehicle. the safety, handling, and ride of your speedometer and odometer readings. vehicle. Warning! Tire Types

Warning! All Season Tires — If Equipped Do not use Summer tires in snow/ice All Season tires provide traction for all conditions. You could lose vehicle control, seasons (Spring, Summer, Fall, and resulting in severe injury or death. Driving Do not use a tire, wheel size, load rating, too fast for conditions also creates the or speed rating other than that specified for Winter). Traction levels may vary possibility of loss of vehicle control. your vehicle. Some combinations of between different all season tires. All unapproved tires and wheels may change season tires can be identified by the suspension dimensions and performance M+S, M&S, M/S or MS designation on Snow Tires characteristics, resulting in changes to the tire sidewall. Use all season tires Some areas of the country require the steering, handling, and braking of your only in sets of four; failure to do so may use of snow tires during the Winter. vehicle. This can cause unpredictable adversely affect the safety and handling handling and stress to steering and Snow tires can be identified by a of your vehicle. suspension components. You could lose “mountain/snowflake” symbol on the control and have a collision resulting in Summer Or Three Season Tires tire sidewall. serious injury or death. Use only the tire and wheel sizes with load ratings approved — If Equipped If you need snow tires, for your vehicle. select tires equivalent Summer tires provide traction in both in size and type to the Never use a tire with a smaller load wet and dry conditions, and are not original equipment index or capacity, other than what was intended to be driven in snow or on ice. tires. Use snow tires originally equipped on your vehicle. Using a If your vehicle is equipped with Summer onlyinsetsoffour; tire with a smaller load index could result in tires, be aware these tires are not tire overloading and failure. You could lose failure to do so may control and have a collision. designed for Winter or cold driving adversely affect the safety and handling conditions. Install Winter tires on your of your vehicle. Failure to equip your vehicle with tires vehicle when ambient temperatures are having adequate speed capability can Snow tires generally have lower speed less than 40°F (5°C) or if roads are ratings than what was originally result in sudden tire failure and loss of covered with ice or snow. For more vehicle control. equipped with your vehicle and should information, contact an authorized not be operated at sustained speeds dealer. over 75 mph (120 km/h). For speeds 251 above 75 mph (120 km/h) refer to tire and wheel found on the front or rear original equipment or an authorized tire axle of your vehicle. This spare tire may Warning! dealer for recommended safe operating be used in the tire rotation for your speeds, loading and cold tire inflation vehicle. If your vehicle has this option, pressures. refer to an authorized tire dealer for the Compact and collapsible spares are for While studded tires improve recommended tire rotation pattern. temporary emergency use only. With these spares, do not drive more than 50 mph performance on ice, skid and traction Compact Spare Tire — If capability on wet or dry surfaces may (80 km/h). Temporary use spares have be poorer than that of non-studded Equipped limited tread life. When the tread is worn to the tread wear indicators, the temporary tires. Some states prohibit studded The compact spare is for temporary use spare tire needs to be replaced. Be tires; therefore, local laws should be emergency use only. You can identify if sure to follow the warnings, which apply to checked before using these tire types. your vehicle is equipped with a your spare. Failure to do so could result in Spare Tires — If compact spare by looking at the spare spare tire failure and loss of vehicle control. Equipped tire description on the Tire and Loading Note: For vehicles equipped with Tire Information Placard located on the Collapsible Spare Tire — If Service Kit instead of a spare tire, driver’s side door opening or on the Equipped please refer to “Tire Service Kit” in “In sidewall of the tire. Compact spare tire Case Of Emergency” for further descriptions begin with the letter “T” or The collapsible spare is for temporary information. “S” preceding the size designation. emergency use only. You can identify if Example: T145/80D18 103M.

SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE your vehicle is equipped with a T,S=Temporary Spare Tire collapsible spare by looking at the Caution! Since this tire has limited tread life, the spare tire description on the Tire and original equipment tire should be Loading Information Placard located on repaired (or replaced) and reinstalled on the driver’s side door opening or on the Because of the reduced ground clearance, your vehicle at the first opportunity. sidewall of the tire. do not take your vehicle through an Collapsible spare tire description automatic car wash with a compact or Do not install a wheel cover or attempt limited use temporary spare installed. to mount a conventional tire on the example: 165/80-17 101P. Damage to the vehicle may result. compact spare wheel, since the wheel Since this tire has limited tread life, the is designed specifically for the compact original equipment tire should be spare tire. Do not install more than one repaired (or replaced) and reinstalled on Spare Tire Matching Original compact spare tire and wheel on the your vehicle at the first opportunity. Equipped Tire And Wheel — If vehicle at any given time. Inflate collapsible tire only after the Equipped wheel is properly installed to the Your vehicle may be equipped with a vehicle. Inflate the collapsible tire using spare tire and wheel equivalent in look the electric air pump before lowering and function to the original equipment the vehicle. 252 Do not install a wheel cover or attempt Limited Use Spare — If Wheel And Wheel Trim to mount a conventional tire on the Equipped Care collapsible spare wheel, since the wheel All wheels and wheel trim, especially is designed specifically for the The limited use spare tire is for aluminum and chrome plated wheels, collapsible spare tire. temporary emergency use only. This tire is identified by a label located on the should be cleaned regularly using mild limited use spare wheel. This label (neutral Ph) soap and water to maintain Warning! contains the driving limitations for this their luster and to prevent corrosion. spare. This tire may look like the original Wash wheels with the same soap equipped tire on the front or rear axle of solution recommended for the body of Compact and Collapsible spares are for your vehicle, but it is not. Installation of the vehicle. temporary emergency use only. With these this limited use spare tire affects vehicle Your wheels are susceptible to spares, do not drive more than 50 mph deterioration caused by salt, sodium (80 km/h). Temporary use spares have handling. Since it is not the same as limited tread life. When the tread is worn to your original equipment tire, replace (or chloride, magnesium chloride, calcium the tread wear indicators, the temporary repair) the original equipment tire and chloride, etc., and other road chemicals use spare tire needs to be replaced. Be reinstall on the vehicle at the first used to melt ice or control dust on dirt sure to follow the warnings, which apply to opportunity. roads. Use a soft cloth or sponge and your spare. Failure to do so could result in mild soap to wipe away promptly. Do spare tire failure and loss of vehicle control. not use harsh chemicals or a stiff brush. Warning! They can damage the wheel’s Full Size Spare — If Equipped protective coating that helps keep them from corroding and tarnishing. The full size spare is for temporary Limited use spares are for emergency use emergency use only. This tire may look only. Installation of this limited use spare tire affects vehicle handling. With this tire, like the originally equipped tire on the do not drive more than the speed listed on Caution! front or rear axle of your vehicle, but it is the limited use spare wheel. Keep inflated not. This spare tire may have limited to the cold tire inflation pressures listed on tread life. When the tread is worn to the your Tire and Loading Information Placard Avoid products or automatic car washes tread wear indicators, the temporary located on the driver’s side B-Pillar or the that use acidic solutions or strong alkaline use full size spare tire needs to be rear edge of the driver’s side door. Replace additives or harsh brushes. Many replaced. Since it is not the same as (or repair) the original equipment tire at the aftermarket wheel cleaners and automatic your original equipment tire, replace (or first opportunity and reinstall it on your car washes may damage the wheel's repair) the original equipment tire and vehicle. Failure to do so could result in loss protective finish. Such damage is not of vehicle control. covered by the New Vehicle Limited reinstall on the vehicle at the first Warranty. Only car wash soap, Mopar opportunity. Wheel Cleaner or equivalent is recommended.

253 When cleaning extremely dirty wheels Dark Vapor Chrome, Black Satin including excessive brake dust, care Chrome, or Low Gloss Clear Coat Caution! must be taken in the selection of tire Wheels and wheel cleaning chemicals and equipment to prevent damage to the To avoid damage to your vehicle or tires, wheels. Mopar Wheel Treatment or Caution! observe the following precautions: Mopar Chrome Cleaner or their Because of restricted traction device equivalent is recommended or select a clearance between tires and other non-abrasive, non-acidic cleaner for If your vehicle is equipped with these specialty suspension components, it is important that aluminum or chrome wheels. wheels, DO NOT USE wheel cleaners, only traction devices in good condition are abrasives, or polishing compounds. They will used. Broken devices can cause serious permanently damage this finish and such damage. Stop the vehicle immediately if Caution! damage is not covered by the New Vehicle noise occurs that could indicate device Limited Warranty. HAND WASH ONLY USING breakage. Remove the damaged parts of the MILD SOAP AND WATER WITH A SOFT device before further use. Do not use scouring pads, steel wool, a CLOTH. Used on a regular basis; this is all that is required to maintain this finish. Install device as tightly as possible and bristle brush, metal polishes or oven then retighten after driving about ½ mile cleaner. These products may damage the (0.8 km). wheel's protective finish. Such damage is Snow Chains not covered by the New Vehicle Limited Do not exceed 30 mph (48 km/h). Warranty. Only car wash soap, Mopar The use of snow chains should be in Drive cautiously and avoid severe turns SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE Wheel Cleaner or equivalent is compliance with local regulations of recommended. each country. In certain countries, tires and large bumps, especially with a loaded marked with code M+S (Mud and vehicle. Snow) are considered as winter Note: If you intend parking or storing Do not drive for a prolonged period on equipment; therefore their use is dry pavement. your vehicle for an extended period equivalent to that of the snow chains. after cleaning the wheels with wheel Observe the traction device The snow chains may be applied only cleaner, drive your vehicle and apply the manufacturer’s instructions on the method of to the front wheel tires. Check the brakes to remove the water droplets installation, operating speed, and conditions tension of the snow chains after the first for use. Always use the suggested operating from the brake components. This few feet have been driven. activity will remove the red rust on the speed of the device manufacturer’s if it is less than 30 mph (48 km/h). brake rotors and prevent vehicle Warning! vibration when braking. Do not use traction devices on a compact spare tire. Using tires of different size and type (M+S, Snow) between front and rear axles can cause unpredictable handling. You could lose control and have a collision. 254 Tire rotation means moving the wheels Because your vehicle is not to a different position, with respect to equipped with a spare tire, you cannot Caution! the vehicle. During rotation, inspect tires do a tire rotation safely with the jack for correct balance. that may come with your vehicle if so Using snow chains with tires with equipped. Contact an authorized non-original dimensions may damage the dealer for tire rotation. vehicle. Also, inspect them for uneven wear and Using different size or type (M+S, snow, damage. Abnormal wear is usually etc.) tires between front and rear axle may caused by one or a combination of the adversely affect vehicle driveability, with the following: risk of losing control of the vehicle and Incorrect tire pressure resulting accidents. Improper wheel alignment Tire Rotation Out-of-balance wheel Recommendations 07031402-FRT-001 Severe braking Rotation Diagram The front and rear tires are subject to After rotation, inflate all tire pressures to different loads and stress due to The single wheel will therefore operate specification and inspect the wheel nuts steering, maneuver and braking. For on a different axle and, where possible, for tightness. this reason they are subject to uneven on the opposite side of the vehicle. wear. To resolve this problem, tires With Tire Pressure Monitor System should be rotated at the appropriate Note: (TPMS) time. Rotate tires periodically. Irregular tire The TPM system must be initialized after adjusting the tire pressure, to The following rotation methods must wear is dangerous. To equalize tread make the system operate normally. NOT be used with one-way wear for maintaining good Refer to “Tire Pressure Monitoring unidirectional tires! This type of tires can performance in handling and braking, System” in “Safety” for further only be switched from the front axle to rotate the tires every 6,200 miles information. the rear axle and vice versa, keeping (10,000 km), or sooner if irregular wear them on the same side of the vehicle. develops. Rotate unidirectional tires and radial tires that have an asymmetrical tread To equalize tread wear, rotate the Rotate one-way unidirectional tires pattern only from front to rear, not from tires every 7,500 miles (12,000 km) at and radial tires that have an side to side. Tire performance will be the latest or sooner if irregular wear asymmetrical tread pattern only from reduced if rotated from side to side. front to rear, not from side to side. Tire develops. FCA recommends to rotate performance will be reduced if rotated every 5,000 miles (8,000 km) to help from side to side. increase tire life and distribute wear more evenly. 255 DEPARTMENT OF the norm due to variations in driving when tested under controlled TRANSPORTATION habits, service practices, and conditions on a specified indoor UNIFORM TIRE differences in road characteristics laboratory test wheel. QUALITY GRADES and climate. Sustained high temperature can The following tire grading Traction Grades cause the material of the tire to categories were established by the degenerate and reduce tire life, and The Traction grades, from highest National Highway Traffic Safety excessive temperature can lead to to lowest, are AA, A, B, and C. Administration. The specific grade sudden tire failure. The grade C These grades represent the tire's rating assigned by the tire's corresponds to a level of ability to stop on wet pavement, as manufacturer in each category is performance, which all passenger measured under controlled shown on the sidewall of the tires vehicle tires must meet under the conditions on specified government on your vehicle. Federal Motor Vehicle Safety test surfaces of asphalt and Standard No. 109. Grades B and A All passenger vehicle tires must concrete. A tire marked C may represent higher levels of conform to Federal safety have poor traction performance. requirements in addition to these performance on the laboratory test grades. wheel, than the minimum required by law. SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE Treadwear Warning! The Treadwear grade is a comparative rating, based on the The traction grade assigned to Warning! wear rate of the tire when tested this tire is based on straight-ahead under controlled conditions on a braking traction tests, and does The temperature grade for this tire specified government test course. not include acceleration, is established for a tire that is For example, a tire graded cornering, hydroplaning, or peak properly inflated and not 150 would wear one and one-half traction characteristics. overloaded. Excessive speed, times as well on the government under-inflation, or excessive course as a tire graded 100. The Temperature Grades loading, either separately or in relative performance of tires combination, can cause heat The Temperature grades are A (the depends upon the actual buildup and possible tire failure. highest), B, and C, representing the conditions of their use, however, tire's resistance to the generation of and may depart significantly from heat and its ability to dissipate heat, 256 STORING THE painted surface by dragging any dust BODYWORK VEHICLE that may have accumulated on it. Do not use compact plastic sheets which Protection From If the vehicle is left inactive for longer Atmospheric Agents than a month, the following precautions do not allow humidity to evaporate from the surface of the vehicle. The vehicle is equipped with the best should be observed: available technological solutions to Park the vehicle in covered, dry and if Inflate the tires at a pressure of protect the bodywork against corrosion. +7.25 psi (+0.5 bar) higher than possible well-ventilated premises and These include: slightly open the windows. recommended on the tire placard and check it periodically. Painting products and systems Check that the parking brake is not which give the vehicle resistance to Do not drain the engine cooling activated. corrosion and abrasion. system. Disconnect the negative battery Use of galvanized (or pre-treated) Any time the vehicle is left inactive for terminal and check the battery charge. steel sheets, with high resistance to two weeks or more, operate the air Repeat this check once every three corrosion. months during storage. conditioning system with engine idling for at least five minutes, setting external Spraying of plastic parts, with a If the battery is not disconnected air and with fan set to maximum speed. protective function in the more exposed from the electrical system, check its This operation will ensure appropriate points: underdoor, inner fender, edges, state of charge every thirty days. lubrication for the system, thus etc. minimizing the possibility of damage to Clean and protect the painted parts Use of “open” boxed sections to the compressor when the system is using protective wax. prevent condensation and pockets of operated again. Clean and protect the shiny metal moisture which could favor the Note: After placing the ignition in the formation of rust inside. parts using special compounds OFF mode and having closed the driver available commercially. side door, wait at least one minute Use of special films to protect Sprinkle talcum powder on the before disconnecting the electrical against abrasion in exposed areas (e.g. windshield and rear window wiper supply from the battery. When rear fender, doors, etc.). rubber blades and lift them off the reconnecting the electrical supply to the Corrosion Warranty battery, make sure that the ignition in glass. Your vehicle is covered by Corrosion the OFF mode and the driver side door Warranty against perforation due to rust Cover the vehicle with a fabric or is closed. perforated plastic sheet, paying of any original element of the structure particular care not to damage the or bodywork. For the general terms of this Corrosion Warranty, refer to the Warranty Booklet.

257 Preserving The not wash the vehicle after it has been Damage caused by bird Paintwork left in the sun or with the hood hot: this dropping/insects/tree sap may alter the shine of the paintwork. Touch up abrasions and scratches Problem: immediately to prevent the formation of Exterior plastic parts must be cleaned Bird droppings contain acids. If these rust. in the same way as the rest of the are not removed they can eat away the vehicle. Maintenance of paintwork consists of clear and color base coat of the washing the vehicle: the frequency Note: vehicle's paintwork. depends on the conditions and When insects stick to the paint surface environment in which the vehicle is Avoid parking under trees; the sap and decompose, corrosive compounds used. dropped by trees makes the paint form. These can erode the clear and work go dull and increases the color base coat of the vehicle's For example, it is advisable to wash the possibility of corrosion. vehicle more often in areas with high paintwork if they are not removed. levels of atmospheric pollution or salted Bird droppings must be washed off Tree sap will harden and adhere roads. immediately and thoroughly as the acid permanently to the paint finish. If you To correctly wash the vehicle, follow they contain is particularly aggressive. scratch the sap off while it is hard, some vehicle paint could come off with it. these instructions: Etching caused by acid rain or Prevention: If high pressure jets or cleaners are industrial fallout used to wash the vehicle, keep a Cause: It is necessary to have your vehicle washed and waxed to preserve its finish

SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE distance of at least 1.3 ft (40 cm) from Industrial pollutants and vehicle according to the instructions in this the bodywork to avoid damage or emissions drift into the air and mix with section. This should be done as soon alteration. Build up of water could rain or dew to form acids. These acids as possible. cause damage to the vehicle in the long can settle on a vehicle's finish. As the term. water evaporates, the acid becomes Bird droppings can be removed with a soft sponge and water. If you are travelling Wash the vehicle using a low concentrated and can damage the finish. and these are not available, a moistened pressure jet of water if possible. tissue may also take care of the problem. The longer the acid remains on the The cleaned area should be waxed Wipe a sponge with a slightly soapy surface, the greater the chance is for according to the instructions in this solution over the bodywork, frequently damage. rinsing the sponge. section. Insects and tree sap are best Prevention: removed with a soft sponge and water or Rinse well with water and dry with a It is necessary to wash and wax your a commercially available chemical cleaner. jet of air or a chamois leather. vehicle to preserve its finish according Another method is to cover the affected Dry the less visible parts (e.g. door to the instructions in this section. These area with dampened newspaper for one frames, hood, headlight frames, etc.) steps should be taken immediately after to two hours. After removing the with special care, as water may you suspect that acid rain has settled newspaper, rinse off the loosened stagnate more easily in these areas. Do on your vehicle's finish. debris with water. 258 Water marks In low temperatures, a vehicle's Note: FCA is not responsible for Problem: finish hardens. This increases the scratches caused by automatic car Rain, fog, dew, and even tap water can chance of paint chipping. washes or improper washing. Scratches are more noticeable on contain harmful minerals such as salt Chipped paint can lead to rust vehicles with darker paint finishes. and lime. If moisture containing these forming on your vehicle. Before this minerals settles on the vehicle and happens, repair the damage by using When the wiper lever is in the AUTO evaporates, the minerals will FCA touch-up paint according to the position and the ignition is placed in the concentrate and harden to form white instructions in this section. Failure to ON mode, the wipers may move rings. The rings can damage your repair the affected area could lead to automatically in the following cases: vehicle's finish. serious rusting and expensive repairs. If the windshield above the rain Prevention: Follow all label and container directions sensor is touched or wiped with a cloth. when using a chemical cleaner or It is necessary to wash and wax your If the windshield is struck with a hand polish. Read all warnings and cautions. vehicle to preserve its finish according or other object from either outside or to the instructions in this section. These Maintaining The Finish inside the vehicle. steps should be taken immediately after you find water marks on your vehicle's Washing Note: finish. To help protect the finish from rust and Keep hands and scrapers clear of Paint chipping deterioration, wash your vehicle the windshield when the wiper lever is thoroughly and frequently, at least once in the AUTO position and the ignition is Problem: a month, with lukewarm or cold water. Paint chipping occurs when gravel placed in the ON mode as fingers If the vehicle is washed improperly, the could be pinched or the wipers and thrown in the air by another vehicle's paint surface could be scratched. Here tires hits your vehicle. wiper blades damaged when the are some examples of how scratching wipers activate automatically. If you are How to avoid paint chipping: could occur: going to clean the windshield, be sure Keeping a safe distance between you The vehicle is washed without first the wipers are turned off completely and the vehicle ahead reduces the rinsing off dirt and other foreign matter. (when it is most likely that the engine is chances of having your paint chipped left running) this is particularly by flying gravel. The vehicle is washed with a rough, important when clearing ice and snow. dry, or dirty cloth. Note: Do not spray water in the engine The vehicle is washed at a car wash The paint chipping zone varies with compartment. Otherwise, it could that uses brushes that are dirty or too result in engine-starting problems or the speed of the vehicle. For example, stiff. when travelling at 55 mph (90 km/h), damage to electrical parts. the paint chipping zone is 164 ft Cleansers or wax containing (50 m). abrasives are used. 259 When washing and waxing the Waxing vehicle, be careful not to apply Caution! Your vehicle needs to be waxed when excessive force to any single area of water no longer beads on the finish. the vehicle hood. Otherwise, you could Always wash and dry the vehicle before dent the vehicle. Do not use steel wool, abrasive cleaners, or waxing it. In addition to the vehicle Do not use automatic car washing strong detergents containing highly alkaline body, wax the metal trim to maintain its or caustic agents on chrome plated or lustre: machines and car washing devices anodized aluminium parts. This may using high water pressure. damage the protective coating; also, Use wax which contains no Make sure that the fuel door is cleaners and detergents may discolor or abrasives. Waxes containing abrasive closed and lock the doors. Otherwise, deteriorate the paint. will remove paint and could damage the fuel door may be forcefully opened bright metal parts. by water pressure causing damage to Pay special attention to removing salt, Use a good grade of natural wax for the vehicle or fuel door. dirt, mud, and other foreign material metallic, mica, and solid colors. To minimize scratches on the vehicle's from the underside of the fenders, and paint finish: make sure the drain holes in the lower When waxing, coat evenly with the edges of the doors and rocker panels sponge supplied or a soft cloth. Rinse off any dirt or other foreign are clean. matter using lukewarm or cold water Wipe off the wax with a soft cloth. Insects, tar, tree sap, bird droppings, before washing. Note: A spot remover to remove oil, industrial fallout, and similar deposits

SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE tar, and similar materials will usually also Use plenty of lukewarm or cold water can damage the finish if not removed take off the wax. Rewax these areas and a soft cloth when washing the immediately. When prompt washing even if the rest of the vehicle does not vehicle. Do not use a nylon cloth. with plain water is ineffective, use a mild need it. soap made for use on vehicles. Rub gently when washing or drying Repairing Damage To the vehicle. Thoroughly rinse off all soap with lukewarm or cold water. Do not allow The Finish Take your vehicle only to a car wash soap to dry on the finish. Deep scratches or chips on the finish that keeps its brushes well maintained. After washing the vehicle, dry it with a should be repaired promptly. Exposed Do not use abrasive cleansers or clean chamois to prevent water spots metal quickly rusts and can lead to wax that contain abrasives. from forming. major repairs. Note: If your vehicle is damaged and needs metal parts repaired or replaced, make sure the body shop applies corrosion prevention materials to all parts, both repaired and new. This will prevent them from rusting. 260 Bright-Metal Thoroughly flush the underbody and Note: Always use a sponge or soft Maintenance wheel housings with lukewarm or cold cloth to clean the wheels. Rinse the Use tar remover to remove road tar and water at the end of each winter. Try also wheels thoroughly with lukewarm or insects. Never do this with a knife or to do this every month. cold water. Also, be sure to clean the similar tool. Pay special attention to these areas wheels after driving on dusty or salted To prevent corrosion on brigh-tmetal because they easily hide mud and dirt. roads to help prevent corrosion. surfaces, apply wax or chrome It will do more harm than good to wet Convertible Top preservative and rub it to a high lustre. down the road grime without removing Maintenance it. During cold weather or in coastal areas, The convertible top is made of a special cover bright-metal parts with a coating The lower edges of doors, rocker high-grade material, but if it's not taken of wax or preservative heavier than panels, and frame members have drain good care of, hardening, staining, and usual. It would also help to coat them holes that should not be clogged. loss of lustre will result. Maintain it with noncorrosive petroleum jelly or Water trapped there will cause rusting. under these guidelines. some other protective compound. Aluminium Wheel Washing Maintenance Do not wait until the convertible top A protective coating is provided over gets really dirty before cleaning it. Dirt Caution! the aluminium wheels. Special care is that's there too long will cause needed to protect this coating. deterioration. Do not use steel wool, abrasive cleaners, or Note: Do not use any detergent other than mild detergent. Before using any Before washing, remove dust and strong detergents containing highly alkaline coarse particulate with a soft brush. or caustic agents on chrome plated or detergent, verify the ingredients. anodized aluminium parts. This may result Otherwise, the product could discolor Gently clean the convertible top with in damage to the protective coating and or stain the aluminium wheels. a synthetic neutral detergent, lots of cause discoloration or paint deterioration. water, and a soft brush. Caution! Rinse it thoroughly with clean water Underbody Maintenance to remove all the soap. Road chemicals and salt used for ice and snow removal and solvents used Do not use a wire brush or any abrasive Wipe it as dry as you can before the for dust control may collect on the cleaner, polishing compound, or solvent on water dries on it. underbody. If not removed, they will aluminium wheels. They may damage the Then allow it to dry completely before speed up rusting and deterioration of coating. lowering it. such underbody parts as fuel lines, frame, floor pan, and exhaust system, even though these parts may be coated with anti-corrosive material. 261 Do not get any car wax on the convertible top. Caution! If you do, remove it with a good leather cleaner or mild detergent Automatic and high-pressure car (about 5% solution). washes are harmful to a convertible top. Avoid them. Let the convertible top dry completely before lowering after Do not spray water directly on the area applying treatment or dressing. where the window glass and the convertible top meet. This would probably cause water to enter the interior. Drain Filter Cleaning 07040110123001 Do not spray water directly on the seam If leaves or other matter block the drain Drain Filter Location area of the body and the convertible top as filter, water may enter the vehicle. Clean 1 — Drain Filter it could result in water penetrating the the drain filter at least once a year. 2 — Bow interior. Do not wipe the convertible top using alcohol, chlorine bleach, or organic 2. Remove the drain filter while solvents such as thinner, benzene, or pressing the tab. gasoline. Otherwise, they may cause discoloration or stains. SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE Too much treatment on the convertible top can be as damaging as too little. Follow the manufacturer's directions. Do not over do it!

Note: 07040110-122-001AB Drain Filter Some leather treatment products can ruin the convertible top's gloss. Be Proceed as follows: careful of the one you choose. 1. Check the position of the drain filter 07040110124001 Drain Filter Tab Test on an inconspicuous, small with your hand from behind the bow. corner of the convertible top if you are 3. Remove leaves and other matter not sure. accumulated in the drain filter.

262 4. Reinstall the drain filter in the reverse If plastic parts such as the bumpers INTERIORS order of the removal procedure. become inadvertently exposed to Seats And Fabric Parts Note: Make sure that the drain filter is chemical agents or fluids such as securely attached to its designated gasoline, oil, engine coolant, or battery position by pushing it until the tab fluid, it could cause discoloration, Warning! locks. Water may enter the vehicle if the staining, or paint peeling. Wipe off any drain filter is not secured to its such chemical agents or fluids using a designated position. For this operation soft cloth immediately. Do not use volatile solvents for cleaning go to an authorized dealer. purposes. Many are potentially flammable, and if used in closed areas they may cause Plastic Part Caution! respiratory harm. Maintenance Do not keep aerosol cans in the car: they When cleaning the plastic lenses of the might explode. Aerosol cans must not be lights, do not use gasoline, paraffin, High water temperature and high water exposed to a temperature exceeding 122°F (50°C). When the vehicle is exposed rectified spirit, paint, thinner, highly pressure car washers are available depending on the type of high pressure car to sunlight the internal temperature can acidic detergents, or strongly alkaline washer device. If the car washer nozzle is greatly exceed this value. detergents. put too close to the vehicle or aimed at one Otherwise, these chemical agents can area for an extended period of time, it discolor or damage the surfaces could deform plastic parts or damage the Caution! resulting in a significant loss in paint. functionality. If plastic parts become Do not use wax containing compounds inadvertently exposed to any of these Direct contact of air fresheners, insect (polish). Otherwise, it could result in paint repellents, suntan lotions, or hand chemical agents, flush with water damage. sanitizers, to the plastic, painted, or immediately. In addition, do not use an electrical or air decorated surfaces of the interior may tool to apply wax. Otherwise, the frictional cause permanent damage. Wipe away heat generated could result in deformation immediately. of plastic parts or paint damage. Damage caused by these type of products may not be covered by your New Vehicle Limited Warranty. Rubbing the interior side of the convertible top vigorously with a stiff brush or cloth may cause damage.

263 Vinyl Clean the webbing with a mild soap solution recommended for upholstery or Remove dust and loose dirt from vinyl Caution! with a whisk broom or vacuum cleaner. carpets. Follow instructions. Do not Clean vinyl with a leather-and-vinyl bleach or dye the belts, this may cleaner. Do not wipe leather parts using alcohol, weaken them. chlorine bleach, or organic solvents such After cleaning the belts, thoroughly dry Fabric as thinner, benzene, or gasoline. Otherwise, the belt webbing and make sure there Remove dust and loose dirt from fabric it may cause discoloration or stains. is no remaining moisture before with a whisk broom or vacuum cleaner. retracting them. Clean it with a mild soap solution good Note: for upholstery and carpets. Plastic And Coated Scratches or nicks on the panels Parts Remove fresh spots immediately with a and metallic trim resulting from the use fabric spot cleaner. of a hard brush or cloth may not be Clean interior plastic parts with a damp To keep the fabric looking clean and repairable. cloth (if possible made from microfiber), fresh, take care of it. Otherwise its color and a solution of water and neutral, will be affected, it can be stained easily, Be particularly careful when non-abrasive detergent. cleaning high gloss panels and metallic and its fire-resistance may be reduced. To clean oily or persistent stains, use trim as they can be easily scratched. Note: Use only recommended cleaners specific products free from solvents and and procedures. Others may affect designed to maintain the original appearance and fire-resistance. Lap / Shoulder Belt appearance and color of the components. SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE Interior Panels Remove any dust using a microfiber cloth, if necessary moistened with When the interior panels need to be Warning! water. The use of paper tissues is not cleaned, use soft material such as a recommended as these may leave soft cloth soaked in clean water and residues. wrung out well and lightly wipe off dirt A frayed or torn belt could rip apart in a from the surface. collision and leave you with no protection. Instrument panel precautions Inspect the belt system periodically, If a panel requires further cleaning, wipe checking for cuts, frays, or loose parts. Prevent caustic solutions such as perfume dirt off using a soft cloth soaked in mild Damaged parts must be replaced and cosmetic oils from contacting the detergent (about 5% solution) and wipe immediately. Do not disassemble or modify instrument panel. They will damage and off any remaining detergent using a the system. Seat belt assemblies must be discolor the instrument panel. If these cloth soaked in clean water and wrung replaced after a collision if they have been solutions get on the instrument panel, out well. damaged (i.e., bent retractor, torn wipe them off immediately. webbing, etc.). Note: Never use alcohol, gasoline and derivatives to clean the instrument panel lens. 264 Leather Parts — If Equipped Caution! Caution!

Do not use glazing agents. Glazing agents Caution! Sand and dust on the seat surface may contain ingredients which may cause damage the overcoat of the genuine discoloration, wrinkling, cracks and peeling. leather surfaces and accelerate wear. Do not use Alcohol and Alcohol-based Greasy soiling on genuine leather may Instrument Panel Top and/or Ketone based cleaning products to cause molding and stains. When cleaning, it is recommended that clean leather seats, as damage to the seat you use a clean towel dampened in a may result. Rubbing hard with a stiff brush or cloth mild detergent to remove debris. may cause damage. Remove dust and sand first using a Do not wipe the leather using alcohol, Caution! vacuum cleaner or other means, then chlorine bleach, or organic solvents such wipe dirt off using a soft cloth with a as thinner, benzene, or gasoline. Otherwise, leather cleaner or a soft cloth soaked in it may cause discoloration or stains. If the surface is rubbed harshly, it could mild soap. result in the surface being damaged leaving If the seats get wet, promptly remove white scratch marks. Wipe off the remaining cleaner or soap moisture with a dry cloth. Remaining using a cloth soaked in clean water and moisture on the surface may cause wrung out well. deterioration such as hardening and Window Interiors Remove moisture with a dry, soft cloth shrinkage. If the windows become covered with an and allow the leather to further dry in a Exposure to direct sunlight for long oily, greasy, or waxy film, clean them well-ventilated, shaded area. periods may cause deterioration and with glass cleaner. Follow the directions shrinkage. When parking the car under on the container. If the leather gets wet such as from rain, also remove moisture and dry it as direct sunlight for long periods, shade the Note: Do not scrape or scratch the interior using sunshades. soon as possible. inside of the window glass. It could Do not leave vinyl products on the seats damage the thermal filaments. Note: for long periods as they may affect the Because genuine leather is a natural leather quality and coloring. If the cabin temperature becomes hot, the vinyl may Caution! material, its surface is not uniform and deteriorate and adhere to the genuine it may have natural scars, scratches, leather. and wrinkles. When washing the inside of the window glass, use a soft cloth dampened in To maintain the quality for as long lukewarm water, gently wiping the thermal as possible, periodical maintenance, filaments. Use of glass cleaning products about twice a year, is recommended. could damage the thermal filaments. 265 TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS

IDENTIFICATION DATA ...... 267 RECOMMENDED TIRE INFLATION PRESSURE ...... 268 ENGINE...... 270 TRANSMISSION ...... 271 BRAKES ...... 272 SUSPENSIONS ...... 273 STEERING ...... 274 DIMENSIONS...... 275 FLUID CAPACITIES ...... 277 FLUIDS AND LUBRICANTS .....278 PERFORMANCE ...... 280 TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS

266 IDENTIFICATION DATA Identification Numbers Model Plate The model plate is located on the left side of door pillar.

10010104-122-001AB 10010106-121-001 Vehicle Identification Number Vehicle Emission Control Information Label Motor Vehicle Safety Standard Label Tire Pressure Label (U.S.A. and Canada) The tire pressure label is located on the The motor vehicle safety standard label left side of door pillar. is located on the left side of door pillar. 10010103121001 Model Plate Location Chassis Number/Vehicle Identification Number The Vehicle Identification Number is located below the left side (driver side) of the windshield.

10010107-121-002

10010109-121-001 Tire Pressure Label Motor Vehicle Safety Standard Engine Number Label The engine number label is located on Vehicle Emission Control the engine. Information Label (U.S.A. and Canada) The vehicle emission control information label is located under the hood. 267 RECOMMENDED Always check the tire inflation Checking Tire Pressure pressures on a regular basis according TIRE INFLATION Proceed as follows: PRESSURE to the recommended tire inflation pressure on the tire label and in 1. When you check the air pressure, On the tire label you will find the conjunction with the information in this make sure the tires are cold - meaning recommended tire inflation pressure in Owner's Manual. Driving your vehicle they are not hot from driving even a both psi and kPa for the tires installed with under-inflated tires is dangerous. mile. as original equipment on the vehicle. Under-inflation is the most common It is very important that the inflation cause of failures in any kind of tire and 2. Remove the cap from the valve on pressure of the tires on your vehicle is may result in severe cracking, tread one tire. maintained at the recommended separation or “blowout”, with 3. Firmly press a tire gauge onto the pressure. unexpected loss of vehicle control and valve. You should check the tire pressure increased risk of injury. Under-inflation regularly to insure that the proper increases sidewall flexing and rolling 4. Add air to achieve recommended air inflation pressure is maintained. resistance, resulting in heat buildup pressure. and internal damage to the tire. It 5. If you overfill the tire, release air by Note: results in unnecessary tire stress, pushing on the metal stem in the center irregular wear, loss of control and Tire pressures listed on the vehicle of the valve. Then recheck the pressure

TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS accidents. A tire can lose up to half of placard or tire information label indicate with your tire gauge. the recommended cold tire inflation its air pressure and not appear to be pressure, measured when the tires are flat. It is impossible to determine 6. Replace the valve cap. cold, after the vehicle has been parked whether or not tires are properly inflated just by looking at them. 7. Visually inspect the tires to make for at least three hours. As you drive, sure there are no nails or other objects the temperature in the tire warms up, embedded that could poke a hole in the increasing the tire pressure. tire and cause an air leak. 8. Check the sidewalls to make sure there are no gouges, cuts, bulges, cracks or other irregularities.

268 Glossary Of Terms Vehicle Load Limit Tire Placard The maximum value of the combination weight of occupants and cargo. A label indicating the OE (Original Equipment) tire sizes, recommended Bead Area of the Tire inflation pressure, and the maximum Area of the tire next to the rim. weight the vehicle can carry. Sidewall Area of the Tire Tire Identification Number (TIN) Area between the bead area and the A number on the sidewall of each tire tread. providing information about the tire brand and manufacturing plant, tire Tread Area of the Tire size, and date of manufacture. Area on the perimeter of the tire that contacts the road when it's mounted Inflation Pressure on the vehicle. A measure of the amount of air in a tire. kPa Kilopascal, the metric unit for air pressure. psi Pounds per square inch, the English unit for air pressure. B-pillar The structural member at the side of the vehicle behind the front door. Original Equipment (OE) Describes components originally equipped on the vehicle.

269 ENGINE Engine

1.4 Turbo Multi Air Cycle Four Number and position of cylinders 4 in line Piston bore and stroke (mm) 72.0 x 80.4 Total displacement (cm³) 1368 Compression ratio 9.8:1 Maximum power (kW) 122 Maximum power (HP) 164 Corresponding engine speed (rpm) 5500

TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS Maximum torque (Nm) 250 Maximum torque (lb.-ft.) 184 Corresponding engine speed (rpm) 2500 Spark plugs We recommend you use Mopar Spark Plugs. 91 Octane Recommended (87 Octane Acceptable) Maximum 15% Fuel Ethanol Content Note: When cleaning the iridium plugs, do not use a wire brush. The fine particulate coating on the iridium alloy and platinum tips could be damaged.

Warning!

Modifications or repairs to the fuel supply system that are not carried out correctly or do not take the system’s technical specifications into account, can cause malfunctions leading to the risk of fire.

270 TRANSMISSION

Engine Traction Type Description 6-speed manual (*) / 6-speed 1.4 Turbo Multi Air RWD Manual/Automatic Automatic Transmission(**) (*) If equipped with manual transmission (**) If equipped with automatic transmission

271 BRAKES

Engine Front brakes Rear brakes Parking brake Ventilated (floating type 11 in Solid (floating type 11 in 1.4 Turbo Multi Air Mechanical (lever type) diameter) diameter) Note: Water, ice, and salt spread on the roads may deposit on the brake disks reducing braking efficiency the first time the brakes are applied. TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS

272 SUSPENSIONS

Engine Front Rear 1.4 Turbo Multi Air Double wishbone with stabilizer bars Multilink with stabilizer bars

273 STEERING

Engine Turning circle curb to curb, ft (m) Type Double pinion electric power assist system 1.4 Turbo Multi Air 30.8 (9.4) (DP - EPAS) - rack and pinion TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS

274 DIMENSIONS Dimensions Dimensions are expressed in inches and refer to the vehicle equipped with its standard-supplied tires. Height is measured with vehicle unloaded. Trunk Volume: 4.9 cu. ft. (140 Liters)

10000555-122-333AB Vehicle Dimension Chart

ABCDEF 159.6 (4054 mm) 90.9 (2309 mm) 48.5 (1232 mm) 58.9 (1496 mm) 68.5 (1740 mm) 59.1 (1503 mm)

275 Weights Curb Weight: 2477 lbs (1124 kg) (if equipped with manual transmission) / 2516 lbs (1141 kg) (if equipped with automatic transmission). TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS

276 FLUID CAPACITIES

Item Capacities Fuel tank 11.9 (gallons) / 45 (liters) Engine oil (without oil filter replacement) 3.3 (quarts) / 3.2 (liters) Engine oil (with oil filter replacement) 4.0 (quarts) / 3.8 (liters) Coolant (with manual transmission) 7.6 (quarts) / 7.2 (liters) Coolant (with automatic transmission) 7.5 (quarts) / 7.1 (liters) Manual transmission oil 2.2 (quarts) / 2.1 (liters) Automatic transmission fluid 7.8 (quarts) / 7.5 (liters) Rear differential oil 0.63 (quarts) / 0.6 (liters) Limited slip differential oil 0.63 (quarts) / 0.6 (liters) Brake fluid (& clutch fluid) 0.57 (quarts) / 0.55 (liters)

277 FLUIDS AND LUBRICANTS Fluids And Lubricants Your vehicle is equipped with an engine oil that has been thoroughly developed and tested in order to meet the requirements of the Scheduled Servicing Plan. Constant use of the prescribed lubricants guarantees the fuel consumption and emission specifications. Lubricant quality is crucial for engine operation and duration.

Lubricant Specification Replacement interval We recommend you use API Certified SAE 5W-40 Full Synthetic Engine Oil, meeting the Engine oil requirements of FCA Material Standard According to Scheduled Servicing Plan MS-12991. Refer to your engine oil filler cap for correct SAE grade. Mopar Long Life Coolant Concentrate for Coolant According to Scheduled Servicing Plan FIAT Spider

TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS Mopar Manual Transmission Long Life Gear Manual transmission oil Oil for FIAT Spider Mopar Automatic Transmission Long Life Automatic transmission fluid Fluid for FIAT Spider Mopar Long Life Hypoid Gear Oil for FIAT Rear differential oil Spider Mopar Long Life Limited Slip Additive for FIAT Limited slip differential oil Spider We recommend you use Mopar DOT 3. If Brake/clutch fluid DOT 3 brake fluid is not available, then DOT 4 is acceptable. If lubricants compliant with the required specifications are not available, products that comply with the minimum required characteristics can be used for topping up; in this case optimal performance of the engine is not guaranteed.

278 Caution!

Mixing of engine coolant (antifreeze) other than specified Organic Additive Technology (OAT) engine coolant (antifreeze), may result in engine damage and may decrease corrosion protection. Organic Additive Technology (OAT) engine coolant is different and should not be mixed with Hybrid Organic Additive Technology (HOAT) engine coolant (antifreeze) or any “globally compatible” coolant (antifreeze). If a non-OAT engine coolant (antifreeze) is introduced into the cooling system in an emergency, the cooling system will need to be drained, flushed, and refilled with fresh OAT coolant (conforming to MS.90032), by an authorized dealer as soon as possible. Do not use water alone or alcohol-based engine coolant (antifreeze) products. Do not use additional rust inhibitors or antirust products, as they may not be compatible with the radiator engine coolant and may plug the radiator. This vehicle has not been designed for use with propylene glycol-based engine coolant (antifreeze). Use of propylene glycol-based engine coolant (antifreeze) is not recommended.

279 PERFORMANCE Performance Top speed after the initial period of usage of the vehicle.

Version MPH (km/h) 1.4 Turbo Multi Air 164HP 130 (209.2) TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS

280 CUSTOMER ASSISTANCE

SUGGESTIONS FOR OBTAINING SERVICE FOR YOUR VEHICLE . . .282 IF YOU NEED ASSISTANCE .....282 WARRANTYINFORMATION.....284 REPORTING SAFETY DEFECTS . .284 PUBLICATION ORDER FORMS . . .285

281 SUGGESTIONS FOR IF YOU NEED Authorized dealer name OBTAINING SERVICE ASSISTANCE Vehicle Identification Number (VIN) FOR YOUR VEHICLE The manufacturer and its authorized Vehicle delivery date and mileage Prepare For The dealer are vitally interested in your Appointment satisfaction. We want you to be happy FIAT Customer Center with our products and services. If you are having warranty work done, P.O. Box 21–8004 Auburn Hills, MI be sure to bring the right papers with Warranty service must be done by an 48321–8004 you, as well as your warranty folder. All authorized dealer. We strongly Phone: 1-888-242-6342 work to be performed may not be recommend that you take the vehicle to an authorized dealer. They know your FIAT Canada Customer covered by the warranty. Discuss Center additional charges with the service vehicle the best, and are most concerned manager. Keep a maintenance log of that you get prompt and high quality P.O. Box 1621 service. The manufacturer's authorized your vehicle's service history, as this Windsor, Ontario N9A 4H6 dealer have the facilities, factory-trained can often provide a clue to the current Phone: (800) 465-2001 English / (800) problem. technicians, special tools, and the latest CUSTOMER ASSISTANCE information to ensure the vehicle is fixed 387-9983 French Prepare A List correctly and in a timely manner. In Mexico Contact This is why you should always talk to an Make a written list of your vehicle's Av. Prolongacion Paseo de la Reforma, authorized dealer service manager first. problems or the specific work you want 1240 done. If you've had an accident or work Most matters can be resolved with this Sante Fe C.P. 05109 done that is not on your maintenance process. Mexico, D. F. log, let the service advisor know. If for some reason you are still not In Mexico City: 5081-7568 Be Reasonable With satisfied, talk to the general manager or Requests owner of the authorized dealer. They Outside Mexico City: 1-800-505-1300 want to know if you need assistance. If you list a number of items and you Puerto Rico And U.S. must have your vehicle by the end of If an authorized dealer is unable to Virgin Islands the day, discuss the situation with the resolve the concern, you may contact Customer Service Chrysler International service advisor and list the items in the manufacturer's customer center. Services LLC order of priority. At many authorized Any communication to the P.O. Box 191857 dealers, you may obtain a rental vehicle manufacturer's customer center should San Juan 00919-1857 at a minimal daily charge. If you need a include the following information: rental, it is advisable to make these Tel.: (888) 242-6342 Owner's name and address arrangements when you call for an Fax: (787) 782-3345 appointment. Owner's telephone number (home and office) 282 Customer Assistance the vehicle delivery date. If you have For The Hearing Or any questions about the service Warning! Speech Impaired contract, call the manufacturer's (TDD/TTY) Service Contract National Customer Hotline at 1-800-521-9922 (Canadian To assist customers who have hearing Engine exhaust (internal combustion residents, call (800) 465-2001 English / difficulties, the manufacturer has engines only), some of its constituents, and (800) 387-9983 French). certain vehicle components contain, or installed special TDD emit, chemicals known to the State of (Telecommunication Devices for the The manufacturer will not stand behind any service contract that is not the California to cause cancer and birth Deaf) equipment at its customer center. defects, or other reproductive harm. In Any hearing or speech impaired manufacturer's service contract. It is addition, certain fluids contained in vehicles customer, who has access to a TDD or not responsible for any service contract and certain products of component wear a conventional teletypewriter (TTY) in other than the manufacturer's service contain, or emit, chemicals known to the the United States, can communicate contract. If you purchased a service State of California to cause cancer and with the manufacturer by dialing contract that is not a manufacturer's birth defects, or other reproductive harm. 1-800-380-CHRY. service contract, and you require service after the manufacturer's New Canadian residents with hearing Vehicle Limited Warranty expires, difficulties that require assistance can please refer to the contract documents, use the special needs relay service and contact the person listed in those offered by Bell Canada. For TTY documents. teletypewriter users, dial 711 and for Voice callers, dial 1-800-855-0511 to We appreciate that you have made a connect with a Bell Relay Service major investment when you purchased operator. the vehicle. An authorized dealer has also made a major investment in Service Contract facilities, tools, and training to assure You may have purchased a service that you are absolutely delighted with contract for a vehicle to help protect the ownership experience. You will be you from the high cost of unexpected pleased with their sincere efforts to repairs after the manufacturer's New resolve any warranty issues or related Vehicle Limited Warranty expires. The concerns. manufacturer stands behind only the manufacturer's service contracts. If you purchased a manufacturer's service contract, you will receive Plan Provisions and an Owner Identification Card in the mail within three weeks of 283 WARRANTY REPORTING SAFETY To contact NHTSA, you may call the INFORMATION DEFECTS Vehicle Safety Hotline toll free at See the Warranty Information Booklet, In The 50 United States 1-888-327-4236 (TTY: for the terms and provisions of FCA US And Washington, D.C. 1-800-424-9153); or go to LLC and FCA Canada Inc. warranties http://www.safercar.gov ; or write to: applicable to this vehicle and market. If you believe that your vehicle has a defect that could cause a crash Administrator, NHTSA, 1200 New or cause injury or death, you should Jersey Avenue, SE., West Building, immediately inform the National Washington, D.C. 20590. You can Highway Traffic Safety also obtain other information about Administration (NHTSA) in addition motor vehicle safety from to notifying FCA US LLC. http://www.safercar.gov . If NHTSA receives similar In Canada complaints, it may open an If you believe that your vehicle has CUSTOMER ASSISTANCE investigation, and if it finds that a a safety defect, you should contact safety defect exists in a group of the Customer Service Department vehicles, it may order a recall and immediately. Canadian customers remedy campaign. However, NHTSA who wish to report a safety defect cannot become involved in individual to the Canadian government should problems between you, your contact Transport Canada, Motor authorized dealer or FCA US LLC. Vehicle Defect Investigations and Recalls at 1-800-333-0510 or go to http://www.tc.gc.ca/roadsafety/ .

284 PUBLICATION Diagnostic Procedure Manuals Owner's Manuals ORDER FORMS Diagnostic Procedure Manuals are filled These Owner's Manuals have been with diagrams, charts and detailed prepared with the assistance of service To order the following manuals, you illustrations. These practical manuals and engineering specialists to acquaint may use either the website or the make it easy for students and you with specific FCA US LLC vehicles. phone numbers listed below. Visa, technicians to find and fix problems on Included are starting, operating, Mastercard, American Express, and computer-controlled vehicle systems emergency and maintenance Discover orders are accepted. and features. They show exactly how to procedures as well as specifications, Service Manuals find and correct problems the first time, capabilities and safety tips. These comprehensive Service Manuals using step-by-step troubleshooting and Call toll free at: provide the information that students drivability procedures, proven and professional technicians need in diagnostic tests and a complete list of 1-800-890-4038 (U.S.) diagnosing/troubleshooting, problem all tools and equipment. 1-800-387-1143 (Canada) solving, maintaining, servicing, and Or repairing FCA US LLC vehicles. A complete working knowledge of the Visit us on the Worldwide Web at: vehicle, system, and/or components is www.techauthority.com written in straightforward language with illustrations, diagrams, and charts.

285 INDEX Automatic Temperature Control Checking Levels ...... 234 About Your Brakes ...... 153 (ATC)...... 52 Child Restraint ...... 130 ABS System ...... 114 Automatic Transmission ...... 156 Child Restraints INDEX Active Adaptive Shift (AAS) ...... 158 Auxiliary Power Outlet ...... 63 Child Restraints ...... 130 Adaptive Front Lighting System Clean Air Gasoline ...... 176 (AFS) ...... 42 B-Pillar Location ...... 245 Cleaning Additives, Fuel ...... 177 Battery (Maintenance)...... 237 Wheels ...... 253 Advanced Keyless Entry System Battery charging procedure ...... 238 Climate Control ...... 45 Key Left In Trunk ...... 21 Battery Recharging ...... 238 Close The Hood ...... 69 Locking Doors ...... 21 Blind Spot Monitoring...... 116 Compact Spare Tire...... 252 Passive Entry ...... 21 Body and underbody warranty . . . .257 Contract, Service ...... 283 Request Switch ...... 21 Body lubrication ...... 238 Convertible Top ...... 70 Unlocking Doors ...... 21 Bodywork (care and maintenance). .257 Convertible top maintenance .....261 AirBag...... 134,138 Boot, Convertible Top Lowering ....70 Cooling Advance Front Air Bag . . . .134,138 Boot, Convertible Top Precautions . .73 Air Conditioning ...... 50 Air Bag Warning Light ...... 149 Boot, Convertible Top Raising .....72 Cupholders ...... 64 Enhanced Accident Response . .150 Brake System...... 153 Customer Assistance ...... 282 Event Data Recorder (EDR) .148,225 Brake/Clutch Fluid (Level Check). . .236 FrontAirBag...... 149 Brakes ...... 153,272 Data Recorder, Event ...... 148 Maintaining Your Air Bag Bright-metal maintenance ...... 261 Daytime Running Lights ...... 40 System ...... 148 Diagnostic System, Onboard .....111 Air Bag Maintenance ...... 148 Camera, Rear...... 170 Dimensions ...... 275 Air Pressure, Tires ...... 248 Carbon Monoxide Warning ...... 177 Disabled Vehicle Towing .....223,225 Alarm Center Seat Storage Driver's Seat Back Tilt ...... 33 Vehicle Security Alarm ...... 24,25 Compartment ...... 61 Driving in flooded area ...... 184 Alarm (Security Alarm) ...... 24,25 Certification Label ...... 179 Driving tips ...... 181 Aluminium wheel maintenance . . . .261 Changing A Flat Tire.....206,207,241 Automatic Dimming Mirror...... 37 Chart, Tire Sizing...... 242 Electric power steering ...... 74 Automatic Headlights...... 40 Check Engine Light (Malfunction Electric Remote Mirrors ...... 37 Indicator Light) ...... 112 Electronic Brake Control System Exhaust Gas Caution ...... 177 Gasoline, Clean Air ...... 176 Traction Control System ...... 114 Exterior Lights ...... 38 Gasoline, Reformulated ...... 176 Emergency Fuel Filler Door Gear Selector Positions ...... 157 Release ...... 178 Flash-To-Pass ...... 40 GVWR...... 179 Emergency Key ...... 16 Flashers Emergency, In Case Of ...... 211 Hazard Warning ...... 187 Hazard Warning Flasher ...... 187 Hazard Warning Flasher ...... 187 Turn Signal ...... 41 Hazardous driving ...... 181 Jacking ...... 206,207,241 Flooded Engine Starting ...... 222 Head Restraints ...... 34,35 Jump Starting ...... 220,221 Fluid And Lubricants ...... 278 Headlight ...... 38 Overheating ...... 222 Fluid Capacities ...... 277 Headlights Towing...... 223,225 Fog Lights...... 41 Adjusting The Headlight Emission control system ...... 74 Follow Me Home ...... 41 Abroad...... 42 Emission Control System Front Lights (Light Bulbs)...... 190 High Beam ...... 40 Maintenance...... 112 Front Wipers Passing ...... 40 Engine ...... 270 Wiper Operation ...... 43 Heavy-Duty Use Of The Vehicle Exhaust Gas Caution ...... 177 Fuel (Scheduled Servicing) ...... 228 Fails To Start ...... 222 Additives ...... 177 HomeLink (Garage Door Opener) . . .58 Flooded, Starting ...... 222 Clean Air ...... 176 Hood Release ...... 69 Jump Starting ...... 220,221 Ethanol ...... 176 How To Use This Manual ...... 3 Overheating ...... 222 Materials Added ...... 177 Starting ...... 20,221 Methanol ...... 176 Identification Data ...... 267 Engine Compartment ...... 234 Fuel Consumption Display...... 86 Inside Rearview Mirror ...... 36 Engine Coolant (Level Check).....235 Fuel Economy Monitor ...... 86 Instrument Cluster Display Information Display ...... 77,78 Engine Oil (Level Check) ...... 235 Fuel Filler Cap ...... 178 Interior Lights...... 62 Enhanced Accident Response Fuel Filler Door ...... 177 Interiors ...... 263 Feature ...... 150 Fuse Block (Engine Compartment) .200 Internal Equipment ...... 61 Environment protection systems ....74 Fuse Block (Interior) ...... 204 Essential information ...... 3 Fuses (Interior) ...... 198 Jack Location...... 206 Ethanol ...... 176 Fuses (Underhood) ...... 199 Event Data Recorder ...... 148 Jack Operation ...... 206,207,241 Jump Starting...... 220,221 Manual Climate Control System ....48 Personalization Features ...... 107 Heating ...... 50 Placard, Tire And Loading KeyFob...... 14 Manual Transmission ...... 155 Information...... 245 INDEX Emergency Key ...... 14 Manual, Service ...... 285 Plastic part maintenance...... 263 Programming Additional Key Methanol...... 176 Power Fobs ...... 24 Mirrors...... 36 Brakes ...... 153 Key-In Reminder...... 20 Automatic Dimming ...... 37 Door Locks ...... 26,31 Electric Remote ...... 37 Mirrors ...... 37 Lane Change And Turn Signals ....41 Exterior Folding ...... 38 Pregnant Women And Seat Belts . .127 Lane Change Assist...... 42 Outside ...... 36 Pretensioners Lap/Shoulder Belts ...... 125,128 Seat Belts ...... 129 Rearview ...... 36 Leaving Home Light System ...... 42 Protection from atmospheric Life Of Tires ...... 250 agents (bodywork) ...... 257 Occupant Restraints ...... 124 Lights Onboard Diagnostic System .....111 Daytime Running ...... 40 Radar Sensors ...... 164 Operating Precautions ...... 111 Fog ...... 41 Radial Ply Tires ...... 249 Outside Rearview Mirrors ...... 36 Hazard Warning Flasher ...... 187 Radio Frequency Overhead Light (Bulb General Information ...... 20,23 Passing ...... 40 Replacement) ...... 197 Turn Signal ...... 41 Radio transmitter and mobile Overheating, Engine...... 222 phones ...... 4 Loading Vehicle ...... 179 Overloading ...... 185 Rear Camera ...... 170 Tires ...... 245 Owner's Manual (Operator Rear Lights (Light Bulbs) ...... 190 Locks Manual) ...... 285 Rear Park Assist System...... 165 PowerDoor ...... 26,31 Paint damage touch-up ...... 260 Rearview Mirrors...... 36 Maintaining The Finish ...... 259 Parking Brake...... 154 Recommended Tire Inflation Pressure ...... 268 Maintenance Monitor ...... 83 Passing Light ...... 40 Recorder, Event Data ...... 148 Maintenance procedures...... 238 Performance ...... 280 Recreational Towing...... 180 Malfunction Indicator Light (Check Periodic Checks (Scheduled Engine) ...... 112 Servicing)...... 228 Reformulated Gasoline ...... 176 Personal Settings ...... 107 Refueling Procedure...... 177 Refueling The Vehicle ...... 175 Pretensioners ...... 129 Starting the engine ...... 152 Reminder, Seat Belt ...... 129 Rear Seat ...... 125 Steering ...... 274 Replacement Tires...... 250 Seats ...... 33 Column Lock ...... 35 Replacing A Bulb ...... 187 Adjustment ...... 33 Tilt Column ...... 35 Replacing Exterior Light Bulbs . . . .190 Heated ...... 33 Wheel, Tilt ...... 35 Replacing Fuses ...... 197 Seatback Release ...... 33 Storage ...... 61 Replacing Interior Light Bulbs.....197 Tilting ...... 33 Storing the vehicle ...... 257 Reporting Safety Defects ...... 284 Seats And Fabric Parts (Cleaning) . .263 Sun Visor ...... 62 Restraint, Head ...... 34 Security Alarm Supplemental Restraint System - Restraints, Child ...... 130 Security Alarm ...... 24,25 AirBag...... 134,138 Sentry Key Suspensions ...... 273 Safety Defects, Reporting ...... 284 Key Programming ...... 24 Symbols...... 3 Safety Information, Tire ...... 241 Service Assistance ...... 282 Saving fuel and protection of the Service Contract ...... 283 Tilt Steering Column ...... 35 environment ...... 181 Service Manuals ...... 285 Tire And Loading Information Scheduled servicing...... 227 Shift Lever Override ...... 159 Placard ...... 245 Seat Belt Shift position indication...... 157 Tire chains...... 183 Energy Management Feature . . .130 Shoulder Belts ...... 125,128 Tire Markings ...... 241 Lap/Shoulder Belts ...... 125,128 Signals, Turn ...... 41 Tire Rotation ...... 255 Pregnant Women ...... 127 Snow chains ...... 254 Tire Safety Information ...... 241 Seat Belt Pretensioner ...... 129 Snow Tires ...... 251 Tire Service Kit ...... 211 Seat Belt Reminder ...... 129 Spare Tire ...... 206,252,253 Tires...... 248,252,256 Seat Belt Reminder ...... 129 Speed Control (Cruise Control) . . . .162 Aging (Life Of Tires) ...... 250 Seat Belts ...... 125 Sport Mode ...... 161 Air Pressure ...... 248 Child Restraint ...... 130 Starting ...... 20,221 Changing ...... 206,207,241 Front Seat ...... 125 Engine Fails To Start ...... 222 Compact Spare ...... 252 Pregnant Women ...... 127 Starting And Operating...... 20,221 Flat Changing ...... 211 Starting Procedures...... 20,221 General Information ...... 248,252 High Speed ...... 249 Inflation Pressures ...... 248 Towing Trailers ...... 180 Washer Operation...... 43,44 Jacking ...... 206,207,241 TPMS (Tire Pressure Monitoring Washers, Windshield ...... 43 Life Of Tires ...... 250 System) ...... 121 Wheel And Wheel Trim ...... 253 INDEX Load Capacity ...... 245 Transmission ...... 271 Wheel And Wheel Trim Care...... 253 Pressure Monitor System Tread Wear Indicators...... 250 Wheels And Tires ...... 241 (TPMS) ...... 116 Trunk Lid Window And Headlight Washer Quality Grading ...... 256 Closing ...... 68 Fluid (Level Check) ...... 237 Radial ...... 249 Opening ...... 66 Window interiors (cleaning) ...... 265 Replacement ...... 250 Trunk Light (Bulb Replacement) . . .197 Windows Safety ...... 241,248 Turn Signals...... 41 Driver/Passenger Window Sizes ...... 242 Controls ...... 56 Snow Tires ...... 251 Undercoating ...... 261 Power Windows ...... 56 Spare Tire ...... 206,252,253 Uniform Tire Quality Grades ...... 256 Window Lockout ...... 58 Spinning ...... 249 Windshield wiper blades Vehicle Loading ...... 179,245 (replacing) ...... 239 Tread Wear Indicators ...... 250 Vehicle modifications/alterations.....4 Windshield Wipers ...... 43 ToOpenDeckLid...... 66 Vent Operation ...... 46 Windstop ...... 66 ToOpenHood...... 69 Winter driving ...... 182 Towing Warning Flasher, Hazard ...... 187 Wiper blades ...... 239 Disabled Vehicle ...... 223,225 Warranty Information ...... 284 Wrecker Towing ...... 223,225 Towing Eyes...... 223 INSTALLATION OF RADIO TRANSMITTING The antenna cable should be as short as practical and EQUIPMENT routed away from the vehicle wiring when possible. Use Special design considerations are incorporated into this only fully shielded coaxial cable. vehicle’s electronic system to provide immunity to radio Carefully match the antenna and cable to the radio to frequency signals. Mobile two-way radios and telephone ensure a low Standing Wave Ratio (SWR). equipment must be installed properly by trained person- nel. The following must be observed during installation. Mobile radio equipment with output power greater than normal may require special precautions. The positive power connection should be made directly to the battery and fused as close to the battery as possible. All installations should be checked for possible interfer- The negative power connection should be made to body ence between the communications equipment and the sheet metal adjacent to the negative battery connection. vehicle’s electronic systems. This connection should not be fused. Antennas for two-way radios should be mounted on the roof or the rear area of the vehicle. Care should be used in mounting antennas with magnet bases. Magnets may affect the accuracy or operation of the compass on vehicles so equipped. 18BAFX-126-AA ©2017 FCA US LLC. All Rights Reserved. FIAT is a registered trademark of FCA Group First Edition Marketing S.p.A., used under license by FCA US LLC. Printed in U.S.A.